Nathan katalog 2015

Page 1

Learning Materials 2015 N U R S E RY S C H O O L S • K I N D E R G A RT E N S • D AY C A R E C E N T R E S • S P E C I A L N E E D S

H E L P I N G Y O U P R E PA R E T H E F U T U R E


HELPING YOU PREPARE THE FUTURE

This year’s top picks! • New skills development games, handling sets and learning tools from babies to 6 years old. Children are encouraged to develop their spoken language with the Musical Instrument Audio Game (p. 12) and the Sound Situations Lotto (p. 13). Our Sorting Set - Animals (p. 31) and First Acromaths Set (p. 41) will whet children’s appetites for logic and numeracy skills! When it comes to discovering the world around us, Zoom Science (p. 6) appeals to their curiosity and brings the scientific method within everyone’s reach! • The Clorofile range (pp. 206-223) offers specific solutions for arranging the classroom with tables, chairs, activity units and storage units designed to encourage play, activity and experimentation. • With Actimousse® for Little Ones motor skills modules (p. 212) for toddlers, your little explorers will enjoy make new discoveries! Our furniture and living space solutions are designed for children’s safety and well-being and encourage the creation of play areas and activities suitable for age and capabilities of each individual. Together we can ensure that all children reach their full potential. THE EDITORIAL TEAM

Visit our website:

www.nathan.fr/learningmaterials

Printed in France by printing Pollina 85407 Luçon

Photos 2015 : © NATHAN : RENÉ BRASSART - JEAN-PIERRE DELAGARDE - CHRISTOPHE GRUNER - MARC MOITESSIER - LAURENCE MOUTON - GILLES PIAT - RÉMI ROBERT - SYLVA VILLEROT / © CORBIS : ÉRIC AUDRAS / © FOTOLIA : ENDOSTOCK - YURIY POZNUKHOV - CANAKRIS - HALLGERD - CH’LU - MONIKA ADAMCZYK - CHANTALS - FRANZ PFLUEGL - CHRISTIAN LARUE - MICHAEL KEMPF / © GETTY IMAGES : CHRIS RYAN - PANDO HALL / © ISTOCK PHOTOS : BART COENDERS / © SHUTTERSTOCK : BRIAN CHASE - THOMAS M. PERKINS Images 3D : ©ARCHITEXTE SYLVAINE GUILLOU ET FANNY LUSTIN. The greatest care is taken to ensure that the catalogue descriptions and illustrations are accurate. However colours and product details may vary from those presented.


Our Values and Commitments


Nathan, education partner for longer than we can remember! Learning: our profession • Nathan has been in education for more than a century, imagining, designing and publishing educational materials and resources to encourage children to bloom and succeed - this is the “heart” of our business. • Nathan has always defended its educational values with conviction: fostering discovery, learning and sharing knowledge through the pleasure of discovery. Starting children’s education off through sensory methods, Nathan is the leading publisher in the distribution of the “fun learning” concept in schools.

Nathan in schools • Nathan is a renowned, favourite partner to education professionals. Our products are designed and created alongside teachers and education experts to meet both your needs and those of children to the fullest possible extent. • Nathan offers a wide range of educational resources and equipment for all types of institutions that work with small children. Nathan Learning Materials currently has over 1000 different items, and over a hundred more are added every year.

Nathan across the world • A world-renowned publisher, Nathan is a truly international company. We support education policy on five continents. We have a network of local partners who share our philosophy and our involvement in pre-school education.

II


1

Educational excellence • Nathan

3

The Nathan guarantee

Learning Materia ls offers over 1000 items for • All our produc helping your ed ts are guaranteed ucation methods: educat for a minimum of 1 year for qual ional play, mater ity and faults oc ial for discovery and le cu rring during normal, correct arning, furniture usage. for crèches, leisure facilities and nursery scho • Many items ha ols. ve an extended • We subscribe to guarantee perio of 2, 3 or 5 year the idea that the d s: th ey nu ar rs e er in y school dicated by is a place in which the “guarantee” the early learning image in your ca of language, oral understandin talogue. g, introductory re • A ll ou r ar ticles are tested ading and counting build th and checked up e necessary foun on receipt from the dations in the manufacturers (q first years and gi ua ve the child the lit y of st the ructure and mat best possible erials, operation, opportunities at school. Our in-hou du ra bility and reliability) to guar se design antee optimum team works in cl quality levels. ose cooperation with teachers, researchers and specialists. Choo sin g Nathan’s educational valu e and quality mea ns investing in the future of our children. • All our produc ts are tested unde r genuine user conditions by ch ildren and adults We have set up prior to being released for sale partnerships with . local companies for th e distribution of our products. These partners en sure that you are provided with instructions on how to use our pr od ucts, and provide you with unrivalled quality of service.

4oQfusaelirtvyic

e

2

Compliance wit h safety standard s and quality • Natha

n attaches enor mous importan ce to ensuring that its products are co m pliant with safety standard s. They are a de termining factor from the initial developm ent phases and are complie d with througho ut the product manufacturing an d supply proces s. • In addition to their educationa l value, all our products are de veloped with th e greatest attention to the quality of raw m aterials, the manufacturing pr ocess and safety requirements to ensure that th ey are suitable fo r intensive use by children for many years. • In collaboratio n with manufactu rers and distributors arou nd the world, w e are able to offer materia ls that meet the de manding, high-quality crite ria required by te achers.

5

Environmental responsibility

We design and choose environm entallyfriendly produc ts by favouring th e use of environmentally -friendly materia ls: wood and paper from sust ainably managed forests, recyclable and bi odegradable plas tics, etc. • We take partic ular care over th e manufacturing processes used by our suppliers : reduced energy consumpt ion, waste proces sing, the use of solvent-fre e paints and varn ish at comparable qual ity levels. • We constantly take care to redu ce our logistics environmental fo otprint: we give priority to sea freight for ou r supplies, optim ised delivery turnarounds and lorry refilling, ne w packaging solutions, recycl ed packaging, et c. • Our products are designed to last: - Nathan’s expe rtise and quality is well known among educatio n professionals; - modular equipm ent that you can add to and grow; - keeping our pr oducts up over the years, with the option of re supplies and the provision of certain parts. Please see page s VI

and VII for more information.

III


Nathan at your side As a long-standing partner of pre-school education, Nathan has always been able to rely on the expertise and creativity of teachers to design high-quality, innovative educational products.

How are our products made? The release of a new Nathan product is the result of close collaboration between specialists in many different areas. Publishers, teachers, educators, psychologists, illustrators, designers and manufacturers work together to meet all your requirements to the fullest possible extent. Our aim is to provide you with a high-quality long-lasting product, designed for intensive communal use and which allows children to develop their full potential. This is the know-how that Nathan is able to offer you!

Product 6. Submission to test laboratories

6

7 5 4

2. Examination of the project or manuscript by the publisher

2

5. Testing performed by Nathan in nursery schools

4. Prototype production

3 1

7. Start of production

3. Presentation of the entire project to the Publishing Committee

1. Rafting of educational specifications and objectives by the publisher, incorporating environmental aspects from the design stage

Project

Do you have some interesting ideas? We can make them a reality... • Some of your colleagues already help us create innovative new products. You can join us. Do you have ideas for activities or educational games based on your day-to-day experience? We can bring them to life. • Draw up your ideas and send them to us. If your idea is chosen, it can be published and you’ll become one of our co-authors. Please send your ideas to: Nathan Matériel Éducatif - Comité Éditorial 25, avenue Pierre de Coubertin 75211 Paris Cedex 13 - France

IV


Compliance with standards and regulations

Material for Motor Skills

Nathan attaches enormous importance to ensuring that its products are compliant with health and safety standards. We work in close collaboration with independent accredited professional bodies whose role is to confirm the compliance of our products with applicable French and European standards.

Health

The compliance testing of our products is generally performed in two stages: during the product design phase and during the manufacturing phase.

REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals) is an EU regulation aimed at improving awareness of the chemical substances used in industry in order to restrict their impact on health and the environment. This regulation entered into force on 1 June 2007, but the recording and authorisation procedures are being gradually introduced over a ten-year period. • Our foam modules and mats bear the Oeko-Tex 100 “Confidence in Textiles” label. This internationally recognised label guarantees that the products contain no chemicals harmful to health and skin (formaldehyde, heavy metals, phthalates, benzene, etc.).

Safety All our products covered by European standards bear the CE mark. The CE mark is obligatory for all products subject to one or more European Directives dealing with safety, public health and consumer protection. It appears on the product itself, on the packaging or the supplied documentation.

Toys • European Directive 2009/48/EC on the safety of toys: this new directive entered into force twice on 20 July 2011 for standards EN 71-1 and EN 71-2 (Mechanical and Flammability) and on 20 July 2013 for standard EN 71-3 (Chemicals). All our products classed as toys shall henceforth fully meet the obligations set out in this directive. • European standard EN 71 on the safety of toys: tests on physical properties (stability, shock resistance, fall resistance and traction resistance under the least favourable conditions of use), flammability tests, chemical tests etc. CE compliance statements for our products are available upon request.

Furniture • French standard XP D 60602 and European standard EN 1729 for school furniture: equipment durability and usability, and user body types. • French standard NF D 62050 for school furniture and storage units: stability and rigidity. • European standard EN 1021-1 and 2: flammability of upholstered furniture and seating.

Upholstered furniture and seating • European standard EN 1021-1 and 2: flammability of upholstered furniture and seating.

• French standard NF S 54-300 on Educational Material for Motor Skills: checking solidity, stability and the absence of trapping hazards for children aged between 0 and 12. • French and European standard NF-EN 12503-1-4-5-6 on gym mats.

• Our products comply with European regulations regarding health. • Our products comply with the REACH regulation that imposes manufacturing, trade and usage restrictions applicable to certain substances with the aim of protecting human health and the environment.

We constantly analyse the raw materials listed in the REACH appendix in relevant products in order to guarantee that their levels of azo dyes, phthalates, cadmium and PCP are well within the statutory limits. Azo dyes make up a sizable amount of colourings and are widely used in fabric items. The pigments of azo dyes are chemically produced and can release certain aromatic amines that are deemed to be carcinogenic. Phthalates are regularly used in plastics (especially PVC) to make them flexible. Their use in toys has been drastically reduced in Europe due to their toxicity and the potential environmental impact.

Air quality • Moving forward with our health and environment initiatives, we analyse the formaldehyde levels in our wood-based materials in order to ensure that they are kept to a minimum (E1 classification of our materials). Formaldehyde is a volatile organic compound (VOC) which is harmful to human health. It is a solvent used in many synthetic materials, in particular glues and resins used in wooden panels. Since 2002, the E1 standard has guaranteed strict formaldehyde thresholds. • French Decree No. 2011-1728 of 2 December 2011, concerning the monitoring of air quality in nurseries and infant schools, came into force on 1 January 2015. All the materials we select comply with this regulatory provision.

V


ity: l i b i s n espo y? R l a i c So precisel e t a r o p itude Cor what is it tive att c a o r p inable SR) is a

a C ibility ( ciples of sust o take into s n o p s ned t ial Re e prin ate Soc omotion of th ale. It is desig of company r o p r o C r ts sc g the p porate l impac ices and thus ent. t involvin ent on a cor nvironmenta m a le pr c e pm environ develo the social and he best possib otecting the t tt nd pr accoun o as to adop ciety a o s s g y in prov activit te to im u ib r t n co

Nathan and sustainable development Our approach • At Nathan, our commitment to CSR is nothing new. For many years now, our activity and our relations with our partners (suppliers, customers, service providers, employees, public institutions, etc.) have incorporated social, environmental and economic prerogatives.

Today, we are pursuing and intensifying our commitment:

>, :<7769;

- With our official endorsement, in June 2012, of the United Nations Global Compact, the objective of which is to promote 10 universal principles concerning human rights, labour rights, environmental protection and anticorruption. - With the implementation of a Corporate Social and Environmental Steering Committee responsible for its deployment in the company. Our CSR commitment revolves around three principles: - Reducing the impact of our activity on the environment. - Acting to ensure greater equality and fulfilment in the workplace. - Making our business reflect our social commitment.

Preserving the environment Offering sustainable, environmentally-friendly products • Nathan has always been committed to the idea that “socially-responsible” quality is by its very nature made to last: - We are developing products using environmentally-friendly materials and new materials that are harder-wearing and lighter, so as to reduce the impact on the environment and to optimise the serviceable life of our products. - We perform checks at key stages of the manufacturing process in order to guarantee optimal quality and finish. - The woods used in the manufacturing process for our furniture mainly come from environmentally-managed forests

VI

and we are against the use of wood taken from illegal logging.

- Our paper comes from environmentallymanaged forests and is elemental chlorine free (ECF). ECF bleaching has been recognised by the European Commission and the US Environmental Protection Agency as the “best available technology”.

- Depending on the intended use of our materials, we concentrate on environmentally-friendly, water-based paints. These water-soluble paints are guaranteed solvent-free.


Promoting responsible purchasing policies

TS

MITME

N

CO

M

- We favour reliable manufacturers and partners who provide excellent quality and are committed to the environment: reduced energy consumption, processing and re-use of waste (wood, paper, gloss paints, etc). - We carefully select our suppliers based on ethical criteria: respect for ILO (International Labour Organisation) conventions regarding forced child labour, respect for basic human rights and inspection of working conditions. Our ICTI (International Council of Toy Industries) certified toy suppliers are subject to inspection audits every year, according to very strict criteria.

Reduced use of packaging and reduced paper consumption - Our boxes and other waste (paper, plastic materials) are all collected and recycled. We have reduced the paper requirements of our catalogues by 30% over 5 years.

Streamlining our logistics and the impact on the environment In an effort to reduce CO2 emissions relating to the transportation of our raw materials and products, we are constantly seeking to optimise our logistics and to reduce our energy consumption. Three priority areas: - Proximity to production locations: over 80% of our production is made in Europe. - Our supplies mainly come using sea freight in order to reduce their carbon footprint. - We provide flat-pack furniture in order to optimise packaging requirements.

Raising awareness of sustainable development among our staff A number of initiatives have been undertaken at Nathan to promote sustainable development in the everyday activities of our employees: - the use of energy-saving lights in our premises - the recycling of office paper, ink cartridges, light bulbs and batteries - the provision of drinking fountains connected to the mains water supply - a purchasing policy favouring ecological products (envelopes, paper, etc.)

Acting as a socially-responsible company • Contributing to think tanks on environmental and social issues Editis-Éditions Nathan is a member of Comité 21, which works in favour of sustainable and fair corporate development. • Acting to respect human rights and rights of the child, especially the basic right to education - Nathan is a partner of Unicef, working to raise awareness among young people of the rights of the child, international solidarity and citizenship. - Nathan is developing special schemes to combat illiteracy and to help the insertion of young people and adults in difficult circumstances into the world of work. • Education about sustainable development Our role as publisher of education resources also creates the responsibility to act alongside children and teachers to raise awareness of “living together” and respect for the environment.

VII


S c h o o l te a c h e r, tu to r, e x p e rt in p e d th e ir c a re e r a g o g y o r in p a th a n d fi e a va ri e ty o f ld o f sp e c ia p e d a g o g ic a o th e r d is c ip li sa ti o n , th e l exce ll e n ce li n e s. .. W h a y a ll sh a re th , th e c h il d re a u th o rs w it h teve r e n sa m e a m b it ’s e n joy m e n a p la ce o f h io n to co m b t a n d su p p o o n o u r th is y in e rt fo r th e te e a r! a c h e r. M e e t our

André

Jacquart her training ssor at a teac pedagogy fe ro p s ic at hem the A former mat now works primarily on problem-solving. n o o h w d e an g l colle schoo inisterial ics in nursery the French M of mathemat esponding member of rr ys. He was a co Group on To

tions

Main publica 3 ers Set p. 2 • First Numb hs p. 28 at • The Zigom Lengths p. 36 g n ri ve co is D • gths p. 37 • Colour Len

. 38 Table Sets p • Quadriludi ets p. 41 a hs S • Acromat 0 areness p. 5 l • Spatia Aw . 53 p • Geocolor o p. 78 • Quantissim

Valérie Barry

Senior lecturer in education tics. mathema and associate professor in ds cia She specialises in spe l nee y. rsit ive Un at or tut a learning and is

Publication

om p. 6 • Zoom - The Animal Kingd

Françoise

Eriksen

Schooling p tutor, her rogramme superv work cen isor and fo tr phonolog ical learnines on language sit rmer u of the alp habetic p g and acquisition ations, rinciple.

Main publ

ications

• The Rig ht Order of Picture p. 15 s • From Pic tures to W (in collab ords o Fournier D ration with Myriam ulac) p. 18

adec Hervé Le M(sp ecialising in

cher Specialist schooltea ly ces). He is particular an rb tu dis l ica psycholog al gic ch for pedago interested in the sear led children ub tro r fo s response ents of running on mp co e th in and oup. gr ss a cla

Main publications p. 76

ial Awareness • Fingercards - Spat ers p. 77 mb Nu • Fingercards 81 p. s og Fr • 16 Little

VIII


2

P. P

172

Early Learning

Artistic Activities

Learning Language .......................................... p. 4 Discovering Writing ......................................... p. 20 Discovering Maths ............................................ p. 23 Discovering Time ............................................... p. 54 Discovering the World .................................... p. 56

Music ..................................................................... p. 174 Arts and Crafts ................................................. p. 176

P.

58

P.

204

Educational Games

Furniture

Learning Games ................................................. p. 60 Educational Games .......................................... p. 78

Spaces for Toddlers ....................................... p. 206 Spaces for Older Children........................... p. 216 Communal Areas ............................................. p. 231 Library Furniture.............................................. p. 238 Storage Units..................................................... p. 246 Activity Equipment ........................................ p. 258

P.

84

Skills Development and Early Motor Activities Sensory Skills Development........................ p. 86 Fine Motor Skills ............................................... p. 92 Construction ....................................................... p. 104 Jigsaws and Puzzles ....................................... p. 114 Early Learning .................................................... p. 130

P.

P.

264

Physical Activities Adventure Course Units............................... p. 266 Balance, Coordination and Agility .......... p.280 Indoor and Outdoor Equipment .............. p. 284

136

CONTENTS

P.

Pretend Play Kitchen Corner .................................................. p. 138 Grocery Corner.................................................. p. 149 House Corner ..................................................... p. 151 Theatre Corner .................................................. p. 158 Pretend Group Play ......................................... p. 161 Play Corners........................................................ p. 162

Index .............................................................p. 288 1


2


To discover...

N NEW

Early Learning Zoom - The Animal Kingdom

P.6 NEW

O

ur underlying commitment is to provide learning materials suited to young and older children alike. Designed jointly with educational professionals, our products encourage progressive learning of oral and written language, and the discovery of the world. These innovative products can be used in workshops and small groups, and can be adapted to the child’s progress. Most include a teacher’s leaflet.

Learning Language Starting to Master Language

p.

4

Communication Skills

p. 17

Discovering Writing Preparing to Learn to Write

p. 20

Discovering Maths Sorting Set - Animals

P.31

First Look at Numbers

p. 23

Discovering Shapes, Sizes and Colours

p. 30

Counting and Sorting Material

p. 44

Spatial Awareness

p. 46

Geometry

p. 52

Discovering Time

NEW

Time Awareness

p. 54

Discovering the World Balanced Diet

p. 56

Nature and Environment

p. 57

First Acromaths Set

P.41

The icon denotes that the workshop contains a teacher’s leaflet.

3


Learning Language

Starting to Master Language Broaden vocabulary Image banks: • Enhance children’s vocabulary. • Encourage grouping and classification of objects. • Large size pictures: 15 x 12 cm or maxi-format: 21 x 15 cm.

15 cm

21 cm

2 YEARS +

50 PHOTOS

Photo Box - Clothing The aim of this collection is to learn a specific lexicon, and also to encourage the re-use of this vocabulary in dialogue situations during play. The chosen theme helps instil a number of language-related situations from the easiest to more complex: • naming and recognising different items of clothing, • associating each item with a part of the body, • sorting them by season, weather or time of day, • identifying the different ways of finding the different parts of the clothes, etc. The box contains: • 50 colour photographs (21 x 15 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 142 3

21 cm

15 cm

2 YEARS +

50 PHOTOS

Photo Box - Household Items Especially suitable for language-learning, this collection can enrich the vocabulary relating to children’s everyday environment. The card format is particularly suitable for small group workshops and helps to describe each object pictured. The box contains: • 50 photos (21 x 15 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 150 8

POINT Large size pictures to enable group activities.

4


Learning Language

21 cm

2 YEARS +

50 PHOTOS

The 50 photographs enable children to name various objects around the classroom and explore infant activities: • manual activities, • motor skill activities, • musical instruments, • games, • learning materials, • classroom furniture.

15 cm

Photo Box - Objects from School

The box contains: • 50 colour photographs (21 x 15 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 371 1

2 YEARS +

105

12 cm

15 cm

PHOTOS

Photo Box - Food 3 series of 35 photo flashcards: fruit and vegetables, meat and fish and desserts. The box contains: • 105 photos (15 x 12 cm). • Plastic dividers for filing families of photos. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 343 8

12 cm

15 cm

2 YEARS +

105 PHOTOS

Photo Box - Animals 6 series of photo flashcards of animals in their natural environment: mammals, birds, amphibians and reptiles, fish, insects and spiders and a series of diverse species. The plastic box contains: • 105 photos (15 x 12 cm). • Plastic dividers for filing families of photos. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 346 9

5


POINT Various high-quality large-format photo boards

Double-sided 21 cm

28.7 cm

Learning Language

EW

3 YEARS +

128 PHOTOS

Zoom - The Animal Kingdom V. Barry

On the front: observation of part of the animal with a magnifying glass.

8 sets of 16 large-format double-sided photo boards for discovering themes around animal life: physical appearance, the five senses, locomotion, how the body works, growth, reproduction, nutrition, health and hygiene. On the front: observation of one or more details with a magnifying glass; on the back: identification of the whole animal.

On the back: identification of the whole animal.

• The box contains: 64 double-sided colour photo boards (21 x 28.7 cm) and 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 342 300 9 How the body works

Reproduction

18 MONTHS +

Animages A practical, easy-to-handle collection for naming, recognising and comparing adult animals and their young.

10 cm

• 22 pages of tear-proof paper (Ø: 10 cm), connected by a plastic ring. • Set of 2.

Animages - Pets

Animages - Wild Animals

313 309 342 273 6

313 309 342 272 9

2 YEARS +

48 PHOTOS

Photo Box - Everyday Life 48 photos to enrich the child’s vocabulary of everyday life. 6 topics are included: toys, clothes, hygiene, forms of transport, farm animals and musical instruments.

6

• The box contains: 48 photos (12 x 8.5 cm). 313 309 342 220 0


t o

M a s t e r

L a n g u a g e

Prepositions

4 YEARS +

96

In front of

Behind

Learning Language

S t a r t i n g

In front of and behind

PHOTOS

Adjectives

Words in Photos Jacqueline Rioult and Sylvie Demetz

To enhance basic vocabulary and communicate with others, 3 series of photo flashcards illustrating 3 categories of words: - prepositions: 20 photos (below, above, far from, near to, etc.); - qualifying adjectives: 36 photos (light, dark, full, empty, etc.); - action verbs: 40 photos (stroke, garden, whisper, etc.). 5 photos show complex scenes for using terms learnt separately. They encourage children to re-use vocabulary, and facilitate evaluation. Photos based on themes familiar to children: - can be grouped together to tell a story; - can be opposed or worked on individually.

Heavy

Light

Verbs

The box contains: • 96 photos (15 x 12 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 179 0

Heavy and light

Scene photos

Gardening

12 cm

15 cm

4 YEARS +

40 PHOTOS

Photo Box - The Seasons This series of photo flashcards allows the child to discover the cyclical pattern of the weather. For this purpose, the child associates clues, sorts, classes, associates and corrects. The image collection is organised into 6 themes: types of clothing, plants and fruit, animals, landscapes, types of manual work and leisure activities. The landscape theme comprises four sub-themes: the countryside, the sea, the city and the mountains. The box contains: • 40 photos (15 x 12 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 196 8

7


18 cm

24 cm

Learning Language

1 language game

35 photo boards

5 CHILDREN

4 YEARS +

The 5 Senses Games Games for discovering the 5 senses and their function, for developing language and knowledge of the environment. 3 games in 1 to explore the 5 senses. • A language game: using large photos, the children observe, describe the sensations, identify the organs concerned, compare their sensory experiences etc. • A sorting game: sort the photos by sense and associate them with the matching counter-symbols; match by type of sensation, etc. • 2 lotto games: “1 sense” lotto or “5 senses” lotto.

1 sorting game

5 counters

The box contains: • 35 photo boards (24 x 18 cm). • 5 double-sided lotto boards (24 x 18 cm). • 25 photo cards (8 x 7 cm). • 5 round counters (Ø: 6 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 031 1 24 cm

2 lotto games 7 cm 8 cm

18 cm

25 photo cards

On the back “5 senses” lotto

On the front “1 sense” lotto

3 YEARS +

MAGNETIC

32.5 cm

53 cm

PIECES

Everyday Safety Explore and discuss daily situations to help spot and avoid various domestic dangers. As part of our safety education programme, this resource includes linguistic activities using everyday situations that enable children to identify and avoid the various dangers. 4 posters illustrate scenes of everyday life: the kitchen, lounge, bathroom and garden. The teacher facilitates and encourages communication on the illustrated situations using magnetic tokens and cards that represent dangerous actions. These activities provide children with an awareness of household dangers and their prevention.

8

• L/W poster: 53 x 32,5 cm. • L/W token: 4.25 x 4.25 cm / 4.25 x 2.55 cm. • L/W card: 12 x 8 cm. • The folder contains: 4 posters, 40 tokens in magnetic cardboard, 25 cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 135 5

4 scenes in large format in magnetic cardboard 25 cards

40 magnetic tokens


t o

M a s t e r

L a n g u a g e

Learning How to Make Sentences

2 packs of 48 playing cards

4 YEARS +

4 CHILDREN

Learning Language

S t a r t i n g

4 card holders

Language Game 2 This game encourages the construction of simple sentences to describe and identify a picture. Using model cards and corresponding cards, the children describe the picture in turn. Without looking at the cards, the other children must recognise it and complete their own card. Other games are suggested using the cards alone. • L/W model card: 25 x 10 cm. • L/W playing card: 8.5 x 5.5 cm. • The box contains: 4 strong cardboard activity cards to hold the playing cards, 12 model cards (3 sets of 4) representing the situations to be described, 2 identical packs of 48 playing cards, 8 transparent studs to vertically insert the model cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet.

12 model cards

313 309 336 991 8

How to use the Questions-Answers Set?

Activity 1: discovering the material, associating, making links.

60 magnetic answer counters

Activity 2: the teacher asks a question, the child answers. 12 pink question boards

5 YEARS +

MAGNETIC

6 CHILDREN PIECES

"What colour is the lemon?" "The lemon is yellow."

12 green association boards

Questions-Answers Set

Activity 3: one child asks a question, another child answers.

This workshop has been designed to create two main types of situations: learning situations and game-playing situations. The learning situations place children in activities that involve observation and reasoning based on the association of images, and in activities that involve oral language and communication. The game-playing situations help children consolidate skills and develop self-sufficiency when they play alone. The box contains: • 12 green question boards: each has five photographs printed in a column on the left. Each photo prompts a question. • 60 magnetic answer counters to indicate the answers. These counters are to be placed in the empty boxes on the right-hand side of the green boards. • 12 pink question boards: each has the same photographs and a question mark. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 375 120 1

"What animal produces wool?" "The sheep produces wool."

9


Learning Language

96

4 YEARS + Prepositions

Verbs

PHOTOS

Words in Photos Jacqueline Rioult and Sylvie Demetz

In front of

Behind

In front of and behind

Adjectives

Heavy

Light

Gardening

Scene photos

Heavy and light

To enhance basic vocabulary and communicate with others, 3 series of photo flashcards illustrating 3 categories of words: - prepositions: 20 photos (below, above, far from, near to, etc.); - qualifying adjectives: 36 photos (light, dark, full, empty, etc.); - action verbs: 40 photos (stroke, garden, whisper, etc.). 5 photos show complex scenes for using terms learnt separately. They encourage children to re-use vocabulary, and facilitate evaluation. Photos based on themes familiar to children: - can be grouped together to tell a story; - can be opposed or worked on individually. The box contains: • 96 photos (15 x 12 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 179 0

4 YEARS + The 6 cards in the family are shown at the top

The 4 cards in the family are broken down into 4 parts

Game 1: Eight 6-card families depicting families of objects (clothing, kitchen utensils, bathroom items, chairs, DIY tools, school materials, dishes, first aid).

2-8 CHILDREN

Lexico

These two 48-card “Happy Families” games develop language skills by building children’s Game 2: Twelve 4-card families depict an object active vocabulary. or an animal broken down into 4 parts (house, • L/W card: 12 x 8 cm. turtle, bicycle, computer, shoe, boat, flower, • The box contains: 2 packs of 48 playing cards. anorak, elephant, cockerel, piece of furniture, 313 309 337 236 9 face).

"I would like the card with the dog under the table"

5 YEARS +

4 CHILDREN

The Word Family Game This variant of the 7 families game helps children construct their first simple phrases. To collect the 6 cards indicated on the instruction panel, the child must ask for the cards with a precision that will help construct simple phrases. The box contains: • 36 playing cards with colour illustrations (12 x 8 cm). • 18 instruction panels. • 1 teacher’s leaflet.

10

18 instruction panels

978 209 337 176 2


t o

M a s t e r

L a n g u a g e

Listening Sets • To encourage children to describe and explain scenes illustrated using sound and images.

2 YEARS +

2X30 PHOTOS

8.5 cm

Audio Flashcards Everyday Sounds

1 CD lasting 54 minutes

21 cm

2 photo formats for group and individual games

Learning Language

S t a r t i n g

An audio CD and 60 photos in 2 formats to name, play and understand the environment. 6 themes relating to children’s everyday life: animals, music, objects, transport, facial expressions and leisure activities. The 30 large format photos are for use in observing and describing an image. The inclusion of 30 card format photos helps with handling by small hands and enables word games to be set up. The audio CD contains sounds associated with each image.

29.7 cm

12 cm

The box contains: • 30 colour large format photos (L/W: 29.7 x 21 cm). • 30 card format photos (L/W: 12 x 8.5 cm). • 1 audio CD lasting 54 minutes. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 219 4

21 cm

2 image formats for group and individual games

2X30

8.5 cm

2 YEARS +

PHOTOS

Audio Flashcards - Animals This comprehensive collection is perfect for young children, enriching their vocabulary about all types of animals, finding out what noises they make and how they live. The large images help legibility and descriptive activities. The same images are included in small format for use in games. The CD is for use in listening and language sessions. The box contains: • 1 CD lasting 66 minutes. • 30 colour photos (29.7 x 21 cm) and 30 card photos (12 x 8.5 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 212 5

29.7 cm

12 cm 1 CD lasting 66 minutes

11


18 cm 16 photo boards

Language game

24 cm

Lotto games

18 cm

Learning Language

EW

6 lotto boards

4 YEARS +

6 CHILDREN

Musical Instruments Audio Games

24 cm

For setting up activities around spoken language, listening and discovery of the world on the theme of musical instruments. • Language game: by looking at the photo boards, children learn to recognise different instruments, their family (strings, wind, percussion, etc.), what they are made of (wood, brass, metal, plastic, etc.), their origin, their sound and so on, and acquire an accurate vocabulary. • Audio lotto games: several activities with progressively increasing difficulties around 36 different sounds, to develop listening, discrimination and aural memory. • L/W of photo boards and lotto boards: 24 x 18 cm. • Ø token: 3.5 cm. • The box contains: 16 cardboard photo boards, 6 cardboard lotto boards, 36 plastic tokens, 1 CD lasting 40 minutes and 1 teacher's leaflet.

1 CD lasting 40 minutes 36 tokens

313 309 337 226 0

1 CD lasting 54 minutes

22 cm

6 scene cards

4 YEARS +

6 CHILDREN

Sound Situations Lotto 48 sounds matching the situations illustrated on 6 scene cards: garden, kitchen, street, square, forest and beach. When they hear a sound, children place a counter on the matching item on the scene card. 6 sequences are recorded in a row, the first scene-by-scene, the others in random orders.

12

• L/W card: 33 x 22 cm. • Ø counter: 3 cm. • The box contains: 1 CD lasting 54 minutes, 6 rigid cardboard scene cards, 60 plastic counters and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 131 7

33 cm

60 plastic counters


t o

M a s t e r

L a n g u a g e

EW

22.7 cm

33 cm

Learning Language

S t a r t i n g

6 large-format boards

2 YEARS +

6 CHILDREN

My First Sound Situations Lotto Listening and language material that can be used in group sequences or lotto games. The children must identify 30 sounds corresponding to the sound situations illustrated in scenes of everyday life: kitchen, dining room, bedroom, bathroom, in the street and at the park. For learning to observe and describe scenes, developing discrimination and aural memory, encouraging dialogue and enhancing vocabulary. • L/W of board: 33 x 22.7 cm. • Ø of token: 3.5 cm. • The box contains: 6 laminated boards in thick cardboard, 30 plastic tokens, 1 CD lasting 32 minutes and 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 337 143 0

30 tokens

1 CD lasting 32 minutes

8 large scene cards 1 CD lasting 45 minutes

3 YEARS +

6 CHILDREN

24 illustrated cards

Listening to Stories 1 D. Lévy

8 stories featuring Splash the Dog, illustrated in one main picture, and in three cards depicting isolated sounds. Each sequence is recorded twice in its entirety and twice in a row with isolated sounds. • L/W card: 24 x 18 / 14 x 9.5 cm. • The box contains: 1 CD lasting 45 minutes, 24 illustrated cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 132 4

13


• A variety of concepts to encourage children to describe a scene and focus on a chronological sequence of events.

14 cm

12 cm

Learning Language

Image Sequences

2 YEARS +

6 CHILDREN

52 PICTURES

Ploum Chronological Series 14 series of 3, 4 and 5 pictures depicting Ploum in scenes that are familiar and amusing. These sequential pictures enable young children to place an action in time and evolve towards narrative language and story-telling logic. • L/W card: 14 x 12 cm. • The box contains: 52 hard cardboard pictures with rounded corners and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 349 0

5 YEARS +

82 PICTURES

Teacher’s leaflet

Chronological Sequences Annick Mauffrey and Isdey Cohen Stories to make up to develop language skills. This material includes 82 pictures that enable 11 stories to be made up (with 2 “odd one out” cards per story). The supplied story backgrounds delight children and encourage them to express themselves: The scooter race, The train trip, The rubber ball, etc. The box contains: • 82 cards (16.5 x 16.5 cm) that make up 11 stories; • 5 series of 6 cards, with 2 “odd one out” cards per story; • 6 series of 5 cards, with 2 “odd one out” cards per story; • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 239 0

The teacher’s leaflet details: - the procedure and the aims; - recommendations for group, individual and workshop use; - oral activities to do (7 ways for each series of pictures); - interchangeable activity methods: place events on a timescale, place characters and objects in a space, write a short story (dictated to the adult).

16.5 cm

16.5 cm

The linked illustrations encourage children to pick up clues, make guesses and work together as a group.

2 “odd one out ” cards to be eliminated in reference to an episode in the story.

How to use Chronological Sequences? Examples of Chronological Sequences: A lot of language activities can be performed using each series of pictures: building up a story, eliminating “odd one out” cards, justifying points of view, choosing a title, completing the story, imagining another ending, etc. “odd one out” cards “The wasp’s sting”

14


3 YEARS +

t o

M a s t e r

L a n g u a g e

4 CHILDREN

The Right Order of Pictures

Learning Language

S t a r t i n g

Françoise Eriksen

This material proposes a step-by-step progression to encourage children to identify the chronological order of series of 2 to 4 sequential images. At first, children will work on a series of sheets with a pre-printed picture to build on the "before", "after", "middle" concepts; then they will put the pictures in the correct order on blank sheets. • L/W activity sheets: 23 / 33 / 46 x 13 cm. • L/W image card: 10 x 10 cm. The box contains: • 24 activity sheets of 2, 3 or 4 squares, with or without a printed image, 52 picture cards divided into 5 sets and 1 teacher’s leaflet.

52 PICTURES

24

52 image cards

SHEETS

313 309 342 280 4

POINT

24 activity sheets: 12 sheets with a printed image, 12 blank sheets

• Series of 2, 3 and 4 images • Large uncluttered illustrations to make it easy for children to pick up clues.

Teacher’s leaflet • Find the image that goes "next", the first one is provided.

• Find the image that goes "before" and "after", the middle one is provided.

• Presents objectives, material, progression and step-by-step activity procedure. • Includes a table with chronological sequences and corresponding stories. • Suggests ideas for assessment and a vocabulary guide (actions/verbs, spatial concepts/adverbs. • Make a series of 4 images on a blank sheet.

15


Learning Language

S t a r t i n g

t o

M a s t e r

L a n g u a g e

15 cm

POINTS • Four-stage stories. • Large dimension pictures.

21 cm

3 YEARS +

6 CHILDREN

52 PHOTOS

Photo Sequence Set 1 13 series of 4 photos: birthday, bath, orange juice, slide, hairdresser, tricycle, construction game, bear, washing hands, gift, ice-cream and banana. • L/W photo: 21 x 15 cm. • The box contains: 52 cardboard photographs and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 978 209 337 009 3

Game 1: 5 cards to put in order

35

4 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

CARDS

Scenario - Chronological Sequences Two packs of cards for making logical sequences offering two levels of difficulty and a variety of themes. Game 1: 7 sets of 5 cards to put in order. Game 2: 6 sets of 6 cards with one odd card out. • L/W card: 12 x 8 cm. • The box contains: 2 packs of 35 and 36 cards. 313 309 337 230 7 Odd card out

36 CARDS

Game 2: 6 cards with one odd card out

15 cm

4 YEARS +

40 PHOTOS

12 cm

Image Sequences Sands of Time

16

Photo flashcards chosen to help the child understand the concept of time. The photos are used as a basis for identifying a chronology by looking at the concepts of succession (before, now, after) or simultaneousness (at the same time). The 40 colour photographs provide a rich and original resource for the development of language and the acquisition of new vocabulary. The image collection is organised into eight themes, each comprising five photographs that can be used individually or as a set, depending on the child’s level: growing up, life stages, from hatching to first flight, making a mask, planting flowers, from flower to fruit, building a house, a sailing boat leaving the harbour. • L/W photo: 15 x 12 cm. • The box contains: 40 colour photos, plastic dividers for filing families of photos and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 195 1


Learning Language

Communication Skills Large Images • Great springboards for oral activities in groups and workshops. • The rich illustrations assist the discovery of vocabulary. • For each poster, the guide provides activities for the exploration and analysis of the image. On each poster, there are 20 actions and behaviours to analyse. 13 posters

4 YEARS +

Large Images - Living Together Mireille Perret and Michèle Granier

The folder contains: • 13 posters in 52 x 40 cm format. • 1 printable guide on CD (PDF format). 313 309 337 139 3

40 cm

Learn to express ideas and communicate about situations related to the classroom and the world of children. 13 posters depict the daily life of a class of 26 children. Each illustration shows a situation in which more than 20 different actions and behaviours are represented. Observation of the characters and their actions progressively encourages children to develop their critical faculties and think about how to “live together”: • At school: In the playground - In the classroom In the school canteen - In the games room In the swimming pool • In the family: In the children’s bedroom - The birthday The family bike ride • In society: The coach trip - At the zoo - At the farm Visit to the castle

1 printable guide on CD

52 cm

2 YEARS +

Images for Building On A. Popet 12 large-format scenes of everyday life

40 cm

A diverse, original language support using large-size pictures. A set of pictures featuring scenes of everyday life: a garden, a kitchen, a bathroom, a birthday party, a bedroom, a car, a classroom, a street, a supermarket, a shop cash desk, a merry-goround, a swimming pool. The folder contains: • 12 large colour pictures (52 x 40 cm), • 12 large-format black and white background scenes (52 x 40 cm), • 12 large decor pictures for photocopying (29.7 x 21 cm), • 1 teacher’s leaflet. • Comes in a large transparent folder. 313 309 388 027 7

52 cm

POINT A black and white background scene corresponds to each picture for use in memory and imagination activities.

17


Learning Language

22 character cards

MAGNETIC

3 YEARS +

PIECES

From Pictures to Words

80 magnetic counters

Françoise Eriksen and Myriam Fournier Dulac Specially designed to create language situations in small groups, this teaching pack is organised into 5 successive steps building up from words to sentences. The comprehensive and varied material encourages a great many activities to promote communication: acquiring vocabulary, comparing, explaining choices, describing, etc.

POINT The format of the game boards and size of magnetic counters make it easy to set up workshops either in small groups or with half a class.

The box contains: • 5 double-sided magnetic game boards (i.e. 10 different boards) - 50 x 35 cm. • 80 magnetic counters. • 1 set of 22 character cards. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 137 9

3 boards depicting scenes from everyday life

1 blank board for sorting and categorising activities

2 character boards (boy and girl) for widening the vocabulary and dressing up parts of the body

4 photo-boards on specific themes

PICTURES

Making up Fairy Tales A. Mauffrey and I. Cohen

A set of 72 picture cards to invent a variety of stories and to broaden descriptive language.

Pictures Categorised in 3 families: characters, places and objects. The wealth of illustrations stimulates the imagination, speech and discussion between children. • Format suitable for group or workshop use. • 32 character cards: heroes, likeable characters, a friend or an enemy. • 23 place cards: initial location, background location, an obstacle and ultimate locations. • 17 object cards: “hero’s wish” object, a magical or evil object.

The box contains: • 72 picture cards (16.5 x 16.5 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 238 3

16.5 cm

16.5 cm

4 YEARS +

72

POINT Scenes can be customised by teachers using the magnetic tokens. Teacher’s leaflet

18

This details the educational procedure, presents various story backdrops, an example of use and further activities to move from oral to written work.

32 character cards

23 location cards

17 object cards


4 YEARS +

S k i l l s

MAGNETIC

PIECES

Tales to Tell Nathalie Lepouder

26 cm

This workshop uses an active, fun approach to familiarise children with the elements that make up a story and the narrative structure of a tale. The children move the magnetic shapes around on the background landscapes to make the stories their own, then are encouraged to reproduce them orally in a dynamic dramatisation. The workshop provides an effective medium for speaking up and for verbal communication. 4 traditional tales: The Wolf and the Seven Young Goats, Hop-o’-MyThumb, Snow White, Jack and the Beanstalk.

Learning Language

C o m m u n i c a t i o n

The box contains: • 2 large format magnetic panels (72 x 26 cm). • 6 background landscapes (35 x 25.5 cm). • 43 magnetic shapes: 23 characters, 20 objects. • 1 poster for creating a "story mix" (42 x 60 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 160 7

72 cm

The background landscapes and the magnetic panels Teacher’s leaflet

35 cm

6 background landscapes to be placed on 2 large format magnetic panels

25.5 cm

• Presents the objectives, the materials and how the activities progress. • Summarises the main elements of each story (period in history, places, characters, objects) and the associated action verbs. • Suggests an extra activity involving creating stories based on the poster.

• 6 background landscapes to be placed on the magnetic panels: a forest, a house in a forest, a castle in the clouds, an ogre’s house, a castle and a boulder, a farm with a village in the distance. Depending on the stories, there can be 1 to 4 background landscapes. • Once open, each of the 2 panels can hold 2 backgrounds. Placed side by side, they highlight the different moments of transition and make it easy to move the shapes around.

42 cm

60 cm

The magnetic shapes 43 shapes corresponding to the 23 characters and 20 objects in the 4 stories presented.

The poster • This gives an overview of the worlds of the 4 stories covered. • Using the magnetic shapes, the children can create a new story.

3 YEARS +

55 CARDS

Fairy Tales Set D. Chauvel

9 Traditional tales on 55 cards: Goldilocks, The Little Red Hen, The 3 Little Pigs, The Adventures of the Little Mouse, Little Red Riding Hood, Snow White, Cinderella, Sleeping Beauty and Tom Thumb. The box contains: • 55 cards (12 x 8 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 008 2

The cards represent the key events of a story to help grasp narrative structure.

19


Discovering Writing

Preparing to Learn to Write Tracing Stencils • An original way to practise tracing the basic shapes used in writing. • The child follows each stencil route without lifting the pencil and takes into account the direction of the writing. • The child progressively gains familiarity, fluidity and control of their movements. • An adult can correct a position, how the pencil is being held and the direction of tracing. • In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 35 x 10 x 1.5 cm. • L/Ø pencil: 8 x 1 cm. The pencil stores away in the base

Start on the left

Diagonals 313 309 375 204 8

Bridges

Crenels

313 309 375 207 9

313 309 375 206 2

Loops

Waves

313 309 375 208 6

313 309 375 205 5

Indication of the starting point and tracing direction

Repeat tracing without instructions

4 YEARS + Indication of the starting point and tracing direction

Fingertip Numbers

20

Fingertip Letters Nathalie Lepouder

Clever, practical equipment specially designed to encourage children to memorise writing strokes and recognise the different letters of the alphabet. Used as an activity support, a directory and a memory aid, Fingertip Letters can be used on its own or as an added extra, whatever the educational approach.

Nathalie Lepouder

Fingertip Letters - Cursive Letters

The child traces the shape of numbers 0 to 9 individually, with the same rigour as that applied to letters. The child can follow the numerical order, name the previous or next number and also look for a number dictated by the teacher. The non-tear pages are bound with a ring to allow easy storage and to allow "log books" to be added for free access classes.

• 54 pages of non-tear paper, bound using a plastic ring (Ø: 10 cm). • Set of 2.

• 11 pages of non-tear paper (10 x 7.5 cm), bound with a plastic ring. • Set of 4. 313 309 342 260 6

313 309 379 095 8

Fingertip Letters Capital Letters • 54 pages of non-tear paper, bound using a plastic ring (Ø: 10 cm). • Set of 2. 313 309 379 096 5


Discovering Writing

30 progressive activity cards

4 YEARS +

Graphics Training Activity Cards Marie Sirica Routtierr

This set comes with 5 sets of 6 cards of varying difficulty, providing children with the opportunity to practise with the graphical areas, lines and shapes necessary for writing. It is very important that children become familiar and accustomed to graphical drawing in order to encourage pleasure in writing. The illustrations provide situations where characters are motivated towards a goal. Then shapes are presented out of context. Tracing development: slanting lines, long straight lines, straight lines, large line spacing, letter writing shapes. • 30 cards (30 x 20.5 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 217 0

Whiteboard Markers

Graphic Slates Erasable transparent plastic slates for coloured pencils and water-based felt-tip markers. Lines can be erased using an eraser or damp cloth. • L/W slate: 30 x 21 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 305 105 9

Fine Board Markers

• L.: 12 cm; Ø tip: 4.5 mm. • Set of 8.

• 8 assorted colours. • L: 14 cm; Ø tip: 3 mm. • Set of 8.

313 309 351 810 1

313 309 387 102 2

EW MAGNETIC

2 YEARS + PIECES

Magnetic Erasable Whiteboards Whiteboards that can be written on and/or have magnetic items put on them. For everyday classroom activities. For use with felt tip pens that are erasable with water. • Plastic and metal. • L/W: 33 x 24 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 375 149 2

3 YEARS +

Alphabet Magnatab Unusual lightweight play tablet for learning to recognise and trace the letters of the alphabet. Children use the magnetic pen and their own writing movements to make the metal balls appear. They can erase their writing and make the balls disappear with a touch. • Plastic and metal. • L/W/thickness of tablet: 29.2 x 23.5 x 1.3 cm. • L of pen: 10 cm. 313 309 342 285 9

21


Discovering Writing

P r e p a r i n g

t o

L e a r n

t o

W r i t e

EW

MAGNETIC

4 YEARS + PIECES

Magnetic Cursive Letters 174 magnetic cursive letter tokens based on a frequency scale. • H: 6 cm. 313 309 388 066 6

A

B

C MAGNETIC

PIECES A

Extra Letters

Extra letters to snap onto the sticks. 160 plastic letters (63 capital letters, 94 lower-case printed letters with and without accents, 3 blank letter tiles). • L/W/H letter counter: 3.5 x 3.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 379 090 3

B

Magnetic Board and Letters 2 lined magnetic cardboard boards and 2 magnetic cardboard boards for sorting letters; 89 magnetic cardboard letters. • L/W board: 33 x 11.5 cm. • L/W letter: 2.8 x 1.7 cm. 313 309 379 089 7

Uppercase Letters

Alphabet Simplis

63 capital letters.

5 series of 60 pre-cut letters in strong cardboard. On the front: writing in typewritten lowercase letters; on the back: cursive writing.

313 309 379 094 1

C

Extra Grids

• Letter L/W: 4.5 x 2.5 cm. • Set of 300. 313 309 336 066 3

• Set of 8. 313 309 343 118 9 Front and back of stickers

Capital Letter Stamps 26 stamps of the 26 capital letters of the alphabet. A large colourful knob makes letters easy to handle. Not suitable for children under 36 months.

22

• Av. H. of stamped letter: 5 cm. • Set of 26. 313 309 385 018 8

Writing Aid This soft plastic writing aid fits over the pencil to help children learn or improve finger positioning. 5 colours. • Av. H of stamped letter: 5 cm. • Set of 15. 313 309 342 058 9


Discovering Maths

First Numbers Set • Specially designed to introduce toddlers to numbers 1 to 5.

MAGNETIC 6 CHILDREN PIECES

2 YEARS +

First Numbers Set André Jacquart

Specially designed to introduce toddlers to numbers 1-5. The boards and magnetic counters are used for activities based on counting, sorting, sequencing and making collections. The magnetic pieces, attractive illustrations and easyto-use counters encourage young children to play with the workshop. The 18 double-sided activity boards are organised into 6 sets. The first ones deal with numbers 1 to 3 and then 1 to 5. Each board is designed to make a collection of a given amount. The box contains: • 18 magnetic game boards measuring 36 x 18 cm. • 72 large-size magnetic wooden counters: 4.5 x 4.5 cm (12 dogs, 12 frogs, 12 sheep, 12 rabbits, 12 mice, 12 cows). • 1 teacher’s leaflet with 7 cards that can be photocopied.

18 double-sided activity boards

313 309 388 409 1

72 counters

illustrations

Teacher’s leaflet To make a collection of a given amount.

The teacher’s leaflet includes 7 cards that can be photocopied

dots on a dice Sets 1, 2 and 3: numbers 1 to 3.

First Numbers Set – Additional Counters • Format: 4.5 x 4.5 cm. • 72 counters. 313 309 388 410 7

a written digit

Sets 4, 5 and 6: numbers 1 to 5.

23


Discovering Maths

Counting Box Sets 2 plastic counting boxes 43 round plastic counters

36 instruction cards

A

40 wooden animal counters

3 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

Counting Box Set 1 André Jacquart

Teacher’s leaflets

A workshop to set up basic numerical activities from 1 to 5. By playing with wooden animals (figurative objects) and counters (symbols), children learn to count, make collections and recognise the numbers 1 to 5. The Set can be used for children to work in pairs. Each child has a counting box containing an instruction card. With the use of the corresponding counters, they have to fill the boxes following each instruction. The pictures on the 36 instruction cards represent a reference collection (animals), dots on a dice or a written number. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

• Present objectives, procedure and progression of the instruction cards. • The 7 or 8 photocopy sheets in the teacher’s leaflet extend the activities performed with this equipment and enable individual skills assessment. Work is done by reproduction using the printed and cut-out elements provided in each appendix. Teacher’s leaflets include 7 or 8 cards that can be printed out.

The box contains: • 36 instruction cards in 6 sets (L/W: 25.5 x 8.5 cm). • 2 plastic counting boxes (L/W: 27 x 12 cm). • 40 wooden counters (15 elephants, 5 penguins, 5 tigers, 15 bear cubs). • 43 round plastic counters. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD. 313 309 388 417 6

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

A

A B

1x

1x

+

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Counting Boxes Set 1 and enables an additional two children to join in.

24

• 2 plastic counting boxes (L/W: 27 x 12 cm). • 18 wooden counters (5 elephants, 4 penguins, 4 tigers, 5 bear cubs). • 35 round plastic counters. 313 309 388 418 3

1x

+

B

2x

B


L o o k

a t

N u m b e r s 38 card counters

A 65 round plastic counters

4 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

Counting Box Set 2 André Jacquart

Children discover numbers 1 to 10 through handling dots on a dice counters, number counters and counters whose quantity is represented by visual elements. The Set can be used for children to work in pairs. Each child has a counting box containing an instruction card. With the use of the corresponding counters, they have to fill the boxes following each of the 5 instructions given on the card. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

The box contains: • 24 instruction cards organised into 4 sets of 6 cards (L/W: 25.5 x 8.5 cm). • 2 plastic counting boxes (L/W: 27 x 12 cm). • 38 cardboard counters (5.5 x 4.5 cm). • 65 round plastic counters. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD. 313 309 388 415 2

B 2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Counting Box Set 2 and enables an additional two children to join in.

24 instruction cards

2 plastic counting boxes

Discovering Maths

F i r s t

6 CHILDREN

1x

+

1x

A

+

B

1x

A

B

2x

• 2 plastic counting boxes (L/W: 27 x 12 cm). • 30 round plastic counters. 313 309 388 416 9

A 40 card counters

5 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

Counting Box Set 3 André Jacquart

2 plastic counting boxes

Similar to the Counting Box Set 2, this workshop helps develop counting skills for numbers 8 to 25. The Set can be used for children to work in pairs. Each child has a counting box containing an instruction card. With the use of the corresponding counters, they have to fill the boxes following each of the 5 instructions given on the card. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

150 round plastic counters

24 instruction cards

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

The box contains: • 24 instruction cards organised into 4 sets of 6 cards (L/W: 25.5 x 8.5 cm). • 2 plastic counting boxes (L/W: 27 x 12 cm). • 40 cardboard counters (5.5 x 4.5 cm). • 150 round plastic counters. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD. 313 309 388 419 0

6 CHILDREN

1x

+

1x

A

+

B

A

B

B 2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Counting Box Set 3 and enables an additional two children to join in. • 2 plastic counting boxes (L/W: 27 x 12 cm). • 50 round plastic counters. 313 309 388 420 6

1x

2x 25


Discovering Maths

5 YEARS +

3-6 CHILDREN

Number Box Set J.-L. Brégeon

Self-correcting material that leads children to handle counters to answer numerical questions and introduce them to making calculations. Each child has one instruction card and one or two number boxes, depending on the activity. They should follow the instructions given on the card by placing counters in the boxes.

Teacher’s leaflet Number boxes How to use them? • 6 boxes including 10 compartments each (representing tens). • Counters are placed on one of the cells, completing column-by-column (from top to bottom and left to right). • 2 colour counters to work with complements of 10, numbers over 10 and addition. 6 plastic boxes

• Presents objectives, the procedure and the progression of the cards. • Describes the activities to be performed for each set of cards and gives recommendations for tackling the following concepts: - tens (role and breakdown into the number 10 + n), - complements of 10, - addition and subtraction of two numbers, - odd and even numbers.

60 blue tokens

60 red tokens

The boxes can be clipped together for numbers over 10.

Instruction cards 48 instruction cards divided into 5 sets of progressive difficulty of different colours. The box contains: • 48 instruction cards (L/W: 23 x 13.7 cm). • 5 answer cards. • 6 plastic Number Boxes (L/W: 23 x 11.6 cm). • 60 red tokens, 60 blue tokens (Ø: 3 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 407 7

POINT Self-correction material for concrete representation of units of ten.

Pink series: associating numbers up to 10

Red series: subtraction

Blue series: numerical components of 10

Orange series: associating numbers over 10

Green series: adding numbers, using doubles

26

Extra Number Boxes

Answer sheets

6 boxes with 10 squares each. 60 red tokens and 60 blue tokens.

The required layout and corresponding entries are given on the 5 self-correction sheets.

313 309 388 408 4


3 YEARS +

L o o k

a t

N u m b e r s

Discovering Maths

F i r s t

MAGNETIC

PIECES

Magnetic Number Line A group toy for children to handle to help them learn the set of numbers from 0 to 31 and carry out daily number-based activities: calendar, counting those present, counting out loud, etc. Children progressively learn to: • memorise the set of numbers; • locate the numbers in relation to each other; • associate the name of numbers with how they are written in digits; • recognise different representations of the number (written digits, fingers, combinations, collections, dominos, dot cards); • count and compare quantities. Depending on the point in the year, the level of the children or the activity carried out, the teacher can decide to display all or part of the line.

2 detachable cards, "0" and "31"

The box contains: • 8 wall elements: 6 wall strips and 2 detachable number cards, "0" and "31". • 31 magnetic label holders. • 132 labels: 31 number labels; 15 finger labels; 10 combination labels; 25 collection labels; 20 domino labels; 31 dot card labels. • 1 magnetic cover to hide the 0. • 3 magnetic arrows. • 1 teacher's leaflet. • Total L/W Line: 288 x 17 cm. • 96 number labels (capitals, cursive, printed) to download. 313 309 388 067 3 3 magnetic arrows for awareness activities: date, number present/absent

6 strips of 5 numbers

45 cm

17 cm

1 magnetic cover to hide the 0

132 cardboard labels and 31 magnetic label holders

POINT • Progressive construction of the line 5 by 5. • Display as a frieze or a table. MAGNETIC

PIECES

SEE ALSO Attendance Board p. 55

Magnetic Label Holders 20 magnetic label holders

20 label holders to customise for the activities carried out with the children. • 20 magnetic label holders. • L/W: 8 x 5 cm. 313 309 379 069 9

27


Discovering Maths

4 YEARS +

MAGNETIC

PIECES

The Zigomaths André Jacquart

Specially designed for carrying out directed activities, this highly comprehensive, fully magnetic set allows children to work on all numeracy skills. The Zigomaths are characters that work with and motivate children while they are learning. Easy to use and handle material, teachers can introduce a range of situations for each skillset being taught, from easy to more complex ones, and the equipment can be adapted to the progress made by the children. The box contains: • 3 double-sided magnetic boards (i.e. 6 sides) - 50 x 35 cm. • 104 magnetic Zigomaths counters distributed as follows: - 62 Zigomaths counters x 1 character (4 x 2.7 cm); - 30 Zigomaths counters x 2 characters (5.4 x 4 cm); - 12 Zigomaths counters x 5 characters (13.5 x 4 cm); - 31 magnetic numbered writing counters (6 x 6 cm), - 20 magnetic constellation counters (6 x 6 cm), - 20 magnetic quantities counters (6 x 6 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet.

Magnetic counters

175 PIECES

313 309 388 050 5 62 Zigomaths counters (x 1 character)

Teacher’s leaflet An essential addition, it shows the procedure and the goals; it gives specific examples of situations to give to children for each skillset.

Illustrated world boards 5 illustrated worlds on 3 double-sided boards (i.e. 6 sides). Each board shows one or two work spaces.

30 Zigomaths counters (x 2 characters) 31 writing counters numbered 1 to 31

12 Zigomaths counters (x 5 characters) 20 constellation counters from 1 to 6

20 quantities counters from 1 to 5

Instruction space

50 cm

35 cm

Blank space for free usage

• One instruction space and a workspace to build up a collection.

• Two workspaces to compare or build up a collection from a reference collection.

POINTS • Large format supports for group activities. • All numerical skills. • A very flexible tool that can be adapted to the pace of each group.

28

• A single workspace to count, build up a collection and solve operations problems.


L o o k

a t

N u m b e r s

Counting Games • Children practise counting as they play simple familiar games. • Features different difficulty levels.

2-4 CHILDREN

3 YEARS +

MAGNETIC

PIECES

1, 2, 3... I Can Count

Basic and fun-to-use playing materials for learning to count up to 6. Each child completes his or her game board using coloured counters following instructions on the dice (spots and colours).

4 magnetic game boards 2 dice 84 magnetic counters

Discovering Maths

F i r s t

• L/W board: 33 x 23 cm. • Ø counter: 3.3 cm. • Dice side: 2.5 cm. • The box contains: 4 magnetic game boards, 84 coloured magnetic counters, 2 wooden dice (with colours and spots) and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 310 0

4 YEARS +

2-8 CHILDREN

1, 2, 3... Happy Families Games Reminder of the different representations of the same number on each card

Number bar on each card

Game 1: has ten 5-card families: on each card a number from 1 to 10 is shown in one of five different ways (objects, dots, counting cubes, fingers or numbers).

Game 2: has five 10-card families: on each card there is a collection of 1 to 10 objects (penguins, robots, flowers, fruit or elephants). A number bar on each card helps children make connections.

50

50

CARDS

CARDS

These two 50-card Happy Families games can be used by children to learn and practise the numbers from 1 to 10. Game 1 has ten 5-card families: on each card a number from 1 to 10 is shown in one of five different ways (objects, dots, counting cubes, fingers or numbers). Game 2 has five 10-card families: on each card there is a collection of 1 to 10 objects (penguins, robots, flowers, fruit or elephants). A number strip on each card helps children make connections. • L/W card: 12 x 8 cm. • The box contains: 2 packs of 50 playing cards. 313 309 337 234 5

SEE ALSO Quantissimo Sample family: 3

p. 118

Sample family: fruits

POINT • 4 sets of boards of varying difficulty. • Learn to recognise and name numbers between 1 and 30. 5 YEARS +

2-6 CHILDREN

Bingo For 6 players. This traditional game has been adapted for young children. The counters are numbered 1 to 30. Six children can play together by choosing a board, each in a colour corresponding to a level of difficulty. The child leading the game pulls a counter out of the bag.The first child to fill his or her board wins! • L/W board: 26.5 x 11 cm. • Ø/D counter: 2.5 x 0.5 cm. • The box contains: 24 cardboard game boards (4 sets of 6 boards), 60 wooden counters numbered from 1 to 30 (there are 2 counters for each number), 1 fabric bag and 1 set of rules. 313 309 336 000 7

29


Discovering Maths

Discovering Shapes, Sizes and Colours • • • •

Recognising basic shapes: circle, square, triangle. Selecting a part of a whole based on its colour and shape. Sorting, classifying and storing away based on shape, colour, order and number of pieces. Stating simple, repetitive algorithms.

Classification Sets

50 illustrated card counters

2 boxes

34 instruction cards

A

2 YEARS +

Teacher’s leaflet

2 CHILDREN

Presents the objectives, equipment and instructions for use: free use, in a directed workshop or work alone. Presents ideas for activities, games and extensions to activities.

Sorting Set A logic workshop designed for first steps in sorting and term-for-term matching. The 34 activity cards are divided into 5 sets. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. Once they have moved the card to the box slot, the child rebuilds models by putting the counters matching the instruction into the right box. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 34 activity boards split into 5 sets (L/W: 25.5 x 8.5 cm). • 50 illustrated card counters (Counter L/W: 5.5 x 4.5 cm). • 2 plastic sorting boxes (L/W: 27 x 12 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 305 171 4

Build your set 6 CHILDREN

4 CHILDREN

A

A

1x

1x

B

+ 1x 2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Sorting Workshop and enables an additional 2 children to join in.

30

• Set of 2. 313 309 305 162 2

+

B

2x

B


4 YEARS +

4 CHILDREN

Sorting Set - Animals A set for setting up sorting and classifying activities based on animals. By looking at and handling illustrated tokens, children learn to recognise different animals, identify their shared characteristics and group them by their family. They learn to: • Exercise their visual discrimination skills; • Classify animals based on given categories (parts of the body, methods of locomotion, number of legs, physical appearance); • Acquire a specific descriptive vocabulary. The box contains: • 20 activity sheets divided into 5 sets of 4 sheets (25.5 x 8.5 cm). • 50 illustrated cardboard tokens (5.5 x 4.5 cm). • 4 plastic sorting trays (27 x 12 cm). • 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 305 180 6

Discovering Maths

EW

Handling materials Each child has a sorting tray into which an activity sheet is placed. They must complete each compartment in the tray according to the classification scheme on the sheet by placing one token in each compartment. They are encouraged to explain their choices.

4 sorting trays

50 animal tokens

20 activity sheets

Activity sheets The 20 activity sheets are structured in 5 sets of 4 sheets. Each sheet has a classification scheme illustrated with pictograms.

Animal tokens The 50 tokens form an excellent basis for learning to name and describe animals.

• Blue set: identify parts of the body (tail, feet, fins, horns, beak).

• Yellow set: recognise methods of locomotion (swimming, jumping, crawling, running, flying).

• Pink set: recognise the physical appearance (fur and tail, scales, feathers, etc.).

• Orange set: identify parts of the body based on two characteristics (scales and no feet, 2 wings and 2 feet, etc.).

• Green set: identify and count the number of feet.

31


Discovering Maths

2 sticks

A

3 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

36 pieces 30 activity cards

Logicoloredo Logic activities for introducing children to basic concepts of rhythm and algorithm. Children snap play pieces of 3 shapes and 4 different colours onto a transparent 6 stud stick, following the model card instructions. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. The sticks clip onto one another to make more complex rhythms. For 4 to 8 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

Teacher’s leaflet

The box contains: • 30 activity cards. • 2 transparent plastic sticks with 6 studs. • 36 plastic counters: 3 shapes, 4 colours. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD. • Activity card L/W: 23 x 4 cm; Stick L/W: 23 x 4 cm; Round counter Ø: 3.3 cm.

• Presents objectives, procedure and progression of the activity cards. • The 7 photocopy sheets in the teacher’s leaflet extend the play activities and enable individual assessment.

313 309 343 130 1

Build your set 10 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

B

A

A

1x

1x

+

4 Child Extension Pack

+

B

B

This material adds to Logicoloredo and enables an additional 4 children to join in. • 4 transparent plastic sticks with 6 studs. • 12 plastic counters: 1 round in 4 colours; 4 square (3 red and 1 green); 4 triangles (3 green and 1 red). 313 309 343 131 8

3 YEARS +

2x

6 CHILDREN

Ritmo These logic activities help children to select and order objects according to their shape, size and colour. The 24 activity cards propose 72 simple algorithm exercises (2 or 3 elements). An initial model is presented to start each exercise. The children then continue the algorithm by correctly positioning the corresponding counters. The activity cards are organised in 4 series of 6 cards of increasing difficulty.

32

1x

• L/W activity card: 33 x 11.5 cm. • L/W counter: 3.2 x 3.2 cm. • The box contains: 24 cardboard activity cards, 320 illustrated counters in reinforced cardboard and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 343 123 3

24 cards of varying difficulty

72 simple algorithm exercises

320 illustrated counters


Shapes,

Sizes

and

Colours 2 sticks with stopper to hold the beads and a handle for holding

A

2 YEARS +

3.5 cm

32 plastic beads

2 CHILDREN

Mini-patterns and Maxi-beads Set Fun, attractive sets of beads also help with motor skills. Children learn to decipher and reproduce a model, then build it at their own pace. The cards can be reproduced flat or vertically: 2 directions for reading and rhythm analysis. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. For 4 to 8 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

Discovering Maths

Discovering

24 activity cards

The box contains: • 24 activity cards. • 32 plastic beads: 4 shapes, 2 colours, in 4 copies (sphere, cube, cylinder, pyramid). • 2 sticks with 2 end pieces. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. • Stick L: 36 cm; Handle L: 5 cm; Card L/W: 34 x 6 cm. 313 309 388 054 3

Set indicator

Build your set 6 CHILDREN

10 CHILDREN

A

A

1x

1x B

4 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Mini-patterns and Maxi-beads Set and enables an additional 4 children to join in.

+

• 24 plastic beads: 4 shapes, 2 colours, in 4 copies (sphere, cube, cylinder, pyramid). • 4 sticks with 4 end pieces. 313 309 388 055 0

+

B

1x

B

2x

A 1.4 cm

1.7 cm

78 wood beads: 4 colours, 3 shapes, 2 sizes

78 wood beads

4 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

Patterns and Beads Set In the same vein as the Mini-Patterns and Maxi-Beads Set, this workshop teaches children to decipher, reproduce and compose more complex rhythms. The cards can be reproduced flat or vertically: 2 directions for reading and rhythm analysis. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. For 4 to 8 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 24 activity cards. • 78 wood beads: 3 shapes (cube, cylinder, sphere), 4 colours, 2 sizes. • 4 wooden sticks. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. • Stick L: 18 /25 cm; Sphere and cylinder Ø: 17 /14 mm; cube sides: 17/14 mm. 313 309 343 135 6

4 wooden sticks in 2 lengths 24 activity cards

Build your set 6 CHILDREN

10 CHILDREN A

1x

A

1x

4 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Patterns and Beads Set and enables an additional 4 children to join in. • 8 wooden sticks. • 33 wood beads: 3 shapes, 4 colours, 2 sizes. 313 309 343 136 3

B

+ 1x

+

B

B

2x 33


Discovering Maths

2 abacuses with 5 rods

A

3 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN 24 model sheets

Abacus Set 1

100 beads (5 shapes in 5 colours)

Equipment for use in multiple combinations to create sorting, logic and also counting activities. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. By handling the equipment, children experiment with different ways to organise information. Using an abacus, the aim is to reproduce the arrangement of beads shown on 24 model cards of gradually increasing difficulty, distributed on 4 sets of 6 cards (sort by colour and/ or shape). For 4 to 8 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

Teacher’s leaflet • Presents objectives, procedure and progression of the activities. • Presents ideas for extending activities (oral instructions, counting activities, more complex algorithms, etc.) and sheets to photocopy for individual assessment. • Each photocopy sheet assesses a specific skill. Children cut, glue, and perhaps colour the attached shapes.

The box contains: • 24 model cards. • 100 beads in 5 shapes and 5 colours. • 2 plastic abacuses. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD. • Abacus L/W/H: 26 x 8 x 12 cm; Bead Ø: 4 cm; Card L/W: 19 x 13 cm. 313 309 305 166 0

The teacher’s leaflet includes 9 cards that can be printed out.

Build your set 10 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

A B

1x

1x

+

4 Child Extension Pack

A

+

B

This material adds to the Abacus Set 1 and enables an additional 4 children to join in. • 4 plastic abacuses. • 47 plastic beads in 5 shapes and 5 colours. 313 309 305 167 7

1x

2x

26 cm

3 YEARS +

Sorting Abacus 2 large-scale abacuses comprising 5 pins onto which children slip beads in 10 shapes and 10 assorted colours. For introducing the basic concepts of sorting through manipulation. • L/W/H abacus: 26 x 8 x 12 cm; Ø bead: 4 cm. • The set includes: 2 five-pin abacuses in plastic, 100 beads in 10 shapes, 10 assorted colours and 1 teacher’s leaflet. • 2 abacuses and 100 beads. 313 309 305 119 6 2 abacuses

34

• 4 abacuses without beads. 313 309 305 139 4

The abacuses fit together to form a series of 10

100 sorting beads

B


Shapes,

Sizes

and

Colours

2 abacuses with 5 rods

Discovering Maths

Discovering

A

87 beads (10 shapes) in 10 colours

4 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

42 activity cards

Abacus Set 2 Continuing on from the Abacus Set 1, this set offers sorting, logic and numeracy activities. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. By handling, children gradually experiment with increasingly complex ways of reading and organising information. 42 activity cards of increasing difficulty, distributed in 7 sets of 6. For 4 to 8 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 42 activity cards. • 2 plastic abacuses. • 87 beads in 10 shapes and 10 colours. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD. • Abacus L/W/H: 26 x 8 x 12 cm; Bead Ø: 4 cm; Card L/W: 24.5 x 3 cm. 313 309 305 172 1

Build your set 6 CHILDREN

10 CHILDREN

A B

1x

A

1x

+

+

B

B

4 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Abacus Set 2 and enables an additional 4 children to join in.

1x

2x

• 4 plastic abacuses. • 54 beads in 10 shapes and 10 colours. 313 309 305 173 8

3 YEARS + 2 YEARS +

Sorting Beads

Sorting Beads for Young Children

100 beads in 10 colours and 10 different shapes..

100 beads in 10 colours and 5 shapes.

• Ø bead: 4 cm.

313 309 305 007 6

313 309 305 121 9

35


Discovering Maths

3 YEARS +

4-8 CHILDREN

MAGNETIC

PIECES

Discovering Lengths André Jacquart

This workshop allows the idea of dimensions to be tackled by considering the height, length or size of a well-known animal. The child moves magnetic pieces around on illustrated boards to learn to: • compare lengths; • identify a given length; • sort up to 4 elements in order of increasing or decreasing size; • progressively use appropriate comparison vocabulary: "bigger, smaller, taller, longer...". • L/W board: 27 x 18 cm. The box contains: • 12 double-sided boards, i.e. 24 activity sheets grouped into 6 sets of 4 sheets. • 32 magnetic pieces: 8 animals (giraffe, frog, basset hound, caterpillar, fish, bird, cat, cow) in 4 sizes and 4 colours. • 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 342 266 8

Teacher's leaflet

The materials The 24 activity sheets are grouped into 6 sets of increasing difficulty. Children put magnetic pieces in the right place on their sheet so that the sizes match up. The spatial layout and the colour, where there is one, can be used to guide them. The workshop materials allow for 8 children to use the first 4 sets of sheets and 4 children to use the last 2 sets. For 4 extra children, just get 1 additional Animals Set.

Presents the objectives, the progression of activities and the grouping of sheets by difficulty level. Precisely describes the activities to be carried out at each stage: • unstructured discovery of the materials, • activities guided by the teacher, • collective activities then individual activities with the sheets.

12 double-sided activity boards

• Yellow and blue set: 1 animal in 4 sizes; 1 element identifiable by colour. • Green and pink set: 1 animal in 4 sizes; no colour element.

• Orange and purple set: 2 animals in 2 sizes; no colour element.

Discovering Lengths - Additional Animals 32 magnetic pieces: 8 animals (giraffe, frog, basset hound, caterpillar, fish, bird, cat, cow) in 4 sizes and 4 colours.

36

313 309 342 267 5

32 magnetic pieces: 8 animals in 4 sizes and 4 colours


Shapes,

Sizes

and

Colours

A

4 YEARS +

MAGNETIC

2 CHILDREN PIECES

Colour Lengths André Jacquart

A workshop devised for a first approach to the concepts of length and size. Through handling, children compare lengths and are encouraged to look for equivalences: • according to the length and colour of the sticks; • according to the number of blocks (becoming familiar with the concept of size); • according to order of arrangement. The proposed problem situations progressively encourage them to use more complex solving procedures. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. For 2 to 4 additional children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

Discovering Maths

Discovering

24 activity cards

The box contains: • 24 activity cards organised into 6 series of 4 cards (29 x 14 cm). • 2 metal holders (30 x 15 cm). • 100 magnetic sticks of different colours and different lengths (50 sticks with studs, 50 sticks without studs). • 1 teacher’s leaflet.

2 metal holders

313 309 342 261 3

B

5 lengths, each one related to 1 colour

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to Colour Lengths and enables an additional two children to join in. • 2 metal holders (30 x 15 cm). • 100 colour magnetic sticks with different colours (50 sticks with studs, 50 sticks without studs).

50 sticks without studs

313 309 342 262 0

50 sticks with studs

Build your set Teacher's leaflet Presents objectives, activity progress and distribution of cards by level of difficulty. It accurately describes the activities for each step: - getting started with the material, - activities oriented by the teacher, - group and individual activities with cards.

SEE ALSO Sorting boxes p. 45

4 CHILDREN

A

1x

+ 1x

6 CHILDREN

A

1x

+

B

B

2x 37


Discovering Maths

Quadriludi Table Sets • These workshops introduce children to double-entry tables, giving them an understanding of the underlying principles and how to use them. They deal with three concepts: shapes, numbers and spatial relationships. • For each set, children complete a horizontal or vertical grid using 16 corresponding counters. • For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

18 activity cards to insert in the grids

A

5 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

Quadriludi Table - Shapes Different activities are available based around the recognition of figurative and geometric shapes. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs.

2 grid holders Each set is identified by a coloured tab

The box contains : • 18 activity boards split into 3 sets (L/W: 24.5 x 23 cm). • 2 plastic support grids (grid side: 26 cm). • 96 strong card counters (side: 4 cm). • 6 plastic bags for storing counters. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD (includes 8 cards that can be printed out). 313 309 342 226 2

96 card counters for positioning in grids

D

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Quadriludi Tables Sets and enables an additional 2 children to join in. • 2 plastic support grids. • L/W: 25 x 23 cm. 313 309 342 199 9

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

1x

A

B

or

38

C

1x

A

or

+ 1x

6 CHILDREN

B

or

or

+

D

2x

C

D


Shapes,

Sizes

and

Colours

B 18 activity cards to insert in the grids

5 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

Quadriludi Table - Numbers

2 grid holders

Activities relating to numbering can be performed based around different depictions of numbers (dots, fingers of the hand or structured representation: flowers). The situations deal with the numbers 1 to 10. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs.

Discovering Maths

Discovering

Each set is identified by a coloured tab

The box contains: • 18 activity boards split into 3 sets (L/W: 24.5 x 23 cm). • 2 plastic support grids (grid side: 26 cm). • 96 strong card counters (side: 4 cm). • 6 plastic bags for storing counters. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD (includes 8 cards that can be printed out). 313 309 342 225 5

D 96 card counters for positioning in grids

D

2 Child Extension Pack • 2 plastic support grids. • L/W: 25 x 23 cm. 313 309 342 199 9

2 grid holders

C

5 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

Quadriludi Table - Spatial Awareness Different activities are available based around recognition of spatial relationships. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. The box contains: • 18 activity boards split into 3 sets (L/W: 24.5 x 23 cm). • 2 plastic support grids (grid side: 26 cm). • 96 strong card counters (side: 4 cm). • 6 plastic bags for storing counters. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD (includes 8 cards that can be printed out). 313 309 342 224 8

18 activity cards to insert in the grids Each set is identified by a coloured tab.

96 card counters for positioning in grids

D

D

2 Child Extension Pack • 2 plastic support grids. • L/W: 25 x 23 cm. 313 309 342 199 9

39


Discovering Maths

3 YEARS +

6 CHILDREN

Logical Identification 1 M. Touyarot and M.-L. Vieil

Sorting tables for extra observation and logical association games. Each child completes their sheet using counters, using their own reasoning. Participants in the same workshop can confer, ask questions, swap counters, etc. • L/W board: 21 x 15.5 / 31 x 21 / 31 x 10.5 cm. • L/W counter: 4 x 4 cm. • The box contains: 24 illustrated activity boards in cardboard, 116 cardboard counters representing 4 sets of different animals and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 343 121 9

24 illustrated activity sheets (4 sets of increasing difficulty).

Children sort the counters into identical sets

116 counters (4 different animals per set)

Game material 24 activity sheets of increasing difficulty organised into 4 sets. Set 1: Line reading

Set 2: Line reading

Set 3: First tables

Set 4: Double entry tables

• 1 criterion: colour (uniform or two-tone)

• 2 criteria: colour/size or colour/ accessory

• 1 subject and 1 criterion: colour

• 1 subject and 1 criterion: size, colour or accessory

2 YEARS +

EW

Logic Puzzles Puzzles based on the principle of the double entry table.

Logic Puzzle - Numbers Logic Puzzle - Sizes An introduction to the concept of size in the company of 3 Bears. • 12 pieces and a base of varnished wood. • Base L/W/thickness: 21 x 21 x 0.7 cm. • Piece L/W/thickness: 4 x 5.3 x 0.4 cm.

Introducing the concepts of the numbers from 1 to 5: digits, fingers, dots and collections. • 25 pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • Base L/W/thickness: 23.5 x 23.5 x 0.7 cm. • Piece L/W/thickness: 3.7 x 3.7 x 0.4 cm. 313 309 387 170 1

313 309 387 161 9

40

Logic Puzzle - Spatial Recognition

Logic Puzzle - Geometric Shapes

An entertaining puzzle to introduce the basic concepts of spatial awareness: in front of/behind/on/under.

Introducing the concepts of geometric shapes: circle, square, triangle and rectangle.

• 16 pieces and a base of varnished wood. • Base L/W/thickness: 21 x 21 x 0.7 cm. • Piece L/W/thickness: 4 x 4 x 0.4 cm.

• 16 pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • Base L/W/thickness: 21 x 21 x 0.7 cm. • Piece L/W/thickness: 4 x 4 x 0.4 cm.

313 309 387 162 6

313 309 387 169 5


Shapes,

Sizes

and

Colours

Acromaths Sets and Activity Cards André Jacquart

• A comprehensive, fun collection for introducing early learning in mathematics from toddlers to older children. • The clown figures and colourful shapes create a motivating, appealing dimension for children. • The cards show the properties of shape, colour and size and encourage logical reasoning. The spatial location sheet also tackles the concepts of orientation and relative position of objects.

Discovering Maths

Discovering

EW

A Activity sheets

The 24 activity sheets are structured in 6 sets of increasing difficulty. For the first 3 sets, children can use perforated strips positioned on the bases as an aide, indicating the colour of the pieces to be placed on each platform.

2 YEARS +

4 CHILDREN

First Acromaths Set This set trains pupils to move from overall visual recognition of elements to analysis of their spatial organisation. Children reproduce a model by fitting pieces onto a base with platforms. They learn to: • Identify and differentiate between colours and shapes; • Identify spatial organisations; • Identify alternates. For 4 extra children, just get 1 Extension Pack. The box contains: • 24 activity sheets divided into 6 sets of 4 sheets (L/W: 25.5 x 13 cm). • 24 clowns in 1 size and 4 colours (H: 3.9 cm). • 24 balance bases in 2 shapes and 4 colours (H: 2.7 cm; Ø: 3.3 cm). • 4 transparent plastic bases with 6 platforms (L/W/H: 23 x 4 x 1 cm). • 12 perforated strips to place on the bases (L/W: 22.4 x 3.6 cm). • 8 supports to keep the activity sheets upright. • 1 teacher's leaflet.

24 activity sheets of increasing difficulty

313 309 342 270 5

B 4 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the First Acromaths Set and enables an additional 4 children to join in.

24 balance bases: 2 shapes and 4 colours

24 clowns: 1 size and 4 colours

• 24 clowns in 1 size and 4 colours (H: 3.9 cm). • 24 balance bases in 2 shapes and 4 colours (H: 2.7 cm; Ø: 3.3 cm). • 4 transparent plastic bases with 6 platforms (L/W/H: 23 x 4 x 1 cm). 313 309 342 271 2

Build your set 8 CHILDREN

1x

1x

A

12 perforated strips to place on the bases

B

+ 4 bases

41


Discovering Maths

24 problem cards

• Set 1: The "paths" of the properties The child rebuilds 4 stacks whose elements are provided on a path to be followed.

4 YEARS +

Acromaths Activity Cards - Shapes, Colours, Sizes • Differentiate objects according to colour, size or shape. • Identify the properties of an object. • Identify an object whose properties are provided. • Follow a given path and conduct logical reasoning. The pack contains: • 24 problem cards in 2 sets (21 x 29.7 cm). • 1 fabric bag to store the pieces that will be used. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD includes solution cards that can be printed out. 313 309 340 280 6

• Set 2: "Everything in place!" The child places 4 elements (single clown or stacked) in the correct place on each card, respecting the properties attributed to each part.

24 problem cards

5 YEARS +

• Set 1: The table of properties The child places either 4 clowns with different colours and sizes taking into account their orientation, that is, he rebuilds 4 stacks whose elements and relative positions are given.

Acromaths Activity Cards Spatial Awareness • • • •

Differentiate objects according to colour, size or shape. Identify the orientation of an object (front, back). Identify the relative position of the objects (above, below, between). Read a table of properties and conduct logical reasoning.

The pack contains: • 24 problem cards in 2 sets (21 x 29.7 cm). • 1 fabric bag to store the pieces that will be used. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD with solution cards that can be printed out. 313 309 340 281 3

• Set 2: "Everything in place!" The child places 4 elements (single clown or stacked) in the correct place on each card, respecting the properties attributed to each part.

Supplement required for the Activity Cards Acromaths Material 24 white plastic parts for use with Acromaths Cards. This material enables 2 children to work on 2 problem cards, regardless of the cards. For 2, 4, 6 or 8 children, just get 1, 2, 3 or 4 additional cards. • 8 clowns in 2 sizes and 2 colours (H: 5.4 and 3.9 cm; Ø: 3.3 cm). • 16 balance parts in 4 shapes and 2 colours (H: 2.7 cm; Ø: 3.3 cm).

42

313 309 342 259 0


5 YEARS +

Shapes,

Sizes

and

Colours

6 CHILDREN

Acromaths Set In non-directed workshops, children solve problems of spatial representation (alignment, stacks, grid positioning), patterns, logical and transformational organisation. The box contains: • 24 clowns of 2 sizes (H.: 5.5 cm and 4.4 cm) and 2 colours (red and green). • 48 stacking pieces in 4 shapes (H.: 2.2 cm) and 2 colours (yellow and blue). • 48 activity cards divided into 5 series of 6 cards and 1 series of 18 cards. • 8 answer cards for series 2, 5 and 6. • 1 teacher’s leaflet.

Discovering Maths

Discovering

313 309 342 119 7

48 activity cards of varying difficulty organised into 6 series

Series 2: Recognise patterns and position objects on a grid

Series 3: Properties tables

Series 4: Flow charts

Series 5: Transformation

Teacher's leaflet • Presents the objectives, the progression of activities and the instruction cards. • The 7 photocopy sheets in the teacher’s leaflet extend the activities performed with this equipment and enable individual skill assessment.

Series 6: Identifying series

48 stacking pieces in 4 shapes and 2 colours

24 clowns in 2 sizes and 2 colours

43


Discovering Maths

Counting and Sorting Material Multidice Game of dice, with dice in 2 sizes and 4 colours. The magnetic surface is suitable for use with washable markers or magnetic cards.

Large Multidice

Small Multidice

2 large dice in 2 colours.

6 dice in 3 colours.

• Side of cube: 12 cm.

• Side of cube: 5 cm.

313 309 342 187 6

313 309 342 188 3

Dice

Maxi Dice

Euro Coins

Assortment of 4 colour dice, 4 number dice, 4 spot dice, 4 ten-sided dice and 4 blank dice ready for marking.

Assortment of large dice including 2 number dice, 2 spot dice, 2 colour dice and 4 blank dice ready for marking.

An assortment of realistic, high-quality Euro coins to help familiarise children with the European currency

• Edge: 1.8 cm. • Set of 20.

• Edge: 2.5 cm. • Set of 10.

• 200 plastic coins: 2 euros, 1 euro, 50 cents, 20 cents, 10 cents, 5 cents, 2 cents and 1 cent.

313 309 342 039 8

313 309 342 036 7

313 309 350 000 7

Multicubes

Slide cubes

200 stackable cubes in 10 assorted colours.

Made of a flexible plastic, sets of cubes in 10 colours to stack.

• Edge of cube: 2 cm. • Set of 200. 313 309 333 306 3

• Dice side: 1.8 cm. • Packet of 100. 313 309 342 035 0

Base 10 Handling material to discover the decimal number system and the relationship between units, tens and hundreds up to 1000. • Each box contains: 100 cubes, 10 sticks, 10 panels and 1 block. 313 309 342 161 6

Simple Scales These easy-to-use scales illustrate the concept of balance using 5 to 200 g weights. The pans can also hold up to 1 litre of liquid. • H/W: 29 x 39 cm. • 1 pair of scales. • Five 5-gram weights. • Five 10-gram weights. • 1 teacher’s leaflet.

44

313 309 342 156 2

Measuring Cups 3 very strong transparent plastic receptacles with handle and pourer. Scale of 250, 500 and 1000 ml to introduce the concept of volume via practical handling. • H.: 14/11/9 cm; Ø: 12/10/8 cm. 313 309 305 178 3

Abacus Wooden abacus made up of 10 rods and 100 beads in 2 colours for easy visualisation. • L/W: 21 x 17 cm; Base L: 5.5 cm. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 305 078 6


Zippered Pockets - Set of 10 10 transparent pockets with a zip closure for decoration with felt-tip pens or stickers. Can also be used to store pencils, beads, game pieces, etc. • Transparent flexible plastic. • L/W: 25 x 15 cm.

Sorting Bears

Fruit Counters 108 fruits in soft plastic: 6 shapes, 6 colours.

Made of hard plastic in 3 different sizes (24 large, 24 medium and 48 small models) and 6 colours.

• L. banana: 6 cm / Ø orange: 2.3 cm. • Set of 48. 313 309 388 375 9

• L.: 3.5/3/2.5 cm. • Set of 96. 313 309 379 061 3

313 309 304 995 7

Sorting Animals

Sorting Vehicles

Connecting People

Made of soft plastic in 2 different sizes, 6 assorted shapes and 6 colours.

Made of soft plastic in 6 assorted shapes and 6 colours.

Made of hard plastic in 3 sizes, both sexes and 4 colours.

• L.: 4.5/4/3.5 cm. • Set of 72. 313 309 388 325 4

• L.: 5/4.5/3.5 cm. • Set of 108. 313 309 388 324 7

• H.: 5.2/4.5/3.5 cm. • Set of 96. 313 309 379 050 7

Acromaths Sorting Materials 48 plastic pieces in 6 colours: orange, yellow, purple, red, blue, green. • 12 large clowns (H.: 5.5 cm). • 12 small clowns (H.: 4.4 cm). • 24 stacking pieces (H.: 2.2 cm). 313 309 342 128 9

Counting Animals 60 large wooden animals: 15 elephants, 15 tigers, 15 bears and 15 penguins.

Multicubes

• H: 4 cm. • Set of 60. 313 309 388 406 0

• Edge of cube: 2 cm. • Set of 200. 313 309 333 306 3

Discovering Maths

EW

200 stackable cubes in 10 assorted colours.

Sorting Boxes Boxes with 5 compartments and one groove for holding instruction cards. • L/W box: 27 x 12 cm.

• Set of 2. 313 309 305 162 2

Large Transparent Blue Plastic Tokens

Plastic Tokens

• Set of 8. 313 309 305 118 9

• Ø: 3.5 cm. • Set of 200. 313 309 330 128 4

• Ø: 3.5 cm. • Set of 200. 313 309 330 127 7

200 tokens in 4 colours.

45


Discovering Maths

Spatial Awareness 24 model sheets

A

2 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

Toporama Michel and Marie-Hélène Chevillon

This equipment provides the first steps to learning how to structure in three-dimensional spaces, such as relevant positioning (in front, behind, next to, etc.) or different planes. The pieces are figurative in order to increase children’s motivation. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

14 figurines

2 grooved wooden supports

6 transparent bases

Teacher’s leaflet Presents the objectives, equipment and possible usages: - without the cards, for freely discovering and handling the figurines: naming, sorting, experiencing the first notions of spatial organisation; - with the cards, in order to introduce progressively topological concepts and the associated vocabulary.

• Base L/W: 24 x 9 cm; Photo L/W: 19 x 13 cm; Figurines H: 12/10/7 cm. The box contains: • 24 model cards. • 14 wooden figurines (houses, trees, boys, girls, cats, chickens, fences). • 2 grooved wooden supports. • 6 transparent bases. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 863 9

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

B

1x

1x A

+

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to Toporama and enables an additional two children to join in. • 11 wooden figurines (2 houses, 2 trees, 1 boy, 1 girl, 2 cats, 2 chickens, 1 fence). • 2 grooved wooden supports. 313 309 342 864 6

A

+

B

1x

B

2x

6 sets of 12 cards One concept and one question per set

3 YEARS +

72 CARDS

Fingercards - Spatial Awareness Hervé Le Madec

Who is inside?

Who is outside?

Who is on top?

This pack aids teaching spatial awareness using learning activities and helps children acquire the following concepts: below - above in front of - behind - inside - outside.

46

The box contains: • 72 double-sided cards (10 x 10 cm). • 5 divided inserts. • 1 teacher’s leaflet including 1 evaluation sheet. 313 309 388 044 4 What is underneath?

Who is in front?

What is behind?


Discovering Maths

POINT 2 large format lecterns with 1 magnetic face.

4 YEARS +

MAGNETIC 4 CHILDREN PIECES

Topoprimo Communication activities for acquiring and structuring spatial concepts through language. Example activities: • discovery: describing landscapes, identifying and naming characters, objects and animals; • memorisation: observing then describing, answering questions or solving riddles; • placing shapes: following verbal instructions, with an odd one out, missing piece, etc.

24 model sheets to put on the back of the lectern

4 landscape sheets to place on the lectern

Front/Back

The box contains: • 2 lecterns with 1 magnetic green face (33 x 23 cm). • 4 landscape sheets: an orchard, the countryside, a house, a beach (32.5 x 22.7 cm). • 16 magnetic shapes (4 per landscape): 4 characters, 3 objects, 9 animals. • 24 model sheets (21 x 18.5 cm). • 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 342 867 7

2 lecterns with 1 magnetic face

16 magnetic shapes

6 sets of 12 cards

One concept and one question per set

4 YEARS +

72 CARDS

Fingercards - Spatial Awareness

Who is the highest?

Who is the lowest?

¿Quién es el último?

Who is the first?

Who is the furthest from the red drawing with white dots?

Hervé Le Madec

This spatial awareness pack encourages spatial awareness through learning activities to help children acquire the following concepts: High/ Low - Far/Near - The first/The last. The box contains: • 72 double-sided cards (10 x 10 cm). • 5 divided inserts. • 1 teacher’s leaflet including 1 evaluation sheet. 313 309 388 048 2

Who is the closest to the red drawing with white dots?

47


Discovering Maths

10 wooden pieces

2 game boards 6 plastic bases

A

18 model sheets

2 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

Topology Set 1 M. Cathala and D. Vanhove

Particularly suitable for young children, this equipment develops children’s observation and spatial awareness skills. It establishes the match between the threedimensional space and its representation in two dimensions. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. After studying the model card and identifying the relative position of the given elements, children reproduce the same configuration on the game board. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 18 model cards (L/W: 19 x 13 cm). • 10 painted wooden objects (2 dogs standing up, 2 dogs lying down, 2 red roofs, 2 kennels, 2 trees). • 2 game boards (L/W: 32 x 22 cm). • 6 plastic bases. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 231 6

B

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

A

1x

A

1x

+

+

B

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Topology Set 1 and enables an additional two children to join in. • 10 wooden pieces. • 2 game boards (L/W: 32 x 22 cm). 313 309 342 232 3

48

1x

2x

B


A w a r e n e s s 28 wooden pieces

Discovering Maths

S p a t i a l

A

2 game boards

18 model sheets

6 plastic bases

4 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

Topology Set 2 M. Cathala and D. Vanhove

The Topology Set 2 develops observational and spatial awareness skills. Offering increasingly complex situations in which several spatial concepts come into play, it enables children to match these concepts in three-dimensional space with their two-dimensional representation. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. After studying the model card and identifying the relative position of the given elements, children reproduce the same configuration on the game board. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 18 model cards (L/W: 19 x 13 cm). • 28 painted wooden objects (8 fences, 4 yellow cube houses, 2 red roofs, 4 large fir trees, 2 little men, 2 brown horses, 2 orange cows, 2 white sheep, 2 yellow chickens). • 2 game boards (L/W: 32 x 22 cm). • 6 plastic bases. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 233 0

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

A B

1x

This material adds to the Topology Set 2 and enables an additional two children to join in. • 28 painted wooden objects (8 fences, 4 yellow cube houses, 2 red roofs, 4 large fir trees, 2 little men, 2 brown horses, 2 orange cows, 2 white sheep, 2 yellow chickens). • 2 game boards (L/W: 32 x 22 cm). 313 309 342 234 7

1x

+

2 Child Extension Pack

1x

A

+

B

B

2x 49


Discovering Maths

A

3 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

Spatial Awareness Set 1 André Jacquart

Stacking and building games for logic and spatial awareness activities. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. The cards represent constructions to be reproduced in 3D, taking into account the pieces' position, orientation and colour. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 24 instruction cards in 4 sets (L/W: 20 x 13 cm). • 18 plastic pieces of 3 types (roof, upper floor, ground floor) in 3 colours (red, yellow, blue). • 6 plastic bases. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 227 9

18 plastic pieces (3 types - roof, floor, ground floor) 6 plastic bases

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

1x

1x A

+

B

A

+

B

B

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Spatial Awareness Set 1 and enables an additional two children to join in. • 18 plastic pieces of 3 types (roof, upper floor, ground floor) in 3 colours (red, yellow, blue). 313 309 342 228 6

1x

2x

24 plastic pieces (3 types - 4 colours)

A

4 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

Spatial Awareness Set 2 André Jacquart

This workshop introduces two modes of spatial representation: - front views; - perspective views. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. The 24 cards, with a progressive level of difficulty, represent pieces shown from in front or from an angle. Using this equipment, children can reproduce each configuration while identifying the orientation and colour of each piece. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 24 instruction cards in 4 sets of 6 (L/W: 17 x 17 cm and 21 x 21 cm). • 24 plastic pieces of 3 types (roof, upper floor, ground floor) in 4 colours (red, green, yellow and blue). • 2 boards in hard plastic. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 222 4

2 plastic boards

24 instruction cards

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

1x

A

+

B

6 CHILDREN

1x

+

B

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Spatial Awareness Set 2 and enables an additional two children to join in.

50

• 24 plastic pieces (3 types - 4 colours). • 2 boards in hard plastic. 313 309 342 223 1

1x

A

2x

B


A w a r e n e s s

6 transparent bases

A

3 YEARS +

Discovering Maths

S p a t i a l

2 CHILDREN

Organicubes Through the use of observational skills, this wooden equipment enables the construction and study of perspective views. The 18 model cards, arranged in a ladder cube, offer different arrangements of increasing difficulty. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 18 colour model cards. • 28 wood cubes in 4 colours. • 6 transparent bases. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. • L/W model card: 21 x 15 cm; cube side: 3 cm. 313 309 343 137 0

28 wooden cubes 4 colours 18 colour model cards

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

1x

1x A

A

B

+

+

B

B

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to Organicubes and enables an additional two children to join in.

1x

2x

• 26 wooden cubes in 4 colours (6 blue, 6 green, 7 yellow and 7 red). 313 309 343 138 7

90 model cards

5 YEARS +

4 CHILDREN

Structuro André Clavel

This game guides children’s first steps towards abstraction. It involves reproducing 3-dimensional cube structures as shown in perspective on progressively difficult full-colour model cards. • L/W card: 13 x 10 cm; edge of cube: 2.5 cm. • The box contains: 64 plastic cubes, 90 cardboard model cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 343 096 0

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to Structuro and enables an additional two children to join in. • 64 plastic cubes. 313 309 343 097 7

64 cubes

51


Discovering Maths

Geometry • A selection of materials for intuitive discovery of the properties of simple geometric shapes.

3 YEARS + 4 YEARS +

Logic Blocks 60 hard plastic pieces in 5 geometric shapes (square, rectangle, triangle, circle, hexagon), in 3 colours, 2 sizes and 2 thicknesses. • Side of large square: 5.5 cm. • Set of 60. 313 309 342 208 8

Plastic Tangrams • Plastic Tangrams side: 10 cm. • The bag contains: 4 seven-piece plastic Tangrams in 4 different colours (blue, red, green, yellow). 313 309 342 084 8

EW

5 YEARS +

4 YEARS +

Plastic Shape Tracer Set This set allows children to familiarise themselves with geometric shapes. 5 geometric shapes in transparent plastic for tracing figures, patterns and tiles. • L of square edge: 3 and 5 cm. • The set includes: 5 plastic geometric shapes in 2 sizes and 3 different colours (1 rectangle, 1 hexagon, 1 equilateral triangle, 1 square, 1 circle). 313 309 342 290 3

Geoplans Simple transparent peg boards to trace, transform or create figurative or geometric shapes. Pattern cards are included to slip beneath the transparent plates. • L/W: 25.5 x 15 cm. • The box contains: 4 Geoplans, 16 pattern cards, 1 bag of elastic bands (assorted lengths and colours) and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 077 0

Actual-size reproduction of model cards

5 YEARS +

4 CHILDREN

Organicolor Develop abstraction skills

52

J. Dubosson

Develops observation, organisation and reasoning skills. Using coloured wooden chips, children reproduce complex designs based either on models or simply using their imagination. • L/W model card: 23 x 13 cm / 23 x 23 cm / 26 x 12.5 cm. • The box contains: 96 chips (4 colours), 28 model cards in colour or black and white and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 038 9


Discovering Maths

A

MAGNETIC

2 CHILDREN PIECES

3 YEARS +

Geocolor André Jacquart

This workshop introduces the recognition of simple geometric shapes: square, rectangle, triangle and circle. The child reproduces or creates semi-representational models using magnetic pieces in a variety of shapes and colours. The activity cards are grouped into 6 sets of increasing difficulty. • Sets 1 and 2: individual shapes shown as solids. • Sets 3 and 4: individual shapes shown hollow. • Sets 5 and 6: individual or assembled shapes shown as solids. For 2, 4 to 6 extra children, just get 1, 2 or 3 Extension Packs.

40 magnetic shape counters

• L/W sheet: 30 x 21 cm. • The box contains: 12 double-sided activity cards grouped into 6 sets, 40 magnetic shape counters in 5 different shapes and 4 different colours, and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 345 114 9

12 double-sided activity cards, i.e. 24 models to reproduce

Build your set

B

6 CHILDREN

4 CHILDREN

1x

1x A

A

2 Child Extension Pack

+

This material adds to Geocolor and enables an additional two children to join in. • 40 magnetic shape counters in 4 different colours, i.e. 10 shape counters (square, rectangle, triangle, circle, semi-circle) per colour. 313 309 345 115 6

1x

B

2x

48 pattern cards

3 YEARS +

+

B

6 plastic cut-out trays

6 CHILDREN

Geometrix F. Hardy and G. Zimmermann

Wooden geometric pieces in 3 colours for creating a wide variety of designs. The shapes fit into plastic trays using actual-size or scaled-down, colour, black and white or outlined patterns. • Ø circle: 5 cm. L/W tray: 28 x 21 cm. • The box contains: 132 geometric pieces: circles, semi-circles, large and small triangles, large and small squares, 6 plastic trays, 48 printed pattern cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 343 102 8

53


Discovering Time

Time Awareness

40

4 YEARS +

PHOTOS

Image Sequences - Sands of Time Photo flashcards chosen to help the child understand the concept of time. The photos are used as a basis for identifying a chronology by looking at the concepts of succession (before, now, after) or simultaneousness (at the same time). The 40 colour photographs provide a rich and original resource for the development of language and the acquisition of new vocabulary. The image collection is organised into eight themes, each comprising five photographs that can be used individually or as a set, depending on the child’s level: growing up, life stages, from hatching to first flight, making a mask, planting flowers, from flower to fruit, building a house, a sailing boat leaving the harbour. • L/W photo: 15 x 12 cm. • The box contains: 40 colour photos, plastic dividers for filing families of photos and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 195 1

POINT

15 cm

12 cm

Delayed-effect sticking action.

40

4 YEARS +

PHOTOS

Photo Box - The Seasons This series of photo flashcards allows the child to discover the cyclical pattern of the weather. For this purpose, the child associates clues, sorts, classes, associates and corrects. The image collection is organised into 6 themes: types of clothing, plants and fruit, animals, landscapes, types of manual work and leisure activities. The landscape theme comprises four sub-themes: the countryside, the sea, the city and the mountains. The box contains: • 40 photos (15 x 12 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 196 8

Hourglasses

14.5 cm

To measure time via the flow of sand. 5 flow speeds (30 s, 1, 3, 5 and 10 min), each corresponding to a different colour.

Clocks SET OF

5 54

Large Hourglasses 1 set of 5 hourglasses, in a case. • H: 14.5 cm. 313 309 342 179 1

Set of 10 plastic clocks with 2 different coloured hands. • Flexible plastic. • L/W: 11.7 x 11.7 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 305 165 3


3 YEARS +

Weather roulette

MAGNETIC

PIECES

An amusing, attractive resource to introduce the weather and foster awareness of the concept of the passage of time. The children are invited to: - observe the weather; - use the roulette wheel and symbol counters to make a weather forecast; - dress Little Bear to suit the forecast. Using a practical, everyday situation, they gradually acquire the appropriate vocabulary (weather vocabulary, the language of clothes and the seasons) and are introduced to the concept of chronology (yesterday, today, tomorrow).

40 cm

Weather for Children

• The complete set includes: 1 magnetic panel (56 x 40 cm) with 2 mounting eyelets ; 24 clothing pieces ; 24 weather counters ; 4 season counters ; 4 arrows ; 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 305 164 6

4 season counters

3 YEARS +

56 cm

Discovering Time

Rituals

Little Bear to be dressed to suit the season.

Chronology reference bar

Temperature reference bar

24 clothing pieces

24 weather counters

MAGNETIC

PIECES

Those present

Those absent

Attendance Board Laurence Jossomme

Group material that is extremely useful for encouraging numeracy. Using this material every day also helps to: - naturally broaden children’s vocabulary (colours, shapes, organising into groups, etc.); - create spatial and time awareness activities; - create problem solving activities relating to amounts. Large board (92 x 77.5 cm) for group activities. The board is made up of three sections: one section with a blue background to identify children present, one section with a yellow background to identify children absent, a number bar on a green background to display the counting results. • The complete set includes: 1 magnetic plastic board, 36 reversible magnetic wooden frames, 40 first name labels (20 orange and 20 green: one colour for girls and one for boys), 6 white magnetic labels (to be filled in), 1 green magnetic counter (to hide the number 0 on the number bar), 6 triangular magnetic counters (to be placed on the number bar to enumerate those present and absent), 6 magnetic counters in geometric shapes (to identify the groups of children on the board), 2 strips of stickers in geometric shapes (to identify the groups of children in the wooden frames) and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 305 158 5

Number bar 1 green magnetic counter to hide the 0

6 triangular magnetic counters to count out the children present and those absent (girls, boys, girls & boys)

Additional Frames and Counters 2 Additional Labels 1 • 40 children’s name labels (20 green and 20 orange). • 2 strips of stickers (to identify the groups). 313 309 305 160 8

• 5 magnetic wooden frames. • 13 magnetic counters: - 6 to identify the groups; - 6 to count; - 1 to hide the zero; • 6 white labels on a magnetic base. 313 309 305 161 5

SEE ALSO Magnetic Number Line p. 27

55


Discovering the World

Balanced Diet 1 language game

5 CHILDREN

4 YEARS +

Food Games 3 types of activities about food are offered to encourage knowledge, language, discussion and sensory enjoyment. • A language game: children learn to recognise the different foods and their origins, and describe a dish, by looking at the photo boards. • A sorting game: the 5 round counters represent 5 food groups and allow the photos to be sorted by flavour, colour, type of meal, etc. • 2 lotto games: "1 food group" lotto or "5 food groups" lotto. • L/W boards: 24 x 18 cm. • L/W photo cards: 8 x 7 cm. • Ø counters: 6 cm. • The box contains: 35 photo boards, 5 double-sided lotto boards, 5 illustrated round counters, 25 photo cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 032 8

35 photo boards 1 sorting game 5 "food group" counters

5 lotto boards

7 cm 2 lotto games 8 cm On the front, "1 food group" lotto 25 photo cards

36 counters

2 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Maxilotto Food Lotto designed around food. Each food group is represented by a board: Fruits and Vegetables, Cereals and Cereal Products, Dairy Products, Meat, Fish and Eggs, Fats, Herbs and Spices. Children learn to name foods and understand the rules of nutrition. • L/W board: 33 x 22.7 cm. • L/W counter: 10 x 10 cm. • The box contains: 6 game boards and 36 cardboard counters. 313 309 336 557 6

4 YEARS +

6 game boards

2-4 CHILDREN

Bon Appétit! Françoise Rastoin-Faugeron

Come and eat! An entertaining way of making children aware of the importance of a balanced diet for their health and development.

56

• L/W board: 60 x 32 cm. • L/W meal tray: 23 x 13.5 cm. • L/W counter: 4 x 4 cm. • The box contains: 1 game board and 4 cardboard meal trays, 48 photograph food counters, 4 wooden game pieces, 1 dice, 1 fabric bag and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 187 5

4 meal trays

On the back, "5 food group" lotto


23 cm

33 cm

48 animal counters

6 large activity boards

4 YEARS +

4 YEARS +

Nature Games Language and observation games to learn about 6 natural environments: the vegetable garden, the countryside, the pond, the river, the seaside and the sea-bed. Using illustrated boards, the children learn to distinguish landscapes, recognise and memorise animal and vegetable species, make comparisons between different living environments, extend their vocabulary etc. Each board represents what can be seen above / on / below. The lotto game encourages the child to follow clues and to "search for the tiny animal" to complete each board. • Board L/W: 33 x 23 cm; counter size: 7 cm. • The box contains: 6 cardboard activity boards, 48 cardboard animal counters and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 198 1

2-4 CHILDREN

Discovering the World

Nature and Environment

Sorting for the Planet Lucienne Brive

A route game for raising children’s awareness of environmental protection by sorting waste so that it can be recycled. The aim of this game is to be the first to unload 4 dustbins sorted by type of waste (household waste, glass, cardboard, plastic and metal) in the 2 recycling plants along the route. • L/W board: 39 x 39 cm. • L/W sorting card: 4 x 3 cm. • H/L/D lorry counter: 2 x 3 x 1 cm. • The box contains: 1 cardboard game board representing a route, 4 cardboard bin lorries in which the child places his or her bins filled with 5 same-type cards, 92 sorting cards, 16 cardboard bins in 4 colours, 4 wooden lorries for moving forward, 1 dice, 1 fabric bag containing the stack, 1 summary card of the waste to sort and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 180 6

I Sort Out My Waste A box to help children learn about sorting waste. Children put the painted counter in the slot for one of 5 compartments: paper, metal, plastic, glass and organic waste. Children should identify each compartment using the written word, the design or the colour. • Box L/W/H: 31 x 9.5 x 13.5 cm. • Slot L/W: 6 x 0.8 cm. • 1 solid wood box and 30 painted counters. 313 309 379 068 2

Magnifying Jars 6 transparent magnifying jars, each with a lid providing 2 scales of magnification (x 2 and x 4). Perfect for observing small items or living creatures. The lids are punched with air holes. • Ø/H jar: 6 x 7.5 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 305 090 8

Maxi-magnifying Glass Large, hand-held magnifying glass for easy observation. Highly practical with its wide, anti-slip handle that can be easily held by children. • Diameter 100 mm magnification x 2. • Diameter 20 mm magnification x 3 and x 4. 313 309 305 168 4

Magnifying Glasses 10 magnifying glasses: x 3 and x 6. • L/Ø: 11.5 x 4.5 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 305 128 8

Thermometer A large plastic thermometer for indoor or outdoor use. Glass tube with kerosene. Shows the temperature in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit (- 40°C to + 50°C). • W/H: 7.5 x 39 cm. 313 309 332 656 0

57


58


To discover... NEW

Educational Games Quadrimemo - Animals

P.67

O

ur underlying commitment is to provide educational games, designed jointly with educational professionals, that are suited to young and older children alike. These innovative products can be used in small groups and can be adapted to the child’s progress. Most include a set of game rules.

Learning Games NNEW EW

My First Sound Situations Lotto

P.72

Sensory Games Maxilottos

p. 60 p. 62

Lottos, Dominos, Memory

p. 64

Language Games

p. 68

Sound Association Games

p. 70

Logic Games

p. 73

Association Games

p. 74

Counting Games

p. 75

Self-correction Games

p. 76

Educational Games Card Games

p. 78

Board Games

p. 80

NEW

Discolud - Geometric Shapes

P.74 59


Learning Games

Sensory Games

6 lotto boards

18 counters

2 YEARS +

1-6 CHILDREN

Tactiludi Animals 2 games about tactile recognition. • Lotto game. 6 illustrated boards each with 3 embedded material sections. 9 different materials appear twice across all the boards. Without looking, each player must find the counters in the bag with the same materials as the ones on the player’s board. • Concentration-style game. You play with the 18 counters embedded with 9 different materials. • L/W of board: 28 x 21 cm. • Side of counter: 6.5 cm. • The box contains: 6 lotto boards, 18 counters and a fabric bag. 313 309 337 134 8

3 YEARS +

2-6 CHILDREN

Tactidominos 24 wooden dominos, covered in 8 different textures to be recognised by touching. • L/W/D piece: 7 x 3.5 x 1.5 cm. • The box contains: 24 wooden dominos covered in 8 textures. 313 309 337 136 2 24 wooden dominos

POINT Touch recognitition of textures textures.

5 game boards

25 pieces in varnished wood

4 YEARS +

2-5 CHILDREN

Tactilo® 25 shapes in varnished wood hidden in a bag and which children have to recognise by touch and place them on a lotto card. • H. piece: 3.5 cm. • L/W card: 21 x 13.5 cm. • 1 teacher’s leaflet.

60

35 mm

313 309 337 037 2


24 cm

18 cm

8 cm

7 cm

25 photo cards On the front “1 sense” lotto On the back “5 senses” lotto

Learning Games

2 lotto games

1 sorting game 5 counters

4 YEARS +

5 CHILDREN

The 5 Senses Games Games for discovering the 5 senses and their function, for developing language and knowledge of the environment. 3 games in 1 to explore the 5 senses. • A language game: using large photos, the children observe, describe the sensations, identify the organs concerned, compare their sensory experiences etc. • A sorting game: sort the photos by sense and associate them with the matching counter-symbols; match by type of sensation, etc. • 2 lotto games: “1 sense” lotto or “5 senses” lotto.

2 YEARS +

18 cm

24 cm

The box contains: • 35 photo boards (24 x 18 cm). • 5 double-sided lotto boards (24 x 18 cm). • 25 photo cards (8 x 7 cm). • 5 round counters (Ø: 6 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 031 1

1 language game

35 photo boards

1-6 CHILDREN

Tactiloto 24 wooden pieces to teach how to recognise shapes by touch. Each shape is drawn onto a cardboard counter so that children can familiarise themselves with the pieces, and play lotto. Then the pieces are hidden in a bag and, in turn, children have to identify each shape by touch and place it on the corresponding counter. • L/W counter: 8 x 8 cm. • H/W/D fish: 6.5 x 4.5 x 0.9 cm. The box contains: 24 coloured pieces in varnished wood, 24 counters in strong cardboard, 1 cloth bag and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 133 1

POINTS • Free standing wooden w pieces. • Activity A ti it off varying difficulty.

61


Learning Games

Maxilottos

2 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

24 counters

Maxilotto Animals 4 game boards to complete by matching photographed animals.

4 game boards

• L/W board: 33 x 23 cm. • L/W counter: 10.5 x 10 cm. • The box contains: 4 game boards and 24 sturdy laminated cardboard counters. 313 309 387 016 2

12 game boards

2 YEARS +

2-6 CHILDREN

Maxilotto Colours C. Baraja

36 counters

This lotto game introduces children to colours (3 primary and 3 complementary), through observation and play. The counters are cut in the shape of the photographed objects and are placed on the single-colour game boards or on the black and white boards (containing 1 object from each coloured board). • L/W board: 33 x 23 cm. • H/D counter : 8 x 0.3 cm. • The box contains: 12 cardboard game boards (6 coloured boards and 6 black and white boards), 36 rigid cardboard counters with colour photos and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 580 4

36 counters

6 game boards

2 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Maxilotto Food Lotto designed around food. Each food group is represented by a board: Fruits and Vegetables, Cereals and Cereal Products, Dairy Products, Meat, Fish and Eggs, Fats, Herbs and Spices. Children learn to name foods and understand the rules of nutrition.

62

• L/W board: 33 x 22.7 cm. • L/W counter: 10 x 10 cm. • The box contains: 6 game boards and 36 cardboard counters. 313 309 336 557 6


Learning Games

6 game boards

POINT Photographs of obbjects.

2 YEARS +

2-6 CHILDREN

Everyday Life Lotto Lotto that reflects the world of young children. 36 photos of highly familiar objects placed on 6 game boards. Each board is based on a theme in the home: bathroom, food, the kitchen, clothing, toys and objects. • L/W board: 33 x 23 cm. • L/W counter: 10 x 10 cm. • The box contains : 6 game boards and 36 cardboard object counters. 313 309 336 558 3

36 object counters

32 counters

2-8 CHILDREN

3 YEARS +

Opposites Lotto A bingo game to help children describe objects precisely. 16 objects presented in two contrasting situations (dirty/clean; front/behind). The child has to describe the image needed to complete his/her game board. 8 illustrated boards

• L/W board: 22 x 22 cm. • L/W counter: 10 x 10 cm. • The box contains: 8 illustrated cardboard boards, 32 counters representing the objects and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 990 1

2 lotto games 7 cm

5 lotto boards

18 cm

8 cm 25 photo cards On the front, “1 food group” lotto

4 YEARS +

5 CHILDREN

1 language game

On the back, “5 food group” lotto 18 cm

Food Games

• L/W boards: 24 x 18 cm. • L/W photo cards: 8 x 7 cm. • Ø counters: 6 cm. • The box contains: 35 photo boards, 5 double-sided lotto boards, 5 illustrated round counters, 25 photo cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 032 8

24 cm

3 types of activities about food are offered to encourage knowledge, language, discussion and sensory enjoyment. • A language game: children learn to recognise the different foods and their origins, and describe a dish, by looking at the photo boards. • A sorting game: the 5 round counters represent 5 food groups and allow the photos to be sorted by flavour, colour, type of meal, etc. • 2 lotto games: "1 food group" lotto or "5 food groups" lotto.

1 sorting game

5 "food group" counters

63


Learning Games

Lottos, Dominos, Memory

4 YEARS +

2-5 CHILDREN

Lotto - From 1 to 10

Front / Back

A lotto game to learn about the numbers 1 to 10. The quantities illustrated by the small animals on the boards must be matched with numbers (one side of the counter) or dots on a dice (the other side of the counter). • Board L/W: 16.8 x 11.5 cm. • Counter L/W: 7.5 x 4.9 cm. • The box contains: 5 game boards and 20 illustrated double-sided cardboard counters. 313 309 332 018 6

3 YEARS +

2-6 CHILDREN

Domino - Numbers A game of 29 dominos for the discovery of numbers and dots on a dice from 0 to 6. • Piece L/W: 10 x 5 cm. • The box contains: 29 illustrated card dominos. 313 309 332 023 0

2 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Lotto - Colours A bingo game on the theme of colours: blue, yellow, red and green. 4 game boards and 6 counters to reposition per board. • Board L/W: 16.8 x 11.5 cm. • Counter side: 4.8 cm. • The box contains: 4 game boards and 24 illustrated card counters. 313 309 332 021 6

2 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Lotto - Objects A bingo game on the theme of everyday objects: school, the home, toys and vehicles. Suitable for children under 3. • Board L/W: 16.8 x 11.5 cm. • Counter side: 4.8 cm. • The box contains: 4 game boards and 24 illustrated card counters. 313 309 332 022 3

64


1 fabric bag

2 YEARS +

Learning Games

EW

12 cubes with inlaid gems

1-4 CHILDREN

Sound Discovery Blocks Audio memory game to develop recognition and aural memory. 12 wooden sound cubes. When shaking the cubes, children should recognise and associate two identical sounds to form 6 pairs. Self-correcting game due to the gems in different colours inlaid on one side. • Cube side: 4 cm. • L/W of bag: 32 x 27 cm. The box contains: 12 wooden cubes with inlaid gems in plastic and 1 fabric bag with a tie cord. 313 309 398 353 4

3 YEARS +

2-6 CHILDREN

36 CARDS

Memo - Farm A 36-piece memory game on a farming theme. • Counter side: 5 cm. • The box contains: 36 illustrated card counters. 313 309 332 020 9

9.5 cm

9.5 cm

2 YEARS +

1-6 CHILDREN

28 CARDS

Maximemo Foods A game of association with pictures of food, a good memory-building exercise. • L/W card: 9.5 x 9.5 cm. • The box contains: 28 large-format laminated cardboard photo cards (14 pairs) and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 591 0

65


Learning Games

Quadrimemo • A wide variety of memory concepts for developing observation skills and spatial awareness.

24 wooden vehicles

2 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

3D Quadrimemo - Vehicles Wooden vehicles to be hidden under caps to make pairs based on memory games. 3 sets of rules for the game are provided. For use with the Quadrimemo grid sold separately. • L/W minimum: 3 x 3.5 cm. • The box contains: 24 varnished wooden vehicles, 8 types (car, motorbike, truck, locomotive, aeroplane, hot air balloon, sailing boat, cruise liner). 313 309 375 142 3

24 wooden animals

2 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

3D Quadrimemo - Animals Wooden animals to hide under caps to build up pairs based on memory games. For use with the Quadrimemo grid sold separately. There are three set of game rules. • Animal H/W: 3 x 3.5 cm. • The box contains: 24 wooden animals in 8 different shapes and 8 different colours (tortoise, frog, snail, butterfly, fish, chick, bear and hedgehog). 313 309 375 133 1

16 caps

Quadrimemo - Shapes Grid 1 grid and 16 plastic caps. For use with the 3D Quadrimemo or Activity Cards Quadrimemo (sold separately). 1 grid

66

• 1 grid and 16 plastic caps. • H/W grid: 26 x 26 cm. • H. cover: 5 cm. 313 309 375 103 4


D o m i n o s ,

M e m o r y

EW

2 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Learning Games

L o t t o s ,

Quadrimemo - Animals 10 photo boards of increasing difficulty on the subject of the animal kingdom (pets, wild animals, sea animals, insects, etc.). Based on the principle of the game of Memory, children associate animals with each other based on their colour, their outline, their physical appearance, their food, etc. For use with Quadrimemo Shapes Grid sold separately. • 10 photo boards and 1 set of game instructions. • L/W of board: 25 x 23 cm. 313 309 375 148 5

10 photo boards

10 boards

3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Quadrimemo - Shapes and Colours 10 painted sheets for playing with shapes and colours. For use with the Quadrimemo - Shapes Grid sold separately. • Board L/W: 25 x 23 cm. • 10 illustrated boards. 313 309 375 131 7

10 photo boards

3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Quadrimemo - Everyday life 10 photo boards on the themes of: animals, objects, plants and food. For use with the Quadrimemo - Shapes grid sold separately. • Board L/W: 25 x 23 cm. • 10 photo boards. 313 309 375 132 4

67


Learning Games

Language Games 4 YEARS +

4 CHILDREN

Language Game 2

2 packs of 48 playing cards

4 card holders

12 model cards

This game encourages the construction of simple sentences to describe and identify a picture. Using model cards and corresponding cards, the children describe the picture in turn. Without looking at the cards, the other children must recognise it and complete their own card. Other games are suggested using the cards alone. • L/W model card: 25 x 10 cm. • L/W playing card: 8.5 x 5.5 cm. • The box contains: 4 strong cardboard activity cards to hold the playing cards, 12 model cards (3 sets of 4) representing the situations to be described, 2 identical packs of 48 playing cards, 8 transparent studs to vertically insert the model cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 991 8

32 large photos

32 photo counters

4 YEARS +

8 CHILDREN

Face Games 21 cm

C. Kallache

4 games boards

Material offering 3 types of activities: a simple lotto, where you must find the same face twice; a game of pairs, where you must associate 2 counters with the same expression but on different faces and a miming game, using the large photos.

15 cm

• L/W board: 21 x 15 cm. • L/W counter: 5 x 4 cm. • The box contains: 32 photos, 4 game boards, 32 rigid cardboard photo counters, 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 194 2

33 cm

23 cm

4 YEARS +

Nature Games

48 animal counters 6 large activity boards

68

Language and observation games to learn about 6 natural environments: the vegetable garden, the countryside, the pond, the river, the seaside and the sea-bed. Using illustrated boards, the children learn to distinguish landscapes, recognise and memorise animal and vegetable species, make comparisons between different living environments, extend their vocabulary etc. Each board represents what can be seen above / on / below. The lotto game encourages the child to follow clues and to "search for the tiny animal" to complete each board. • Board L/W: 33 x 23 cm; counter size: 7 cm. • The box contains: 6 cardboard activity boards, 48 cardboard animal counters and 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 336 198 1


24 cm

5 CHILDREN

4 YEARS +

1 sorting game

5 "food group" counters

Food Games 3 types of activities about food are offered to encourage knowledge, language, discussion and sensory enjoyment. • A language game: children learn to recognise the different foods and their origins, and describe a dish, by looking at the photo boards. • A sorting game: the 5 round counters represent 5 food groups and allow the photos to be sorted by flavour, colour, type of meal, etc. • 2 lotto games: "1 food group" lotto or "5 food groups" lotto. • L/W boards: 24 x 18 cm. • L/W photo cards: 8 x 7 cm. • Ø counters: 6 cm. • The box contains: 35 photo boards, 5 double-sided lotto boards, 5 illustrated round counters, 25 photo cards and 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 336 032 8

Learning Games

18 cm

18 cm

5 lotto boards

2 lotto games 7 cm 8 cm 25 photo cards

On the front, "1 food group" lotto 1 language game

On the back, "5 food group" lotto 18 cm

24 cm

5 CHILDREN

4 YEARS +

The 5 Senses Games Games for discovering the 5 senses and their function, for developing language and knowledge of the environment. 3 games in 1 to explore the 5 senses. • A language game: using large photos, the children observe, describe the sensations, identify the organs concerned, compare their sensory experiences etc. • A sorting game: sort the photos by sense and associate them with the matching counter-symbols; match by type of sensation, etc. • 2 lotto games: “1 sense” lotto or “5 senses” lotto.

35 photo boards 1 sorting game

5 counters

The box contains: • 35 photo boards (24 x 18 cm). • 5 double-sided lotto boards (24 x 18 cm). • 25 photo cards (8 x 7 cm). • 5 round counters (Ø: 6 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 031 1

24 cm

2 lotto games 7 cm 8 cm

18 cm

25 photo cards

On the back “5 senses” lotto

On the front “1 sense” lotto

69


Learning Games

Sound Association Games 2 YEARS + 1 CD lasting 36 minutes

6 CHILDREN

Sound Lotto of Everyday Sounds A listening game for identifying everyday sounds. The children listen to one of the familiar sounds and place a counter on the corresponding picture on their activity board. 36 environmental sounds are recorded 4 times in different orders to maintain the children’s interest.

40 plastic counters

• L/W board: 25 x 9.5 cm. Ø counter: 3.5 cm. • The box contains: 1 CD lasting 36 minutes, 12 cardboard activity boards with a photo of the objects, 40 plastic counters and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 223 9 12 game boards

40 plastic counters

1 CD lasting 52 minutes

3 YEARS +

6 CHILDREN

Animal Sounds Lotto

6 game boards

A game for identifying 36 animal calls. The sounds are recorded 6 times in different orders. The game boards list animals according to habitat. The CD includes 1 recording per card and 5 random recordings. • L/W board: 25 x 19 cm. • Ø counter: 3.5 cm. • The box contains: 1 CD lasting 52 minutes, 6 rigid cardboard game boards with 6 different photos, 40 plastic counters and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 222 2

1 CD lasting 66 minutes

2 YEARS +

2X30 PHOTOS

Audio Flashcards - Animals This comprehensive collection is perfect for young children, enriching their vocabulary about all types of animals, finding out what noises they make and how they live. The large images help legibility and descriptive activities. The same images are included in small format for use in games. The CD is for use in listening and language sessions.

8.5 cm

21 cm

2 image formats for group and individual games

12 cm 29.7 cm

70

The box contains: • 1 CD lasting 66 minutes. • 30 colour photos (29.7 x 21 cm) and 30 card photos (12 x 8.5 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 212 5


Language game

18 cm

24 cm

16 photo boards

Learning Games

EW

4 YEARS +

6 CHILDREN

6 lotto boards

18 cm

Lotto games

Musical Instruments Audio Games For setting up activities around spoken language, listening and discovery of the world on the theme of musical instruments. • Language game: by looking at the photo boards, children learn to recognise different instruments, their family (strings, wind, percussion, etc.), what they are made of (wood, brass, metal, plastic, etc.), their origin, their sound and so on, and acquire an accurate vocabulary. • Audio lotto games: several activities with progressively increasing difficulties around 36 different sounds, to develop listening, discrimination and aural memory. • L/W of photo boards and lotto boards: 24 x 18 cm. • Ø token: 3.5 cm. • The box contains: 16 cardboard photo boards, 6 cardboard lotto boards, 36 plastic tokens, 1 CD lasting 40 minutes and 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 337 226 0

24 cm

1 CD lasting 40 minutes

36 tokens

1 CD lasting 54 minutes

2 YEARS +

2X30 PHOTOS

The box contains: • 30 colour large format photos (L/W: 29.7 x 21 cm). • 30 card format photos (L/W: 12 x 8.5 cm). • 1 audio CD lasting 54 minutes. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 219 4

8.5 cm

An audio CD and 60 photos in 2 formats to name, play and understand the environment. 6 themes relating to children’s everyday life: animals, music, objects, transport, facial expressions and leisure activities. The 30 large format photos are for use in observing and describing an image. The inclusion of 30 card format photos helps with handling by small hands and enables word games to be set up. The audio CD contains sounds associated with each image.

21 cm

Audio Flashcards - Everyday Sounds

29.7 cm

12 cm

71


A s s o c i a t i o n

EW

G a m e s

33 cm

22.7 cm

Learning Games

S o u n d

6 large-format boards

2 YEARS +

6 CHILDREN

My First Sound Situations Lotto Listening and language material that can be used in group sequences or lotto games. The children must identify 30 sounds corresponding to the sound situations illustrated in scenes of everyday life: kitchen, dining room, bedroom, bathroom, in the street and at the park. For learning to observe and describe scenes, developing discrimination and aural memory, encouraging dialogue and enhancing vocabulary.

30 tokens

1 CD lasting 32 minutes

• L/W of board: 33 x 22.7 cm. • Ø of token: 3.5 cm. • The box contains: 6 laminated boards in thick cardboard, 30 plastic tokens, 1 CD lasting 32 minutes and 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 337 143 0

22 cm

6 scene cards

1 CD lasting 54 minutes

33 cm

4 YEARS +

6 CHILDREN

Sound Situations Lotto 48 sounds matching the situations illustrated on 6 scene cards: garden, kitchen, street, square, forest and beach. When they hear a sound, children place a counter on the matching item on the scene card. 6 sequences are recorded in a row, the first scene-by-scene, the others in random orders.

72

60 plastic counters

• L/W card: 33 x 22 cm. • Ø counter: 3 cm. • The box contains: 1 CD lasting 54 minutes, 6 rigid cardboard scene cards, 60 plastic counters and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 131 7


Learning Games

Logic Games POINT Easy to place pieces on the stick. 3 YEARS +

8 instruction pieces

2-4 CHILDREN

32 animal pieces

Piolino A board game to develop observation, reflexes and logic skills based around 3 matching criteria: shape, colour and size. The winner is the one who fills their stick with 6 animal pieces. The way this game is played is attractive to young children or for children with motor skill problems. • L/stick: 23 x 4 cm. • Piece L/W/D: 3.5 x 3.5 x 1 cm. • The box contains: 32 animal pieces, 8 instruction pieces, 4 transparent sticks, 1 cloth bag and 1 set of game instructions. 313 309 379 064 4

4 sticks

POINTS Self-correcting game.

4 YEARS +

8 CHILDREN

Front/Back

Portrait Games

16 portrait sheets

This self-correcting game offers a variety of activities involving the face: observation, language, decoding, sorting and connecting clues, imagination and creation of portraits freely or by following instructions. On the front, each sheet shows pictograms to be decoded to reconstruct a portrait and, on the back, the portrait to allow for correction. The sheets are divided into 3 sets of increasing difficulty. The illustrated strips make it possible to reconstruct the faces either by decoding the pictograms or by duplicating the portrait.

48 illustrated strips, 3 per portrait

• L/W sheet: 13 x 13 cm. • L/W strip: 13 x 3.5 / 4.5 / 5 cm. • The box contains: 16 double-sided cardboard sheets, 48 laminated thick card strips and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 171 3

Reference row

2 pears

Reference row

2 apples Odd ones out: grape and pineapple

2 bananas

Activity 1: Complete.

4 YEARS +

2 cherries Activity 2: Find the matching pictures.

6 CHILDREN

Activity 3: Find the odd one out.

61 cardboard picture counters

Look and Find Jeannine Villani

24 activity boards split into 4 sets of 6 cards. This workshop is entend to develop the ability to observe, concentrate and refine visual discrimination through three types of fun activities: complete the set, find matching objects and identify the odd ones out, using shapes and drawings. Provides first steps to spatial awareness. • L/W board: 26 x 22 cm. • L/W picture counter: 4 x 4 cm. • Ø plastic counter: 3.5 cm. • The box contains: 24 boards, 61 cardboard counters, 60 plastic counters and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 560 6

Reference row

24 boards: 4 sets of 6 progressive activity boards

60 plastic counters

73


Learning Games

Association Games Discolud 3 YEARS +

2-6 CHILDREN

Gilit Metuki and Ronnie Manor

POINT Hands-on fun.

• A new concept matching game using a wheel and attractive illustrations. • Many activities of varying difficulties: observation, visual discrimination and mathematics. • The winner is the player who gets the most pairs!

Discolud - Wheel Loads of fun, thanks to the central section which turns around, allowing for a large number of association games. The different boxes of counters enable various educational concepts to be used. • Plastic. • Ø: 34 cm. 313 309 388 386 5

EW Match pieces based on shape, graphical representation or size

Discolud - Geometric Shapes 3 matching games for recognising geometric shapes (circle, square, triangle, rectangle, oval and hexagon), graphical representations (outline drawings, block drawings, negatives, 3D, in photos) and in 2 sizes (small or large). For use with the Discolud wheel, sold separately. • Ø token: 4 and 5 cm. • The box contains: 120 illustrated cardboard tokens in 2 sizes, and 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 388 376 6

Match by number, dots on a dice or collection

74

Association by number, combination or number of fingers on the hand

Discolud - Numbers & Quantities: 1 to 6

Discolud - Numbers & Quantities: 5 to 10

3 association games on numbers, constellation and dots on a dice from 1 to 6. For use with the Discolud wheel.

3 association games about the number of fingers on each hand, dice combinations and the numbers from 5 to 10.

• Ø counter: 4 and 5 cm. • The box contains: 120 illustrated cardboard counters in 2 sizes and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 379 7

• Ø counter: 4 and 5 cm. • The box contains: 120 illustrated cardboard counters in 2 sizes and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 377 3


Learning Games

Counting Games

2-4 CHILDREN

3 YEARS +

MAGNETIC

PIECES

1, 2, 3... I Can Count Basic and fun-to-use playing materials for learning to count up to 6. Each child completes his or her game board using coloured counters following instructions on the dice (spots and colours). • L/W board: 33 x 23 cm. • Ø counter: 3.3 cm. • Dice side: 2.5 cm. • The box contains: 4 magnetic game boards, 84 coloured magnetic counters, 2 wooden dice (with colours and spots) and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 310 0

4 magnetic game boards

2 dice 84 magnetic counters

POINTS • 4 sets of boards of varying difficulty. • Learn to recognise and name numbers between 1 and 30.

5 YEARS +

2-6 CHILDREN

Bingo For 6 players. This traditional game has been adapted for young children. The counters are numbered 1 to 30. Six children can play together by choosing a board, each in a colour corresponding to a level of difficulty. The child leading the game pulls a counter out of the bag. The first child to fill his or her board wins! • L/W board: 26.5 x 11 cm. • Ø/D counter: 2.5 x 0.5 cm. • The box contains: 24 cardboard game boards (4 sets of 6 boards), 60 wooden counters numbered from 1 to 30 (there are 2 counters for each number), 1 fabric bag and 1 set of rules. 313 309 336 000 7

4 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

The Animal Race Based on the traditional game of ludo, players take it in turns to throw the dice and move forward animals of the same colour. A 6 must be thrown to start each game. The winner is the one who brings all his animals back to the starting point. • L/W board: 29 x 29 cm. • H. animal: 2.5 cm. • Dice size: 1.3 x 1.3 cm. • The game comprises: 1 wooden board, 16 wooden animals and 2 dice. 313 309 336 176 9

75


Learning Games

Self-correction Games Fingercards Hervé Le Madec

• • • •

A novel tool to teach children to count. Clear and entertaining situations in question/answer format. Self-correction cards encourage independent learning. Fast and easy set-up for support sessions.

POINT Self-correction activity.

How to use Fingercards On the front: Hold the card over the fingerprint matching the answer

Hold the card over the fingerprint matching the answer

On the back: without letting go, the child turns the card over The fingers are holding the animal’s tail = right answer

The fingers are not holding the animal’s tail = wrong answer

6 sets of 12 cards One concept and one question per set

3 YEARS +

72 CARDS

Fingercards Spatial Awareness This pack aids teaching spatial awareness using learning activities and helps children acquire the following concepts: below - above - in front of behind - inside - outside.

What is behind?

Who is outside?

The box contains: • 72 double-sided cards (10 x 10 cm). • 5 divided inserts. • 1 teacher’s leaflet including 1 evaluation sheet. 313 309 388 044 4

Who is on top?

6 sets of 12 cards One concept and one question per set

4 YEARS +

72 CARDS

Fingercards Spatial Awareness This spatial awareness pack encourages spatial awareness through learning activities to help children acquire the following concepts: High/Low - Far/Near The first/The last.

76

The box contains: • 72 double-sided cards (10 x 10 cm). • 5 divided inserts. • 1 teacher’s leaflet including 1 evaluation sheet. 313 309 388 048 2

Who is the highest?

Who is the first?

Who is the furthest from the red drawing with white dots?


Learning Games

6 sets of 8 cards One concept and one question per set

5 YEARS +

Fingercards - Numbers 48 cards (6 series of 8 self-correction cards) for: - counting amounts, - recognising numbers up to 15, - familiarising the child with number order, - comparing numbers, - adding or subtracting 1. The box contains: • 48 double-sided cards (10 x 10 cm). • 5 inserts. • 1 teacher’s leaflet including an evaluation sheet. 313 309 388 042 0

How many are there…?

Add 1: How many will that be…? What is the hidden number?

6 sets of 12 cards One concept and one question per set

3 YEARS +

72 CARDS

Fingercards - Numbers A novel training tool for: - providing further mathematical activities, - consolidating learning in numeracy, - encouraging independent work. Each Fingercard shows a situation in question and answer form. The cards are self-correcting in a fun, easy way; they can be used in support sessions.

Which one has the most..?

The box contains: • 72 double-sided cards (10 x 10 cm). • 5 divided inserts. • 1 teacher’s leaflet including 1 evaluation sheet. 313 309 388 043 7

How many are there…? (depiction of figures) Which one has the same number? (depiction of dot dice)

6 sets of 12 cards One concept and one question per set

4 YEARS +

72 CARDS

Fingercards - Numbers This counting pack helps children to understand numbers through learning activities with the following objectives: - fostering awareness of numbers, - comparing quantities, - counting quantities, - gradually recognising numbers from 1 to 10. The box contains: • 72 double-sided cards (10 x 10 cm). • 5 divided inserts. • 1 teacher’s leaflet including 1 evaluation sheet. 313 309 388 047 5

Which one has the same number? (depiction of fingers)

What is the missing number? Where are there the least…?

77


Educational Games

Card Games Educards • Familiar game rules: beggar-my-neighbour, happy families, pairs, memory games. • Allow children to practise basic concepts in an entertaining way: vocabulary, counting, logic, phonology etc.

3 YEARS +

Durable, large cards that are easy to handle.

2-8 CHILDREN

Quantissimo - Counting Games André Jacquart

2 sets of 36 cards with wheels, comes with 9 different sets of games rules for gradually learning quantities from 1 to 6. These cards can also be used for traditional games such as “Happy Families”, “Beggar-MyNeighbour”, memory games and even “Crazy Eights”. • L/W card: 10 x 7 cm. • The box contains: 2 sets of 36 cards, 3 double-sided wheel supports (2 for the colour, 2 for the animal and 2 for the quantity), 2 detachable wheel pointers and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 195 0

36

36

CARDS

CARDS

Game 1: Countryside animals Children have to find a shared feature indicated by a random wheel instruction (animal, colour, quantities in a line of up to 4) within their set of cards (cards hidden or otherwise). The first child to get rid of all their cards is the winner. The level of difficulty can be increased by introducing a 2nd random wheel spin.

4 YEARS +

ane_

R_.

indd

19

Game 2: Savannah animals Children have to find a shared feature indicated by random instruction (animal, colour, quantities in a constellation of up to 6) within their set of cards (cards hidden or otherwise).

50

2-8 CHILDREN

9/10

28/0

avane R indd

50

CARDS

CARDS

1, 2, 3... Happy Families Games These two 50-card Happy Families games can be used by children to learn and practise the numbers from 1 to 10.

Reminder of the different representations of the same number on each card

Number bar on each card

• L/W card: 12 x 8 cm. • The box contains: 2 packs of 50 playing cards. 313 309 337 234 5

Sample family: fruits

Sample family: 3

78

Game 1: has ten 5-card families: on each card a number from 1 to 10 is shown in one of five different ways (objects, dots, counting cubes, fingers or numbers).

Game 2: has five 10-card families: on each card there is a collection of 1 to 10 objects (penguins, robots, flowers, fruit or elephants). A number bar on each card helps children make connections.


The cards in the family are shown at the top

Game 1: 45 cards - 9 families of 5 illustrated cards about 9 professional fields: health care jobs, food and drinks jobs, building jobs, artistic jobs, sports jobs, emergency service jobs, repair jobs, nature jobs and cleaning jobs. Cards in the same family are shown on the banner.

50 4 YEARS +

CARDS

2-8 CHILDREN

Educational Games

45 CARDS

Jobs 2 Happy Families games for exploring the professional world of adults and improving vocabulary. While playing, children learn to recognise different jobs by analysing their uniforms and equipment. • L/W card: 12 x 8 cm. • The box contains: 1 game of 45 illustrated cards, 1 game of 50 photo cards and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 337 229 1

4 YEARS +

Game 2: 50 photo cards - 10 families of 5 cards showing the main equipment for a given profession: doctor, fire fighter, cook, florist, mechanic, sea fisher, farmer, police officer, builder, office worker.

2-8 CHILDREN

Lexico These two 48-card “Happy Families” games develop language skills by building children’s active vocabulary. • L/W card: 12 x 8 cm. • The box contains: 2 packs of 48 playing cards. 313 309 337 236 9

The 6 cards in the family are shown at the top

Game 1: Eight 6-card families depicting families of objects (clothing, kitchen utensils, bathroom items, chairs, DIY tools, school materials, dishes, first aid).

The 4 cards in the family are broken down into 4 parts

Game 2: Twelve 4-card families depict an object or an animal broken down into 4 parts (house, turtle, bicycle, computer, shoe, boat, flower, anorak, elephant, cockerel, piece of furniture, face).

4 transparent plastic holders

Card Holders 4 tabletop supports to hold and display cards. • L/W/H: 26 x 3 x 2.4 cm. • Set of 4 transparent plastic holders. 313 309 388 387 2

POINT Very stable andd capable of holding large ssize cards.

79


Educational Games

Board Games • Games specially designed for children aged from 3 to 6. • Simple and familiar game rules. • Allow children to practise basic concepts in an entertaining way: counting, vocabulary, environment, safety, etc.

3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

My 1st Safari Annick Mauffrey and Isdey Cohen

A basic route game on a safari-photo theme. The aim is to cross the savannah to reach the camp. Two play options are available: - Colour safari: the dice stick shows green - the player moves forward to the next green box; - Animal safari: the dice stick shows 2 - the player moves forward to the next box that has 2 animals.

• Board L/W: 60 x 32 cm. • Piece L/W/D: 4 x 3 x 1.2 cm. • The box contains: 1 game board, 4 pieces, 1 dice stick (4 colours), 1 dots on a dice (from 1 to 3) and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 343 132 5

3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Hen Run Stéphanie Charpiot Desbenoit

A simple and amusing introductory board game for very young children. The aim of the game is to be the first to fill up a nest with 4 eggs. Each child takes turns to throw the dice and turn the wheel the number of eggs shown on the dice (1 to 3). If a player lands on a chick, he or she takes an egg and places it in his or her nest. The other spaces hold lots of surprises: move back, move forward, skip a turn or imitate the noise made by the animal! • L/W board: 26 x 26 cm. • L/W nest: 13 x 12 cm. • H. egg: 3.6 cm. • The box contains: 1 cardboard game board, 4 nests and 16 eggs in varnished wood, and 1 fabric bag. 313 309 336 181 3

3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Birthday Tea Party Ronnie Manor and Gilit Metuki

1, 2, … 5 sweets, for counting from 1 to 5! Using the theme of birthdays which are familiar events and very much celebrated in the classroom, young children learn to count and identify collections of objects. Each player takes it in turn to spin the "sweets" wheel before moving forward the number of squares indicated. By moving around the board, players build up collections of objects (sweets, balloons, gifts) that they then exchange for a candle. The game is won by the first player to put all their candles on their cake. The birthday age, which is the same for everyone during a game, is set by the "candles" wheel at the start of the game. • L/W board: 36.5 x 25.5 cm. • L/W plate: 25 x 18 cm. • Ø game piece: 2.5 cm. • The box contains: 1 game board with 2 wheels, 4 cardboard plates, 80 wooden object counters, 1 fabric bag and 1 set of game rules.

80

313 309 336 189 9


2-6 CHILDREN

3 YEARS +

Educational Games

6 activity boards

MAGNETIC

PIECES

The Colour Game A game for young children to learn to follow instructions related to shape and colour. The aim of the game is to dress the characters on the boards with magnetic clothing in 6 different colours. The children can either make their own choice or follow the instructions on the dice (colour, clothes). • L/W activity board: 31 x 19 cm. • Dice side: 2.5 cm. • The box contains: 6 activity boards, 36 clothes in magnetic cardboard, 2 wooden dice and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 370 4

POINTS • Negotiating a ggrid. • Perception P ti off surfaces.

5 models

18 frogs

4 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

60 sticks

The winner is the player who accumulates the most frogs. To vary the game, 5 models are provided on one card: an actual size model on one side, and 4 others in reduced format on the other.

16 Little Frogs Hervé Le Madec

Little frogs that want to swim out, but sticks block the way. A strategy and anticipation game for 2 players or teams. Place the sticks on the game board as shown on the model card. Each player takes it in turns to remove a stick corresponding to the colour shown on the dice. But be careful: removing a stick may allow one or more frogs to be released. Each frog released is then won by the opponent.

5 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

• L/W board: 21 x 21 cm. • H. frog: 3 cm. • The box contains: 1 silk-screen printed wooden board representing the pond with water lilies which mark the grid, 18 frogs, 60 wooden sticks (2 colours), 1 model card and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 188 2

MAGNETIC

PIECES

A Walk in the Woods Lucienne Brive

Which team – the red riding hoods or the wolves – will be first to reach grandmother’s house to give her as many pots of jam as possible? Split into 2 teams, the children must move through the woods and fill their basket with 10 pieces of fruit (5 different types: wild strawberries, chestnuts, acorns, hazelnuts and mushrooms). The goal is to get a series of 10 pieces of the same type of fruit and swap it for a pot of jam. Along the way, the children take instruction cards indicating that they must either add or remove fruit from their basket. The number is represented in various ways: dots, digit, collection, fingers, illustration.

• L/W board: 39 x 39 cm. • L/W instruction card: 6.3 x 5 cm. • L/W basket: 25 x 22 cm. • Ø fruit: 2.5 cm. • The box contains: 1 cardboard game board and 2 baskets, 100 pieces of fruit in magnetic cardboard, 58 instruction cards, 10 pots of jam, 1 dice for moving forward, 1 dice for the number of pieces of fruit to gather, 2 wooden counters (red riding hood and wolf) and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 182 0

81


Educational Games

3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

MAGNETIC

PIECES

The Lake Monster 40 magnetic counters

1 family of fish

4 fish tanks

Sylvain Ménager

Save a family of fish! A strategy and memory game. The aim of the game is to use a fishing rod to save a family of fish and put them in a fish tank before the monster eats them. A family is made up of 2 large and 2 small fish divided into 2 parts. But players have to be careful when fishing as there are surprises in store including a maggot and a shoe which have to be put back in the lake while players remember where they were placed to avoid catching them again. Two game strategies are possible: a cooperative format (everyone against the monster) or an opposition format (everyone has their own fish tank). • L/W board: 39 x 39 cm. • L/H fish tank: 22.5 x 14 cm. • L/W counter: 3.6 x 3.6 cm. • The box contains: 1 game board depicting the lake, 4 fish tanks, 40 magnetic cardboard counters, 1 wooden fishing rod with magnetic hook and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 193 6

3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

MAGNETIC

PIECES

The Wolf Game An educational board game on the theme of “A walk in the woods”. Simple and convivial game rules that propose 3 different games, always against the wolf. The children have to gather their forest products before the wolf is fully dressed, otherwise… He will eat them! • L/W board: 33 x 33 cm. • H/W wolf: 21.5 x 10 cm; H. leaf: 14 cm. • The box contains: 1 game board, 1 wolf in magnetic cardboard, 5 clothes magnets, 4 leaf-shaped cards, 46 tokens, 1 cloth storage bag and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 300 047 7

5 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Traffico A. Mauffrey, I. Cohen

Board game aimed at helping young children to discover and respect the essential rules of the road. This game puts children into the reallife situation of a journey to school. Each child, depending on whether they are a pedestrian or a car driver, takes a different route, following the instructions given by the dice, the cards and certain squares on the game’s map.

4 wooden counters

82

12 “traffic light” cards

• L/W board: 39 x 39 cm; H. car/pedestrian: 2.4/2.9 cm. • L/W card: 8.5 x 5.5 cm. • Dice side: 2 cm. • The box contains: 1 cardboard game map showing the 2 routes, 4 wooden counters in 4 colours (2 cars, 2 pedestrians), 1 dice with instructions (3 cars/ 3 pedestrians), 1 dice with dots from 1 to 6, 12 “traffic light” cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 304 9


G a m e s

2-4 CHILDREN

4 YEARS +

Sorting for the Planet Lucienne Brive

A route game for raising children’s awareness of environmental protection by sorting waste so that it can be recycled. The aim of this game is to be the first to unload 4 dustbins sorted by type of waste (household waste, glass, cardboard, plastic and metal) in the 2 recycling plants along the route. Each child has a bin lorry and 4 empty bins, and takes a waste card from the stack. But watch out for pitfalls along the way: getting a flat tyre, running out of petrol.

28.5 cm

4 bin lorries / 20 types of waste

40 cm

• L/W board: 39 x 39 cm. • L/W sorting card: 4 x 3 cm. • H/L/D lorry counter: 2 x 3 x 1 cm. • The box contains: 1 cardboard game board representing a route, 4 cardboard bin lorries in which the child places his or her bins filled with 5 same-type cards, 92 sorting cards, 16 cardboard bins in 4 colours, 4 wooden lorries for moving forward, 1 dice, 1 fabric bag containing the stack, 1 summary card of the waste to sort and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 180 6

Educational Games

B o a r d

Ethics and our environment Manufactured using raw materials from regenerated forests (FSC approved).

POINTS • Become sociallly aware. • Teaches T h children hild about selective sorting.

4 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Summary card of the waste to sort

Bin lorries

MAGNETIC

PIECES

Good Day! Laurence Schmitter

The first person to fill their day is the winner! The aim of the game is to move across the grid to collect counters symbolising the different times of the day, in chronological order. The game has 2 levels, with 5 and 10 boxes to complete. • L/W board: 39 x 39 cm. • L/W of small day board: 16 x 6 cm. • L/W of large day board: 34 x 6 cm. • Ø counter: 2.5 cm. • The box contains: 1 illustrated game board, 4 counter storage supports, 40 magnetic card counters, 4 day boards with 5 boxes, 4 day boards with 10 boxes, 1 dotted die, 1 instruction die, 4 play pieces and 1 set of game instructions.

Times of Day -Illustrated eg: teatime

2 game levels: the day in 5 or 10 steps 4 counter storage supports

313 309 336 197 4

4 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Bon Appétit! Françoise Rastoin-Faugeron

Come and eat! An entertaining way of making children aware of the importance of a balanced diet for their health and development. Foods are organised into 6 groups, each of a different colour. The object of the game is to fill a meal tray with 1 food from each of the 6 food groups. 6 self-service stands are depicted on the game board, representing the 6 food groups. Each player takes it in turn to throw the dice and move forward over the coloured boxes (the same colours as the food groups) and instruction boxes, allowing them to win food counters. • L/W board: 60 x 32 cm. • L/W meal tray: 23 x 13.5 cm. • L/W counter: 4 x 4 cm. • The box contains: 1 game board and 4 cardboard meal trays, 48 photograph food counters, 4 wooden game pieces, 1 dice, 1 fabric bag and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 187 5

4 meal trays

POINTS • Photographs of ffoods. • Learning L i about b t balanced diet.

4 jokers

83


84


To discover... NEW

Lion Size Sequencing

P.119 NEW

Skills Development and Early Motor Activities

P

laying, handling, touching… These are all an essential part of children’s early development. Through these multiple activities, free or supervised, children get to develop their fine motor skills, as well as improve and coordinate their visual dexterity and body movement. Games allow children to exercise early learning skills. Designed for use in groups, our products are all intended to awaken children’s senses and develop their imagination, thereby allowing them to progress through discovery.

Sensory Skills Development Early Discoveries

p. 86

Fine Motor Skills

Logic puzzle - Numbers

P.129

Move

p. 92

Slide on, Stack up, Screw

p. 94

Lacing

p. 98

Button, Lace up, Attach

p. 100

Magnetic Activities

p. 102

Construction Construction Games

p. 104

Jigsaws and Puzzles NEW

Early Lift-out Puzzles

p. 114

Body Discovery Cut-outs

p. 116

Discovery Lift-out Puzzles

p. 117

3-D Cut-outs

p. 120

Fit Inside

p. 122

Wooden Puzzles

p. 123

Early Learning Lacing Set – Goldilocks and the 3 Bears

Mosaics and Tiling

p. 130

Early Learning Sets

p. 134

P.135 85


Sensory Skills Development

Early Discoveries 1 round cushion and 8 security toys

The soft toys can be stored in the back of the cushion. Symbolising separation: appearing and disappearing.

Comforter Cushion This round cushion contains 8 security toys that little ones will enjoy discovering. They are very simple, attractive shapes that are very easy to hold for little hands. All the toys go in a pocket at the back of the cushion and children can play at hiding and finding them again. • A padded fabric cushion with opening, 7 fabric animals and 1 house. • Ø cushion: 40 cm. • H. body of zebra: 18 cm. • Fabric washable at 30°C. 313 309 399 377 9

EW

3 MONTHS +

Sensory Book Fabric book with sensory effects on each page: rustling sheets of paper, raised materials and embroidered decoration. The book closes with a Velcro® attachment and can be hung up with a fabric loop. • 4 pages in cotton and cotton velvet. • Machine washable at 30°C. • L/W: 14 x 14 cm. 313 309 399 475 2

Musical Bear

Noise-Making Fabric Rattles

1 hanging musical soft toy.

2 fabric rattles. 1 sound made by pressing on the body.

• Cotton and velvet cotton; surface washable. • L/H: 12 x 18 cm. 313 309 399 444 8

• Cotton and velvet cotton; washable at 30°C. • H/Ø: 19 x 4 cm. • Set of 2. 313 309 399 443 1

12 MONTHS + 4 MONTHS +

86

Basket

Ding-Dong Ball

Key Teething Rattle

Soft ball in coloured fabric, pleasant to the touch. Contains a small bell.

4 large keys to chew on.

• Flannel fabric washable at 30°C. • Ø: 17 cm. 313 309 399 446 2

• Plastic. • H. key: 10 cm. • Ø ring: 7 cm. 313 309 399 395 3

Quilted cotton basket for holding a doll and toys. Easy to fill, empty and transport with 2 handles. • Washable at 30°C. • L/W/H: 39 x 25.5 x 13 cm. 313 309 399 388 5


Sensory Skills Development

Easy to move

A

3 MONTHS +

A Wooden Babygym

To stimulate the baby’s senses, a wooden mobile that is stable, easy to transport and modular. 7 openings to suspend any mobile or toy at different heights. Activities can thus be varied, and can change along with the baby’s pace and curiosity. The complete set includes 1 wooden mobile and 3 nature mobiles. • Velcro® fastener. • L/H mobile: 93 x 59 cm. L/H of opening: 65 x 47 cm. • Mobiles washable at 30°C. 313 309 399 325 0

B

Dring Scratch, scratch

3 MONTHS +

Nest Baby Cushion A large, soft cushion for babies and for older infants to curl up comfortably. The fabric is very comfortable and pleasant to the touch, and is also waterproof. • Interior padding covered in waterproof fabric. • Exterior cover in cotton velvet, attached using elastic. • Machine washable at 30°C. • Green and blue, orange interior. • Ø: 80 cm. • H: 18 cm. 313 309 372 881 4

Detachable

B Nature Activities

POINT

3 fabric modules which are deliberately plain so as not to overstimulate with excessive colouring and noise. The butterfly’s wings are in a fabric that gently rustles; the flower’s little bell tinkles. • L. fastener: 22 cm. • Washable at 30°C. • Velcro® fasteners mean they can be attached to any other structure. 313 309 399 345 8

Elasticated covering very easy to remove!

Spare Cover 313 309 372 889 0

EW

Bear Musical Mobile Musical mobile to help babies go to sleep with its gentle, calming music. • Mechanical music box with a start/stop button. • 10 fabric shapes, machine-washable at 30°C. • L of arch: 52 cm; H/W of bear: 15 x 14 cm. • Mobile assembly required. 313 309 399 469 1

87


Very stable due to its cross shape.

18 MONTHS +

Peek-a-boo Structure Game played on the floor, made up of 4 wooden boards. Each board has 3 small windows (making a total of 12, with sets of mirrors and illustrations). 6 different closing systems are available. Cross design for good stability. 4 children can play together. • In varnished wood. • L/W/H: 70 x 70 x 65 cm. 313 309 345 105 7

6 endearing illustrations that encourage children to speak

4 handles allow easy movement

65 cm

Sensory Skills Development

POINT

6 closure systems to develop fine motor skills

4 different angles

Encourages interaction and communication

Windows that open and close

Peek-a-boo game

POINT Hard-wearing and quiet.

88

Pull Along Penguin

Pull Along Elephant

Made from one piece, this toy is hard-wearing and waddles forward when pulled by its string. Rubberised wheels to reduce noise. Easy to hold.

Made from one piece, this toy is hard-wearing and nods back and forth at the same pace as the child is walking. Rubberised wheels to reduce noise. Easy to hold.

• In varnished wood. • H.: 12.5 cm. 313 309 399 380 9

• In varnished wood. • H.: 12.5 cm. 313 309 399 381 6

Pull Along Dog This little dog waddles along, waggling its head and tail as it moves. • Plastic. • L/W: 25 x 14 cm. 313 309 399 383 0


D i s c o v e r i e s

Sensory Skills Development

E a r l y

Manipano front view

Flick through the book

Working gears and ringing button

Look in the mirror

Make slide and turn the failling star

12 MONTHS +

Manipano Fun activities for developing young children’s dexterity and fine motor skills. Cogs to turn; a mirror to discover; bells to ring; wheels to spin. Play peek-a-boo through the little door. Manipano can be placed on the floor in two different positions so that the different activities can be accessed whilst the toddler is sitting or standing. Its unique shape and design gives it a high degree of stability. • In varnished wood, comprising 10 activities. • H/W: 55.5 x 45.5 cm. 313 309 345 100 2 Manipano back view

89


Sensory Skills Development

EW

12 MONTHS +

12 MONTHS +

Muscle Car

Pick-up Truck

Lightweight car that is easy to roll due to its handle. The rubber wheels are silent.

Truck with easy handling due to its handle. Loading hatch opens and closes. Silent rubber wheels.

• Plastic. • L/W/H: 15 x 9 x 9 cm. 313 309 398 356 5

• Plastic. • L/W/H: 17 x 10 x 10 cm. 313 309 398 357 2

18 MONTHS + 12 MONTHS +

Roller Animals 4 animals that children will love to play with! Pull the animal backwards, let go and it shoots across the floor. Develops young children’s motor skills by encouraging them to chase the animals. • Plastic. • L/H: 9 x 10 cm.

90

Maxi Stacking Cups 10 wide round cups. Plastic stacking cups in bright colours with or without pictures, in ten sizes. Each cup has a different picture.

313 309 399 364 9

• Ø biggest: 13.5 cm. • Ø smallest: 4.5 cm. 313 309 399 187 4

Apple Hammer Toy

Plastic Shape Box

4 happy caterpillars to hit into the apple using either a toy hammer or the child’s own hands. As soon as one caterpillar disappears, another immediately re-appears.

6 pieces in 3 different geometric shapes, 1 colour per shape.The big key attached to the door enables children to unlock the box to get to the pieces, and then lock it again to carry on with the game. Fixed lid.

• Plastic. • H/Ø: 12 x 18 cm. 313 309 399 392 2

• Plastic. • L/W/H: 13 x 13 x 12 cm. 313 309 399 389 2


• 4 panels, 4 actions, 4 sensory objectives: touch, fine motor skills, sight and hearing. • These panels allow for experimentation and stimulate children’s imaginations. • The wall mounting kit is sold separately.

Early Discoveries

Mounting Kit This kit allows you to mount Manipano products on the wall or on Activity Units. 313 309 373 226 2

Visual

Tactile

Moving the handle makes two different visual effects appear.

3 different materials to discover.

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 196 6

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 198 0

Audio

Gestural

The two wheels turn to produce two different sounds.

Spiral path for experiencing circular movement.

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 197 3

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 199 7

Sensory Skills Development

Manipano Activity Panels

91


Fine Motor Skills

Move • Prepare children for drawing by developing motor control of the wrist. • Develop hand-eye coordination. • Develop observation, spatial awareness and visual discrimination.

POINT Progressive difficulty levels.

3 YEARS + 12 model sheets

Wooden Maze This game for toddlers develops the flexibility of their movements, stimulates their hand-eye coordination, and facilitates their recognition of colours and calculations. They each invent their own circuit or follow the proposed model sheets. • 5 colours in varnished wood. • Comes with 12 model sheets. • L/W/H: 29 x 29 x 7 cm. 313 309 333 186 1

MAGNETIC

PIECES

Magnetic Floral Frame Using a magnetic pencil, children learn to direct a ballpoint pen. Coordination Ballpoint and fine motor skills exercise. This pencil game also helps children to recognise colours and start learning how to count. • In wood, with a plastic covering. • Base L/W/thickness: 29 x 29 x 1.5 cm. 313 309 337 224 6 Magnetic balls

POINT Motivational games for 1 or 2 children.

MAGNETIC

3 YEARS + PIECES

Magnetic Maze 1 or 2 children move the magnetic balls using the 2 pencils. They choose a route to reach the final target. They learn to associate their movements with the observed path.

92

• In wood, with a plastic covering. • L/W/D base: 39 x 34 x 2 cm. 313 309 337 216 1

2 pencils Magnetic balls


Fine Motor Skills

Tracing Stencils • An original way to practise tracing the basic shapes used in writing. • The child follows each stencil route without lifting the pencil and takes into account the direction of the writing. • The child progressively gains familiarity, fluidity and control of their movements. • An adult can correct a position, how the pencil is being held and the direction of tracing. • In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 35 x 10 x 1.5 cm. • L/Ø pencil: 8 x 1 cm.

The pencil stores away in the base

Start on the left

Diagonals 313 309 375 204 8

Bridges

Crenels

313 309 375 207 9

313 309 375 206 2

Loops

Waves

313 309 375 208 6

313 309 375 205 5

Bead Frame House 2 YEARS +

The Clown

Children slide the pieces through doors and windows. Each piece has a different shape and colour.

• H. wire trajectory: 35 cm. • Ø/D base: 21 x 2 cm. 313 309 375 086 0

• L/H: 29 x 29 cm. • Thickness piece: 1.2 cm. 313 309 375 127 0

93


Fine Motor Skills

Slide on, Stack up, Screw

2 bases

SEE ALSO

20 pieces

Abacolor Set p. 134 2 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Abacolor 4 plastic shapes in 4 colours, to be stacked on abacuses consisting of 4 rods of different lengths. The pieces are light, large and easy to handle. • 2 bases and 20 plastic sharpes. • L/W/thick. of abacus: 21 x 6.5 x 2.2 cm. • H of rod: 14 cm. • Ø of shape: 4.5 cm. • Set of 2 plastic abacuses and 20 plastic pieces in 4 shapes and 4 colours. 313 309 304 999 5

4 shapes, 4 colours

Ø 4.5 cm

2 YEARS +

Manipuloo Large, colourful and durable pieces to develop the dexterity of young children. • Abstract shapes and 4 different colours to stimulate the imagination. • All-plastic pieces. • Pin H: 18.2 cm. • Piece L: 5 to 13 cm. • Piece thickness: 1.2 cm. • Screw-on piece diam.: 4 cm.

20 PIECES

Manipuloo

94

30 PIECES

Large Manipuloo

The set comprises 20 pieces: 16 pieces in 4 shapes and 4 colours, 2 single pins, 2 screw-on pieces.

The set comprises 30 pieces in hard plastic: 20 slide-on pieces (5 shapes), 6 screw-on pieces and 4 pins (2 individual pins, 2 bases with 2 pins).

313 309 375 167 6

313 309 375 067 9


Fine Motor Skills

Triolo • • • •

The figurative shapes stimulate the imagination. Large-size, easy-to-hold pieces, pleasant to the touch. Vertical activity surface. Individual or workshop activity.

24 pieces 4 shapes and 3 colours

2 YEARS +

Triolo The basic set includes large objects in 4 different shapes and 3 different colours for the children to slide onto a base with 3 pins. For free-play activities or as an addition to Triolo Workshop.

2 3-pin bases

• 2 bases, 24 plastic objects (4 shapes and 3 colours). • L/W/D base: 19 x 6.5 x 1.5 cm. • H/Ø pin: 14 x 2 cm. • H. cone: 5.5 cm. • Ø base: 6 cm. 313 309 375 091 4

48 pieces 4 shapes and 3 colours

3 YEARS +

Triolo Set

20 workcards

20 workcards

Front/ Back

This workshop is designed as an activity for children to arrange objects vertically. The materials include large objects of 4 different shapes and 3 different colours for the children to slide onto a base with 3 pins. The simple, coloured shapes of the pieces have a pleasant texture and are easy to grip for young children. They can be arranged in any way and therefore foster the development of their imagination. The 20 workcards of increasing difficulty are a means of introducing children to reading and recreating a model. • 4 bases (L/W/D: 19 x 6.5 x 1.5 cm) • H/Ø pin: 14 x 2 cm. • H. cone: 5.5 cm. • Ø base: 6 cm. • The box contains: 4 bases, 48 plastic objects and 20 double-sided strong cardboard workcards (23 x 16.5 cm). 313 309 375 092 1

POINTS 4 bases

• Workshop for 4 or 6 children. • Introduction I t d ti to t reading and reproducing a model.

95


Fine Motor Skills 3 YEARS +

Bolt Tree

2 YEARS +

A solid wooden tree with different sized branches, 10 varnished wooden balls in assorted colours and 4 mushrooms. Not suitable for children under 36 months.

Screw-on Ladybird

• H: 24 cm. • Ø ball: 3 cm. • Ø/D base: 15 x 2 cm. 313 309 375 002 0

• L/W/D base: 20 x 18 x 1.5 cm. • Ø screw: 3.3 cm. • H. feet: 2 cm. 313 309 375 073 0

Wooden base representing a ladybird containing 6 black screws.

EW

My First Workbench To hammer, screw, turn... A robust, stable workbench. Can be placed on the floor or on a table. It is equipped with a tray to store the tools.

15 cm

23 cm

8 cm

• Workbench and 15 wooden tools: screws, nuts and bolts, hammer, screwdriver, spanner, strips in various sizes. • L/W/H: 26 x 12 x 17cm. 313 309 399 441 7

4 YEARS +

Wooden Construction Set 104 varnished and coloured wooden pieces (slats, cubes, nuts, screws, silent wheels, 1 screwdriver, 1 spanner) for making representative shapes or technical creations. To introduce technology. Supplied in a storage barrel. • 104 varnished wooden pieces. • L of slats: 11/15/19 and 23 cm. • L of screw: 3.5/4.2/6.7 and 8.4 cm. • Ø wheel: 8 cm. • Cube edge: 3.5 cm. • H of spanner and screwdriver: 15 cm. 313 309 398 358 9

96

2 YEARS +

64 PIECES

Maxibolts 32 nuts and 32 bolts in 4 shapes, 4 colours and 4 diameters. • Ø bolt: 2.7/2.3/2.1/1.7 cm. • H.: 6 cm. • W. nut: 4.8/4.5/4 cm. • Set of 64 pieces. 313 309 303 029 0


o n ,

S t a c k

u p ,

S c r e w

EW

2 YEARS +

12 PIECES

Maxi Fishes - Set of 12 12 large fish in 4 different colours to be assembled by linking them together in a chain. Easy for small hands to handle.

Fine Motor Skills

S l i d e

• Plastic. • L/W: 12 x 9 cm. 313 309 342 268 2

2 YEARS +

60 PIECES

Chain Links 60 chain links in 4 different colours, to be assembled by clipping them together. • Plastic. • L/W: 6.3 x 4.2 cm. 313 309 399 357 1

POINT

16 PIECES

Pleasant to touuch raised pieces pieces.

Tactibeads Different sized beads with end-pieces that young children can easily fit together to make a necklace. • L/Ø: 8.6 x 5 cm. • 16 plastic beads. 313 309 399 263 5

24 PIECES

Maxi-Chains 24 big open chains to make a long string. Easy for small hands to handle. • Plastic. • Piece L/W: 14 x 8 cm. 313 309 399 267 3

97


Fine Motor Skills

Lacing • Develop dexterity and concentration. • Wide variety of easy-to-use materials for free or supervised activities. • Many possible further activities: sorting, categorising, language, etc.

EW 2 YEARS +

Sensory Baby Beads 10 beads with different raised patterns for threading onto 1 lace consisting of 4 rods that snap together. For learning early threading movements and developing the sense of touch and hand-eye coordination. • 10 beads and 1 lace consisting of 4 plastic rods. • Ø bead: 4.5 cm; Ø bead hole: 0.75 cm; L of lace: 73 cm. 313 309 315 060 8

18 MONTHS +

Babybeads 48 plastic beads in 4 shapes and 4 different colours.

4.5 cm

• Edge of cube: 3.5 cm. • Ø sphere: 4.5 cm. 313 309 315 000 4

3 YEARS +

Anilacing 12.5 cm

8 animals in 4 assorted colours. Comes with 9 laces in 3 colours. • H. animal: 12.5 cm. • L. lace: 50 cm. 313 309 333 122 9

POINT Easy to handlee.

2 YEARS +

Animal Lacing Funny lace-up animals. Includes 4 animals and 4 laces. • In varnished wood. • L/W/D cow: 15.5 x 9 x 1 cm. • L. lace: 1.16 m. 313 309 333 302 5

98

15.5 cm


2 YEARS +

Fine Motor Skills

EW

4 laces 16 model sheets

4 CHILDREN 16 figures in varnished wood

Lacing Shapes - Goldilocks and the 3 Bears For free exploration of a story that is well known to children. The large wooden figures are stable and easy to handle. The laces have long plasticcoated ends to make threading easier. • 13 figures in varnished wood and 4 laces. • H of figures: 6.3 and 6.8 cm; thickness: 1.5 cm. • L of lace: 70 cm. 313 309 375 145 4

Lacing Shapes - Little Red Riding Hood For free exploration of a story that is well known to children. The large wooden figures are stable and easy to handle. The laces have long plasticcoated ends to make threading easier. • 13 figures in varnished wood and 4 laces. • H of figures: 5.7 and 7 cm; thickness: 1.5 cm. • L of lace: 70 cm.

16 figures in varnished wood

313 309 375 147 8

POINTS • The pieces stay upright. • Wooden end-pieces make threading together easy.

4 laces 16 model sheets

Lace-up Shapes 12 shapes in bright colours (wooden). Large pieces, easy to handle, very stable. The lace has a wooden “needle” on the end to help threading.

Lace-up Village • L/W/D character: 7 x 6.5 x 2 cm. • 1 lace: 80 cm. 313 309 399 378 6

Lace-up Farm • L/W/D tractor: 7 x 6.5 x 2 cm. • 1 lace: 80 cm. 313 309 399 379 3

99


Fine Motor Skills

Button, Lace up, Attach Fabrics • • • •

Encourage handling of endearing objects. Promote exploration of the senses. Develop dexterity. Washable at 30°C.

2 YEARS +

Actidolls Large dolls to help develop children’s fine motor skills. Clothing has different fastening systems (press studs, Velcro®, buttons, laces, zips, three kinds of belt buckle and braces). Each doll is dressed in three different styles of clothing: for girl dolls, blouse, dress and bonnet; for boy dolls, shirt, dungarees and jacket. The dolls’ bodies are made of soft velvet.

Actidoll Girl 313 309 375 107 2

• H. doll: 62 cm.

Actidoll Boy Giant-size dolls: 62 cm

313 309 375 108 9

2 YEARS +

Russian Dolls Cilou Zelkine

These 6 padded cotton dolls of different sizes fit inside each other. They open and close with different attachments (buckles, Velcro®, zip, laces, buttons).

Pouches for putting dolls to bed or taking them for a walk

• H. large doll: 34.5 cm. • H. small doll: 10 cm. 313 309 375 098 3 34.5 cm

POINT Free standing.

100

6 dolls in increasing sizes


Fine Motor Skills

Satin

Velvet

15 MONTHS +

Tactile Imps These 8 little imps in 8 different materials, pleasant to the touch, are stored in a big basket. Each character’s sleeper and bonnet are made in the same fabric. Differences in touch (smooth, rough, soft, flexible, etc.) encourage the child with sensory exploring. The bonnet is attached to the head, and the eyes are embroidered. The complete collection includes: 8 imps and 8 outfits in different materials (cotton, satin, velvet, wool, linen, etc.) and 1 quilted cotton basket with 2 handles.

Cotton

26 cm

• H. imp: 26 cm. • L/W/H basket: 30 x 21 x 14 cm. 313 309 399 346 5

How is Acticroco put together?

Zip fastening

Buttons

Loops to hook

Loops to clip on

Velcro®

76 cm

2 YEARS +

Acticroco To develop toddlers’ fine motor skills, a friendly and lovable crocodile to put together. Divided into 5 pieces, its padded fabric body has various attachment systems that the child has to assemble, each one requiring a different movement. • L. crocodile: 76 cm. 313 309 375 078 5

101


Fine Motor Skills

Magnetic Activities Magnetic Petipano • • • •

Handle objects vertically. Develop fine motor skills. Coordinate both hands. Removable base.

Front/ back

Front/ back

MAGNETIC 2 YEARS + PIECES

MAGNETIC 2 YEARS + PIECES

Savannah Fun

Let’s Eat!

To bring the savannah to life, 3 animals in 3 parts, can be combined and positioned in the scene.

The child lays the table and creates a meal using the cutlery and the food on the back of the panel.

• The set consists of a panel, a base and 9 pieces. • In varnished, screen-printed wood. • Panel H/W/thickness: 27.5 x 19.5 x 0.5 cm. 313 309 375 203 1

• The set consists of a panel, a base and 9 pieces. • In varnished, screen-printed wood. • Panel H/W/thickness: 27.5 x 19.5 x 0.5 cm. 313 309 375 202 4

MAGNETIC 2 YEARS + PIECES

POINTS

Bob and Lisa Get Dressed

• Vertical magneetic panel. • FFor di discovering i the human body.

To discover the human body, 2 children to dress in different clothes. Illustration of unclothed character on one side and clothes for each part of the body on the other. The board and pieces are magnetic.

Front/ Back

102

Front/ Back

Bob Gets Dressed

Lisa Gets Dressed

• In magnetic wood. • L/W board: 27 x 19.5 cm. • H/W T-shirt: 6.5 x 7 cm. • The complete set includes: 1 board on a removable base and 9 wooden pieces representing items of clothing. 313 309 375 200 0

• In magnetic wood. • L/W board: 27 x 19.5 cm. • H. dress: 10.5 cm. • The complete set includes: 1 board on a removable base and 9 wooden pieces representing items of clothing. 313 309 375 201 7


Fine Motor Skills

56 cm

40 cm

30 cm

47 cm

MAGNETIC 2 YEARS + PIECES

2 Magnetic Boards Set of 2 boards sold without pieces. 313 309 375 125 6

MAGNETIC

3 YEARS +

PIECES

Weather for Children

MAGNETIC

2 YEARS + PIECES

An amusing, attractive resource to introduce the weather and foster awareness of the concept of the passage of time. The children are invited to: - observe the weather; - use the roulette wheel and symbol counters to make a weather forecast; - dress Little Bear to suit the forecast. Using a practical, everyday situation, they gradually acquire the appropriate vocabulary (weather vocabulary, the language of clothes and the seasons) and are introduced to the concept of chronology (yesterday, today, tomorrow).

38

• The complete set includes: 1 magnetic panel (56 x 40 cm) with 2 mounting eyelets ; 24 clothing pieces ; 24 weather counters ; 4 season counters ; 4 arrows ; 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 305 164 6

PIECES

Magnetic Board and Pieces A board with wooden geometric magnetic shapes for creating drawings and mosaics. • L/W/D board: 47 x 30 x 1 cm; L/W large rectangle: 10 x 2.5 cm. • The game comprises: 1 magnetic board and 38 magnetic pieces (9 shapes, 4 colours). 313 309 375 076 1

EW MAGNETIC

2 YEARS + PIECES

Magnetic Erasable Whiteboards MAGNETIC

Whiteboards that can be written on and/or have magnetic items put on them. For everyday classroom activities. For use with felt tip pens that are erasable with water.

PIECES

Magnetic Storage Pocket Pocket is attached to a metal surface and used to store small items. In transparent plastic with a gusset for easy access.

• Plastic and metal. • L/W: 33 x 24 cm. • Set of 6.

• Magnetic pocket in transparent plastic. • L/W: 24 x 20 cm. 313 309 388 064 2

MAGNETIC 3 YEARS + PIECES

38 PIECES

313 309 375 149 2

2 YEARS +

40 PIECES

2 YEARS +

40 PIECES

Farm Magnets

Extra Basic Magnetic Shapes

Extra Magnetic Shapes

38 wooden magnetic pieces.

40 wooden magnetic pieces.

For children to create their own story, 40 wooden magnetic pieces (20 different duplicated objects) with a farm theme. Can be placed on any metal object.

• 9 shapes, 4 colours. 313 309 375 097 6

• 10 shapes, 4 colours. 313 309 375 077 8

• H. farmer’s wife: 5 cm. 313 309 375 124 9

103


Construction

Construction Games • Promote creativity, concentration and fine motor skills. • A wide variety of shapes, colours, materials and modes of assembly. • Lots of pieces for group games.

EW 25 cm

MAGNETIC

2 YEARS + PIECES

Magnetic Animals A fun activity where children reconstitute a giraffe, an elephant, a horse or a cow. Each plastic animal comprises 4 magnetic parts (head, body, front legs, hind legs). The children can mix up the different parts using their imagination to create wonderfully strange and funny animals. • 16 magnetic plastic pieces. • L/W/H horse: 17 x 5 x 14.5 cm. 313 309 333 360 5

POINT Invisible magnets inserted in wood. 2 YEARS +

Piezas intercambiables para crear animales insólitos

MAGNETIC

PIECES

Country Animagnets 5 animals familiar to children, split into 2 separate magnetic parts. Children can create imaginary animals as each animal body is the same size. • H/D: 8 x 1.8 cm. • 5 wooden pieces. 313 309 375 123 2

POINT Invisible magnets inserted in wood.

MAGNETIC 2 YEARS + PIECES

12 PIECES

Magnetic Characters

SEE ALSO 104

Cut-up magnetic fruits p. 149

These thick wooden coloured pieces can be easily stacked up to create different characters. The pieces attract and repel each other. This game introduces children to the basics of magnetism. • Average Ø/D: 5 x 2 cm. • 12 wooden pieces. 313 309 399 387 8


12 model sheets

25 pieces, 5 shapes, 5 colours

Construction

EW

3 YEARS +

Equiliwood A balancing game for building a tower with five levels, from the child’s imagination or based on the model sheets. The game develops dexterity, recognition and matching of shapes and colours, and spatial awareness, and introduces children to reading instructions. • Ø/thickness of support: 11.4 x 0.8 cm. • Side of square piece: 2.8 cm. • L/W of model sheet: 9 x 9 cm. • The set includes: 25 pieces in varnished wood (5 shapes, 5 colours), 5 supports and 12 thick cardboard model sheets. 313 309 399 442 4

48 model cards

3 YEARS +

22 wooden pieces, 9 shapes, 6 colours

Geoblocks A wooden construction game consisting of colourful wooden semi-circles for creating different figures, flat or 3D. They can be created from the imagination or taking inspiration from the model cards, in increasing levels of difficulty, which suggest a variety of representative and abstract shapes. • L/W/H large semi-circle: 18.8 x 9.3 x 2 cm. • L/W/H small semi-circle: 3.4 x 1.7 x 2 cm. • L/W of model card: 11.5 x 8.5 cm. • The set includes: 22 wooden blocks in 9 shapes and 6 colours, and 48 model cards with the front in colour and the back in black and white. 313 309 333 325 4

MAGNETIC 3 YEARS + PIECES

68 PIECES

Magnetic Blocks Magnetic pieces in different shapes to build cars, animals or characters. The pieces are very easy to handle. • 68 pieces in magnetic wood. • Cube side: 3 cm. 313 309 333 303 2

105


Construction

12

2 YEARS +

cm

58 PIECES

Flexible Animal Bricks Bricks for building a farm, a zoo or a house. 6 animals complete creations and bring them to life. • L/W/H large brick: 12 x 6 x 5 cm. • L/H zebra: 10.5 x 7.5 cm. • 58 pieces: 52 flexible plastic bricks in 4 sizes and 4 colours and 6 animals.

313 309 333 422 0

2 YEARS +

30 PIECES

Flexible Train Bricks A train comprising bricks, wagons and travellers.

6 cm

• L/W/H wagon: 16 x 10 x 5 cm. • 30 flexible plastic pieces. 313 309 333 423 7

2 YEARS +

100 PIECES

Maxibricks 100 semi-rigid plastic bricks in 4 sizes and 4 colours for making large constructions. The wheels can be used to make mobile creations such as a lorry, tractor, etc. The bricks fit together very easily. • L/W/H large brick: 12 x 6 x 6 cm. • Ø wheel: 6 cm.

106

313 309 333 424 4


2 YEARS +

G a m e s

Construction

C o n s t r u c t i o n

120 PIECES

Pingrip A variety of shapes and bright colours for building static or mobile objects by simply snapping pieces together with grip pins. Comes with 4 figures. • Edge square: 5 cm; Ø wheel: 4 cm. • Set of 120 pieces. 313 309 333 135 9

EW

.5

12

12.5

cm

cm

25 cm

12.5

cm

30

2 YEARS +

PIECES

Giant Bricks 30 large, very lightweight solid bricks in semi-rigid plastic that are easy to snap together. For building stable constructions or imaginative paths. The set comes with 2 sizes and 4 colours to match. For use indoors or outdoors. • Semi-rigid plastic. • L/W/H of large brick: 25 x 12.5 x 8 cm (blue and green; weight: 260 g). • L/W/H of small brick: 12.5 x 12.5 x 8 cm (red and yellow; weight: 135 g). 313 309 333 425 1

Lightweight bricks for quiet play

3 YEARS +

36 PIECES

Batibriques 36 bricks in tough cardboard to build and re-build all sorts of constructions. These very light, solid bricks can support the weight of a child. The set comes with 3 sizes and 3 colours. • L/W/H: 4 of 30 x 15 x 7.5 cm; 8 of 15 x 15 x 7.5 cm; 24 of 15 x 7.5 x 7.5 cm. • Delivered unassembled, with assembly instructions. 313 309 333 294 3

36 solid, hard-wearing bricks

107


Construction

2 sizes, 4 colours

MAGNETIC

3 YEARS + PIECES

120 PIECES

Constructamagnet A collection of pieces based on rods and magnetic balls that enables experimentation with magnetism through play. The child produces 3D constructions. The game is made up of rods of 2 sizes and spheres. • L. rods: 8.5 and 5 cm. • Ø sphere: 3.6 cm. • 120 magnetic plastic pieces. 313 309 333 256 1

MAGNETIC

2 YEARS + PIECES

59 PIECES

Magnetico Set of 59 parts, fully magnetic. This fun game gives children the ability to build many different things - easy to use with no risk of doing it wrong. Magnetic blocks integrated in the material provide game safety. • L/W/thickness rectangle: 8 x 2.5 x 1.7 cm. • 59 magnetic pieces, including 4 characters and 4 vehicles. 313 309 333 312 4

3 YEARS +

Magnetico Cards 12 double-sided photo cards. On one side of the card is a photo of the object to build and the parts to use; on the other side are the 6 assembly steps. 12 models separated into 3 sets to help children start reading images. Models that can be made with the Magnetico set (59 pieces). Front/Back

108

• L/W card: 29.7 x 21 cm. 313 309 333 311 7


Front/ Back

4 YEARS +

Construction

12 model cards

134 PIECES

Poly-M® 134 pieces (bars, sockets, bolts, wheels, tubes). A wide variety of flexible plastic shapes to stimulate the child’s imagination.

4 YEARS +

• L. bar: 20/13/9/5.5/3.5 cm. • H. character: 7 cm. 313 309 305 149 3

Poly-M® Cards 12 model cards with photos. On one side of the card is a photo of the object to create with the parts used, on the other side are the 6 assembly steps.

Poly-M® Add-on

• Card models created with Poly-M Nathan®. • L/W card: 29.7 x 21 cm. 313 309 305 143 1

71 pieces. 313 309 305 148 6

4 shapes identified by a different colour

3 YEARS +

90 PIECES

Tubulo Assembly game for creating a wide variety of original constructions. The tubes, in 4 different shapes (straight, cross, curved, and T-shaped), fit easily into each other. • 4 shapes and 4 colours. • L/Ø straight tube: 8 x 2.6 cm. • 90 plastic pieces. 313 309 399 213 0

2 YEARS +

86 PIECES

Babyconnect Various different shapes that are easy to fit together to make weird and wonderful creations. • 86 plastic pieces in 4 shapes and 6 colours. • Star shape L: 6.5 cm. 313 309 333 296 7

109


Construction

4 YEARS + 600 pieces, 2 shapes, 6 colours

12 model cards Front/Back

Mini Bricks 600 hard plastic bricks (6 sizes, 6 colours) allow children to build all sorts of different things. They can also use model cards. These cards show the model to be built and, on the back, the pieces to use, with instructions numbered 1 to 9. A poster suggests another 29 models. • The set includes: 600 hard plastic bricks, 12 laminated model cards, 1 poster. • Supplied in a transparent plastic tray. • L/W/H large brick: 2.5 x 1.2 x 1.2 cm. • L/W card: 17 x 15 cm. 313 309 333 323 0

EW 3 YEARS +

Coulisso Construction game with 300 rigid plastic pieces for the development of creativity, fine motor skills and logic. The bricks are put together vertically or by sliding them together from the side. Children invent their own constructions or follow flat or 3D models suggested on the posters. • The set includes: 300 plastic pieces (square, triangle, wheel, axle, connecting parts); 6 colours. • 9 double-sided A3 posters. • L/H of square brick: 3.5 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 333 321 6

4 YEARS +

360 PIECES

Clics Construction game in plastic with 360 interlocking pieces that click together using a swivel-hinge principle enabling volumes to be created. • L/W block: 5 x 5 cm. • Comes in a transparent plastic bucket. • 360 pieces: red, yellow, green, black and transparent blocks, wheels and axles. 313 309 333 227 1

110


3 YEARS +

G a m e s

Construction

C o n s t r u c t i o n

324 PIECES

Bambouchi Cylindrical tubes to assemble using rosettes each with 8 branches. Assortment of 3 colours. • L/Ø: 2.5/15 x 0.6 cm. • Set of 324 pieces. 313 309 306 533 9

3 YEARS +

268 PIECES

Bambouchicolour Soft and flexible plastic rods used to make 3D models with curves. The rods are linked using a starshaped connecting piece. 268 plastic pieces (170 rods in 3 sizes, 3 colours and 98 connecting pieces). • L. rod: 15/10/5 cm. • Ø star: 3 cm. 313 309 306 535 3

Bambouchicolour Cards 12 model cards with photos. On one side of the card is a photo of the object to create with the parts used; on the other side are the 4 assembly steps. 12 simple and uncluttered models to help children start reading images. Models that can be made with Bambouchicolour. • L/W card: 29.7 x 21 cm. • 12 cards and 1 table summarising the models suggested. 313 309 305 163 9

Front/ Back

111


Construction

Construction Sets • Model cards develop self-sufficiency.

23.5

cm

Ø: 3 cm

2 YEARS +

161 PIECES

Technico Junior® An early building set specifically designed for toddlers enabling them to construct simple machines and creatures. • L/W 6-hole slat : 23.5 x 3.5 cm. • Ø nut: 3 cm. • 161 coloured pieces (slats with holes, screws, nuts and 1 spanner). 313 309 333 507 4

Extra Pieces for Technico Junior® 81 hard-wearing plastic pieces. 313 309 333 506 7

4 YEARS +

Technico Junior® Cards 12 model cards with photos. On one side of the card is a photo of the object to create with the parts used; on the other side are the 4 or 6 assembly steps. • L/W card: 29.7 x 21 cm. 313 309 305 147 9

EW

4 YEARS +

Wooden Construction Set 104 varnished and coloured wooden pieces (slats, cubes, nuts, screws, silent wheels, 1 screwdriver, 1 spanner) for making representative shapes or technical creations. To introduce technology. Supplied in a storage barrel. • 104 varnished wooden pieces. • L of slats: 11/15/19 and 23 cm. • L of screw: 3.5/4.2/6.7 and 8.4 cm. • Ø wheel: 8 cm. • Cube edge: 3.5 cm. • H of spanner and screwdriver: 15 cm. 313 309 398 358 9

112

2 YEARS +

My First Tool Kit Advanced development of motor skills. Imitate grown-ups with this battery-operated drill, spanner and screwdriver. Each tool box includes: 1 battery-operated drill with three interchangeable bits (for drilling or screwing), 1 spanner, 1 screwdriver, 3 bolts and 4 planks. • L. large plank: 11.5 cm. • Requires 2 x R6 1.5 volt batteries. 313 309 399 204 8


4 YEARS +

G a m e s

96 PIECES

Mobilo 96 pieces (cubes, panels, wheels). The pieces fit together to create mechanical, static or mobile constructions. In hard plastic. • Cube side: 3.5 cm. • L/W rectangle: 7.5 x 3.5 cm. 313 309 305 427 2

Construction

C o n s t r u c t i o n

Front/ Back

Extra Pieces for Mobilo-Nathan® 54 pieces in hard plastic: cubes, joints, parallelepipeds, wheels and heads. 313 309 305 422 7

4 YEARS +

Mobilo® Ethnic Heads

Mobilo Cards 12 model cards with photos. On one side of the card is a photo of the object to create with the parts used, on the other side are the 6 or 8 assembly steps.

8 heads to bring the Mobilo game to life. • H.: 4.5 and 3.5 cm. 313 309 305 402 9

• L/W card: 29.7 x 21 cm. 313 309 305 145 5

Front/ Back

4 YEARS +

95

4 YEARS +

PIECES

Gearwheels

Gearwheel Cards Ø: 6 cm

95 pieces (panels, cogwheels, connecting pieces). Coloured shapes in hard plastic to make simple mechanical gearwheels. • Panel side: 11.7 cm. • Ø wheel: 6 cm. 313 309 375 114 0

12 model cards with photos. On one side of the card is a photo of the object to create with the parts used, on the other side are the 6 or 8 assembly steps. • L/W card: 29.7 x 21 cm. 313 309 305 144 8

113


Jigsaws and Puzzles

Early Lift-out Puzzles 2 YEARS + • • • •

An introduction to colours, shapes, sizes and materials. Pleasant and easy to handle. Suitable and safety-compliant for children under 3. In high-quality varnished wood.

A big wooden button for easy handling

4

4

PIECES

PIECES

Easy handling

In My Garden 4 different animals. Once a piece has been removed, the main colour of the animal can be seen on the bottom of the base. Pieces overlapping the base holding up vertically. • Base size: 22 cm; thickness: 2 cm. • 4 pieces in varnished wood. 313 309 330 137 6

My Little Friends 4 contrasting animals with different graphic patterns. • Base size: 22 cm. • L/H cow: 9 x 5.5 cm. • 4 pieces. 313 309 330 136 9

Varnished wooden trays with 4 interlocking puzzle pieces. • L/W/D base: 24 x 24 x 1.5 cm. • L/D piece: 10 x 1.2 cm.

4

PIECES

Fruits 313 309 330 130 7

4

PIECES

Vehicles 313 309 330 131 4

Wooden Cut-outs 2 new cut-outs which develop fine motor skills thanks to the small gripping buttons. Made in screen-printed wood.

5

PIECES

Gardening • 5 wooden pieces. • 1 wooden base. • Base: 30 x 8 cm; thickness: 0.8 cm. 313 309 330 149 9

5

PIECES

Savannah

114

• 5 wooden pieces. • 1 wooden base. • Base: 30 x 8 cm; thickness: 0.8 cm. 313 309 332 027 8


Jigsaws and Puzzles

• 3 shapes and 1 varnished wooden base. • L/W/D base: 30 x 12 x 1.5 cm. • Ø circle: 8 cm. • Ø handle: 2.2 cm.

POINT Discover a diffe ferent picture under each sh shape!

3

PIECES

Babycolour 3 same-size coloured circles for lifting. Underneath: 3 animals in different colours. 313 309 330 095 9

3

PIECES

Babyshapes 3 different shapes. Underneath: 1 fish, 1 Indian and 1 mouse. 313 309 330 097 3

Babytactile Lift-out animal shapes for toddlers to discover different textures and arouse children’s curiosity and senses. 3 piece cut-out in varnished wood.

POINT Stimulate the sense of touch.

• L/W/D: 30 x 12 x 1.5 cm.

3

PIECES

Babytactile Farm Animals 313 309 330 098 0

3

PIECES

Babytactile Water Animals 313 309 330 134 5

115


19 cm

Puzzle on 2 levels

34 cm

Jigsaws and Puzzles

Body Discovery Cut-outs

22

3 YEARS +

PIECES

Body Discovery Puzzles For discovering the parts of the body, 22 puzzle pieces that fit on 2 levels.The different parts of the body underneath and the clothes on top. • In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 34 x 19 x 1 cm. • D. base: 0.4 cm.

Boy

Girl

313 309 332 717 8

313 309 332 716 1

SEE ALSO Photo Box - Clothing

p. 4

13

PIECES

Cut-outs - My Wardrobe A little girl to dress in seasonal clothes. Her image is printed on the base. She has three interchangeable outfits in her wardrobe. Each piece is equipped with a knob for the child to practise fine motor skills. • 13 pieces and a base of varnished wood. • Base L/W/H: 38 x 26 x 0.9 cm. 313 309 332 921 9

21 cm

POINT Thick pieces for an easy grip.

24

3 YEARS +

PIECES

My School Friends 4 puzzle boards representing 8 characters. On each board is a pair of friends of the same ethnic group. Each character is divided into 3 pieces. All the pieces can be fitted in all the trays. • In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 21 x 15 x 1 cm. • H. character: 13 cm.

116

313 309 330 204 5

15 cm

8 children of the world, boys and girls


Jigsaws and Puzzles

Discovery Lift-out Puzzles • Pieces of all sizes, large and small, to be assembled and slotted together. • Attractive, brightly-coloured illustrations encouraging language use. • Each cut-out comprises several stages. • Slots in each stage make handling the pieces easy. • Suitable for children under 3.

6

PIECES

9

PIECES

The Bedroom

The Haunted Castle

• 6 pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • L/W/thickness of base: 29 x 24 x 0.8 cm. 313 309 399 462 2

• 9 pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • L/W/thickness of base: 29 x 24 x 0.8 cm. 313 309 399 463 9

7

PIECES

8

PIECES

The Kitchen

The Ocean Liner

• 7 pieces and a base of varnished wood. • Base L/W/H: 29 x 24 x 0.8 cm 313 309 399 461 5

• 8 pieces and a base of varnished wood. • Base L/W/H: 29 x 24 x 0.8 cm. 313 309 399 460 8

6

PIECES

The Little House 6 cut-out shapes with large handles. • L/W/D base: 29.5 x 24.5 x 1 cm. • In varnished wood. 313 309 332 101 5

117


Jigsaws and Puzzles

Lifelike Fairy Tales 2 YEARS + • These cut-outs in stages depict traditional fairy tales in a little theatre-like setting. • Creative cut-outs for language development.

Snow White and the 7 Dwarves Characters, animals and decor bring to life the story of Snow White.

Depth of base for storage: 1.5 cm

• 10 varnished wood pieces. • L/W/D base: 32 x 25.5 x 1.5 cm. 313 309 332 915 8

Little Red Riding Hood The story of Little Red Riding Hood told in images on 4 levels. Each level relates to a key episode of the adventure. The puzzle is made up of 10 pieces, for free play and for placing in the 3 grooves. • 10 varnished wood pieces. • L/W/D base: 32 x 26 x 1.5 cm. 313 309 332 914 1

POINTS • Folds up. • Can be used to store 10 puzzles.

Puzzle Storage Rack A cleverly-designed, practical rack for storing puzzles and cut-out games of all sizes and shapes. Can be set on a table or any flat surface and folds up easily. Holds 10 puzzles. • Metal wire frame with red epoxy finish. • L/W/H: 48 x 28 x 22.5 cm. • Storage width: 41 cm. • H. between 2 wire shelves: 2 cm. • Delivered folded in 3.

118

313 309 372 834 0


Cut-outs - Size Sequencing 3 cut-outs consisting of 4 pieces with buttons to grip and 1 base in varnished wood. For discovering and comparing the sizes of animals. • 4 pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • 30 x 20 cm.

Crocodile Size Sequencing Length

Giraffe Size Sequencing - Height

Lion Size Sequencing

313 309 332 756 7

313 309 332 757 4

313 309 332 758 1

Jigsaws and Puzzles

EW

2 YEARS +

3 YEARS +

Matriochkas Stéphanie Charpiot-Desbenoit

5 dolls that fit into one another, from the smallest to the largest. Given their endearing shape and colour, dolls encourage an exchange of ideas and language. Each doll is split into 2 parts, except the smallest which is printed on the base. • 8 pieces in varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 21 x 15 x 2 cm. • H. large doll: 17 cm. 313 309 332 918 9

The Four Seasons Stéphanie Desbenoit-Charpiot 3 cut-out stages with 9 pieces (1st stage: 2 pieces; 2nd stage: 3 pieces; 3rd stage: 4 pieces). • In varnished wood. • Base L/W/H: 20 x 20 x 1.5 cm. 313 309 332 911 0

Who Ate Whom? Stéphanie Desbenoit-Charpiot 3 cut-out stages with 6 pieces (1st stage: 1 piece; 2nd stage: 2 pieces; 3rd stage: 3 pieces). • In varnished wood. • Base L/W/H: 20 x 20 x 1.5 cm. 313 309 332 912 7

119


Jigsaws and Puzzles

3-D Cut-outs Magnetic Cut-outs Games to introduce 3D construction. The magnetic pieces make assembly easy. All the pieces can be put away in the base.

7

PIECES

8

PIECES

The Sandwich The pieces are decorated on both sides, symmetrical and reversible.

The Tractor

• 7 magnetic pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • L/W/thick. of base: 27.5 x 19.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 180 5

• 8 magnetic pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • L/W/thick. of base: 27.5 x 19.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 181 2

The pieces are decorated on both sides.

Wooden Cut-outs 30 x 21 cm 4 YEARS +

Assembly instructions printed on the back

Laurent Schmitt

• Construction cut-outs to stimulate the imagination. • Introduction to reading assembly diagrams.

7

PIECES

Fire Engine • In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 0.8 cm. D. piece: 0.6 cm. 313 309 330 111 6

21 cm

8

PIECES

Aeroplane

120

• In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 0.8 cm. D. piece: 0.6 cm. 313 309 330 120 8

30 cm


Jigsaws and Puzzles

Wooden Cut-outs 40 x 30 cm

10

PIECES

Dustbin lorry

Figures are free standing

7 décor panels and 3 figures. • In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 40 x 30 x 1 cm. D. piece: 0.6 cm. 313 309 330 139 0

40 cm

30 cm

11

PIECES

The Farm 5 décor panels and 6 figures. • In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 40 x 30 x 1 cm. D. piece: 0.6 cm. 313 309 330 099 7

11

PIECES

Fortified Castle 7 décor panels and 4 figures. • In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 40 x 30 x 1 cm. D. piece: 0.6 cm. 313 309 330 114 7

121


40 cm

26

30 cm

Jigsaws and Puzzles

Fit Inside

PIECES

3 YEARS +

A, B, C For a first approach to the alphabet. Each piece is slightly raised for an easier grip. Varnished wood cut-out. • L/W/D base: 40 x 30 x 1 cm. • H Letter: 6 cm. 313 309 330 103 1

12 MONTHS +

Mini Stacking Tower 5 wooden rings for stacking in the right order, finishing with the head. • H: 15 cm. Ø small ring: 5 cm. 313 309 399 195 9

3 YEARS +

Puzzle Tray

Flower Puzzle

The child builds the black base composed of 4 sections, then slots the 18 different shapes into the correct shaped holes in the base.

The flower is built up by matching pieces of 3 colours and 6 different geometric shapes.

• 1 varnished natural wood tray, 18 varnished wood pieces in 9 shapes and 6 colours, 4 sections of black wood. • L/W/D base: 22.5 x 22.5 x 3 cm. • Ø/D shape: 5.5 x 2 cm. 313 309 399 197 3

Geo-Wood

Geo-Shapes

16 pieces in 4 shapes in different sizes and colours for interlocking and classifying on a square base.

16 hollowed pieces numbered from 1 to 4. 4 shapes and colours for threading onto rods.

• 1 varnished wood tray: L/W/D: 16 x 16 x 1.5 cm. • H. piece: 8/7/6/5 cm. 313 309 399 271 0

• 1 varnished wood tray: L/W/D: 17.5 x 17.5 x 1.5 cm. • Square: 6 x 6 cm. 313 309 399 272 7

Multi-Sided Shape Sorter

Plastic Shape Box

The 5 single shapes slot into the top of the box and the 4 double shapes slot into the sides. The cover lifts up to retrieve the pieces.

122

• 18 varnished wooden pieces. • Base L/W/thickness: 18.5 x 14.5 x 1.5 cm. • Piece L/W/thickness: 6 x 5 x 1 cm. 313 309 399 196 6

• 1 box in plain varnished wood. • 9 coloured wooden shapes. • L/W/D: 17 x 17 x 13 cm. 313 309 399 190 4

6 pieces in 3 different geometric shapes, 1 colour per shape. The big key attached to the door enables children to unlock the box to get to the pieces, and then lock it again to carry on with the game. Fixed lid. • Plastic. • L/W/H: 13 x 13 x 12 cm. 313 309 399 389 2


EW

15 cm

Jigsaws and Puzzles

Wooden Puzzles

3

PIECES

Pets 4 puzzles consisting of 3 pieces with real photos of animals. • Varnished wood. • Colour model printed on the wood. • L/W/D base: 19 x 15 x 1 cm.

19 cm

313 309 375 156 0

4

PIECES

A Day with Cajou 4 puzzles each with 4 pieces: A friendly little character who accompanies the child throughout the day: bedtime, school, mealtime and playtime. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 18 x 18 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 131 2

4

PIECES

Vegetables 4 puzzles each with 4 pieces: eggplant, tomato, pumpkin, peas. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 18 x 18 x 1 cm. • D. parts: 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 089 6

123


Jigsaws and Puzzles

6

PIECES

Animals 4 puzzles of 6 pieces: hippopotamus, crocodile, giraffe, penguin. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 18 x 18 x 1 cm. • D. parts: 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 005 6

6

PIECES

and 9

PIECES

My Day 4 puzzles with 6 and 9 pieces: mealtime, going to school, waking up, washing. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 23 x 18 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 004 9

6

PIECES

Colour Vehicles 4 puzzles: the dump truck, the tanker, the dustbin lorry and the tractor. • In varnished wood. • Model in black and white. • L/W/thick. of base: 23 x 18 x 1 cm. 313 309 386 898 5

6

PIECES

and 9

PIECES

Fairy Tales 1 4 puzzles based on traditional fairy tales: the Three Little Pigs, Goldilocks and the 3 Bears, Pinocchio and the Little Red Hen. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 23 x 18 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 151 0

124


9

PIECES

P u z z l e s

and 12

PIECES

Fairy Tales 2 4 puzzles based on traditional fairy tales: Snow White and the Seven Dwarves, the Three Little Pigs, Little Red Riding Hood and Goldilocks. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 152 7

Jigsaws and Puzzles

W o o d e n

15

PIECES

School Celebrations 4 puzzles: New Year’s celebrations, carnival, a birthday party and a Christmas party. • In varnished wood. • Model in black and white. • L/W/thick. of base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 332 028 5

18 and 24

PIECES

PIECES

Together at School 4 puzzles depicting regular events in the child’s day at school: break time, school lunch, PE and assembly. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 146 6

18 and 24

PIECES

PIECES

Fairy Tales 3 4 puzzles showing 4 traditional fairy tales: - Little Red Riding Hood, - The Wolf and the Seven Young Kids, - Sleeping Beauty, - Puss In Boots. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 153 4

125


Jigsaws and Puzzles

18 and 24

PIECES

PIECES

Means of Transport 4 puzzles on the theme of transport: port, railway station, road, airport. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 088 9

21 and 28

PIECES

PIECES

Animals of the world 4 puzzles on the theme of animals in their environment: ice floe, savannah, Amazonian forest and European mountains. • In varnished wood. • Black and white model. • Base L/W/thickness: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 332 026 1

24 and 35

PIECES

PIECES

The Street 4 puzzles each showing a different street scene: small town, worksite, pedestrian street and big city. Very realistic illustrations help develop attention to detail and language. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 154 1

24 and 35

PIECES

PIECES

Nature 4 puzzles with 24 and 35 pieces. Each contains the same characters, but in different settings: the mountains, the seaside, the woods and the countryside. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 133 6

126


P u z z l e s

Large Wooden Jigsaw Puzzles • Large-format puzzles from 35 to 72 pieces. • Encourage language and observation. • In high-quality, durable varnished wood, the illustrations are printed directly on the wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 42 x 32 x 1 cm.

EW

Camping 313 309 387 130 5

The Stadium 313 309 332 025 4

The Zoo 313 309 387 132 9

48

PIECES

56

PIECES

63

PIECES

Museum 313 309 386 900 5

Castle Life 313 309 387 000 1

Pirates 313 309 386 899 2

Jigsaws and Puzzles

W o o d e n

56

PIECES

63

PIECES

72

PIECES

127


Jigsaws and Puzzles

Straight-edged piece puzzles

4

PIECES

The Farmyard

The Bathroom

4 pieces, 1 base of varnished wood and 1 black and white model.

12 pieces, 1 base of varnished wood and 1 black and white model.

• Base L/W/thickness: 15 x 15 x 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 156 5

• Base L/W/thickness: 19 x 15 x 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 159 6

6

PIECES

16

PIECES

The Duck Pond

At the Doctor’s

6 pieces, 1 base of varnished wood and 1 black and white model.

16 pieces, 1 base of varnished wood and 1 black and white model.

• Base L/W/thickness: 15 x 15 x 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 157 2

• Base L/W/thickness: 19 x 15 x 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 160 2

8

PIECES

128

12

PIECES

24

PIECES

The Vegetable Garden

The Playground

8 pieces, 1 base of varnished wood and 1 black and white model.

24 pieces, 1 base of varnished wood and 1 black and white model.

• Base L/W/thickness: 19 x 15 x 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 155 8

• Base L/W/thickness: 19 x 15 x 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 158 9


P u z z l e s

Other puzzles Logic Puzzles Puzzles based on the principle of the double entry table.

EW

Logic Puzzle - Numbers Introducing the concepts of the numbers from 1 to 5: digits, fingers, dots and collections.

Logic Puzzle - Sizes

• 25 pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • Base L/W/thickness: 23.5 x 23.5 x 0.7 cm. • Piece L/W/thickness: 3.7 x 3.7 x 0.4 cm.

• 12 pieces and a base of varnished wood. • Base L/W/thickness: 21 x 21 x 0.7 cm. • Piece L/W/thickness: 4 x 5.3 x 0.4 cm.

313 309 387 170 1

313 309 387 161 9

Logic Puzzle - Geometric Shapes

Logic Puzzle - Spatial Recognition

Introducing the concepts of geometric shapes: circle, square, triangle and rectangle.

An entertaining puzzle to introduce the basic concepts of spatial awareness: in front of/behind/on/under.

• 16 pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • Base L/W/thickness: 21 x 21 x 0.7 cm. • Piece L/W/thickness: 4 x 4 x 0.4 cm.

• 16 pieces and a base of varnished wood. • Base L/W/thickness: 21 x 21 x 0.7 cm. • Piece L/W/thickness: 4 x 4 x 0.4 cm.

313 309 387 169 5

313 309 387 162 6

Jigsaws and Puzzles

W o o d e n

An introduction to the concept of size in the company of 3 Bears.

2 YEARS +

Puzzle Cubes - Little Creatures 4 cubes to piece together on a horizontal surface. Each side represents an animal on a different background colour. 3 double-sided model cards. 6 different animals. • In varnished wood. • Edge of cube: 6 cm. • Colour model cards: 18 cm. 313 309 387 135 0

129


Early Learning

Mosaics and Tiling Maxicoloredo® • An introduction to shapes, colours and orientation. • Develop fine motor skills and visual discrimination. • Encourage self-sufficiency through reproduction of model cards or creation of individual designs.

56 counters

Large play pieces for a good grip. Durable plastic play pieces and grids. 1 grid

2 YEARS +

1 CHILD

Primo Maxicoloredo® Mosaic game with soft, bright colours. 12 suggested patterns: 10 figurative, 2 mosaic. The child slides the pattern card inside the transparent grid. The pieces simply press into the grid. • L/W grid: 31.5 x 21.5 cm. • L/W pattern card: 31 x 21 cm. • Ø counter: 3.3 cm. • The box contains: 1 transparent plastic grid, 6 double-sided pattern cards and 56 counters in 4 colours (14 counters per colour). 313 309 310 057 3

6 double-sided pattern cards

Blank cards for children to create their own patterns

2 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Maxicoloredo® Mosaic game for toddlers comprising 2 hard plastic transparent grids with studs, 96 round snap-on pieces in 4 colours, and 18 pattern cards. The pattern cards slide beneath the grid and the pieces snap on to the studs. 18 figurative or abstract pattern cards

184 counters

• L/W grid: 31.5 x 21.5 cm. • L/W pattern card: 31 x 21 cm. • Ø counter: 3.3 cm. 313 309 345 007 4

2 grids

4 grids

2 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

Maxicoloredo® Set Mosaics in soft, bright colours. The 24 pattern cards are divided into 6 series of 4 cards identifiable by a logo, for a workshop of 4 children. 18 cards represent figurative pictures and 6 mosaic designs to help develop children’s sense of structuring space.

130

• L/W grid: 31.5 x 21.5 cm. • L/W pattern card: 31 x 21 cm. • Ø counter: 3.3 cm. • The box contains: 4 transparent plastic grids, 24 pattern cards and 184 counters in 4 colours (46 counters per colour). 313 309 345 093 7


Early Learning

2 grids

18 model cards

3 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Maxigeocoloredo® The game consists of 18 model cards, 2 stud grids and 124 counters (3 geometric shapes, 4 colours). • Grid L/W: 31.50 x 21.50 cm. • Model card L/W: 31 x 21. • Triangular counters, side: 3 cm. 313 309 345 110 1

124 counters

Maxicoloredo® Grids Maxicoloredo® Counters

Maxigeocoloredo® Counters

2 transparent plastic grids.

96 round counters, 4 colours.

124 geometric counters: 3 shapes, 4 colours.

• L/W grid: 31.5 x 21.5 cm.

313 309 387 213 5

313 309 345 111 8

313 309 387 121 3

12 laminated cards that slide under the grid

2 YEARS +

Wall-mounted Maxicoloredo® Vertical tiling activity consisting of a wall-mounted panel overlaid with a transparent stud grid. Dual-sided pattern cards are provided representing figurative drawings or mosaics that slide under the grid. Children fill in their drawings with round pieces that are simply pressed onto the stud grid. These pieces are stored in the tray on the panel provided for this purpose. • L/W panel: 68 x 58 cm. • L/W pattern card: 61 x 41 cm. • Ø counter: 3.3 cm. • The complete set contains: 1 panel with plastic tray, 1 transparent stud grid, 12 laminated cards illustrated on both sides and 225 round counters in 4 colours. 313 309 345 106 4

Panel that can be used by 2 children simultaneously

131


Early Learning

12 pattern cards

3 YEARS +

1 CHILD

320 pegs

Mosaicolor Plastic pegs in 4 different colours to fit into holes in a transparent plastic grid placed over pattern cards. • L/W grid and pattern card: 25 x 19 cm. • Ø peg: 9 mm. • 1 transparent plastic grid, 320 pegs in 4 colours and 12 pattern cards. 313 309 345 001 2

Extra Pegs Set of 160 pegs in 4 colours. • Ø peg: 9 mm. 313 309 345 003 6

8 pattern cards

100 flat pieces with pegs in 6 different shapes

4 YEARS +

1 CHILD

Extra Pieces Set of 100 plastic geometric pieces in 5 colours.

Geomosaic A mosaic game in hard plastic. The shapes fit into the grid to create abstract patterns or to reproduce the patterns on the card. Complement with Geomosaic Extra Pieces if you want more children to play.

132

• L/W grid and pattern card: 25 x 19 cm. • Av. L. of piece: 4 cm. • 1 transparent plastic grid, 100 flat pieces with pegs in 6 different geometric shapes and 8 pattern cards. 313 309 345 825 4

• Average L. of piece: 4 cm. 313 309 345 827 8

Extra Grids 2 transparent grids for Geomosaic and Mosaicolor. • L/W grid: 25 x 19 cm. 313 309 345 826 1


3 YEARS +

a n d

T i l i n g

MAGNETIC 2 CHILDREN PIECES

Geocolor André Jacquart This workshop introduces the recognition of simple geometric shapes: square, rectangle, triangle and circle. The child reproduces or creates semi-representational models using magnetic pieces in a variety of shapes and colours. The activity cards are grouped into 6 sets of increasing difficulty. • Sets 1 and 2: individual shapes shown as solids. • Sets 3 and 4: individual shapes shown hollow. • Sets 5 and 6: individual or assembled shapes shown as solids. For 2, 4 to 6 extra children, just get 1, 2 or 3 Extension Packs.

Early Learning

M o s a i c s

• L/W sheet: 30 x 21 cm. • The box contains: 12 double-sided activity cards grouped into 6 sets, 40 magnetic shape counters in 5 different shapes and 4 different colours, and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 345 114 9 12 double-sided activity cards, i.e. 24 models to reproduce

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to Geocolor and enables an additional two children to join in. • 40 magnetic shape counters in 4 different colours, i.e. 10 shape counters (square, rectangle, triangle, circle, semi-circle) per colour. 313 309 345 115 6

40 magnetic shape counters

Actual-size reproduction of model cards

5 YEARS +

4 CHILDREN

Organicolor J. Dubosson Develops observation, organisation and reasoning skills. Using coloured wooden chips, children reproduce complex designs based either on models or simply using their imagination. • L/W model card: 23 x 13 cm / 23 x 23 cm / 26 x 12.5 cm. • The box contains: 96 chips (4 colours), 28 model cards in colour or black and white and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 038 9

3 YEARS +

Develop abstraction skills

6 CHILDREN

Geometrix F. Hardy and G. Zimmermann Wooden geometric pieces in 3 colours for creating a wide variety of designs. The shapes fit into plastic trays using actual-size or scaled-down, colour, black and white or outlined patterns. • Ø circle: 5 cm. L/W tray: 28 x 21 cm. • The box contains: 132 geometric pieces: circles, semi-circles, large and small triangles, large and small squares, 6 plastic trays, 48 printed pattern cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 343 102 8

Extra Pieces for Geometrix

48 pattern cards

• Set of 132 wooden pieces. 313 309 343 125 7

6 plastic cut-out trays

132 geometric pieces

133


Early Learning

Early Learning Sets • Early observation and logical association sets for learning to follow instructions and reproduce simple models.

4 abacuses

2 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

Abacolor Set Tactile game for developing dexterity and recognising shapes and colours. 4 sets of 4 sheets in increasing levels of difficulty, showing a variety of stacks and teaching children to read a model sheet. • The box contains: 4 abacuses with 4 rods of different lengths, 40 beads in 4 shapes and 4 colours, and 16 model sheets in 1:1 scale. • L/W/thickness of abacus: 21 x 6.5 x 2.2 cm. • H rod: 14 cm. • Ø bead: 4.5 cm. • L/W sheet: 26 x 21 cm. 313 309 304 998 8

Abacolor

40 beads

16 model sheets

Set of 2 abacuses and 20 plastic pieces. 313 309 304 999 5 4 shapes, 4 colours

30 model sheets

A

3 YEARS +

4.5 cm

2 CHILDREN

Farandole Michel and Marie-Hélène Chevillon

A workshop for practising motor skills and reproducing simple rhythms with figurative pieces on a farming theme. The pieces, painted on both sides, stand up and include 2 holes. The activity can be performed either freely or with the help of model cards the same scale as the pieces. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

20 wooden pieces

2 laces

The box contains: • 20 wooden pieces with 2 holes and illustrated on both sides (Cow H: 7 cm). • 30 model cards (L/W: 33 x 11 cm). • 2 laces (1 m). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 375 128 7

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

A B

1x

A

1x +

+

B

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to Farandole and enables an additional two children to join in. • 8 wooden pieces and 2 laces. 313 309 375 129 4

134

1x

2x

B


Lacing Set - Fairy Tales 2 sets for recreating early simple patterns, taking into account the size, shape and colour of the figures. Children can freely create patterns or reproduce the ones shown on each model sheet, with or without a lace. The 16 model sheets are at a 1:1 scale. They are structured in 4 sets of 4 sheets (patterns of 3 then 4 elements). The large wooden pieces are stable and easy to handle. The laces have long plastic-coated ends to guide threading.

Early Learning

EW

16 model sheets

A

4 laces

2 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

Lacing Set - Little Red Riding Hood

16 figures in varnished wood

• 16 figures in varnished wood (H/thickness: 7 / 5.2 x 1.5 cm). • 4 laces with long plastic-coated ends (L: 70 cm). • 16 model sheets at a 1:1 scale, divided into 4 sets of 4 sheets (L/W: 32.5 x 12 cm).

Build your set

313 309 375 146 1

8 CHILDREN

B

4 Child Extension Pack

This material adds to lacing set Little Red Riding Hood and enables an additional 4 children to join in.

8 CHILDREN

A

1x

• 13 figures in varnished wood and 4 laces. • H of figures: 5.7 and 7 cm; thickness: 1.5 cm. • L of lace: 70 cm. 313 309 375 147 8

A

1x

+

+

B

B

A

1x

1x

2 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN 16 model sheets

Lacing Set - Goldilocks and the 3 Bears • 16 figures in varnished wood (H/thickness: 6.8 / 6.3 x 1.5 cm). • 4 laces with long plastic-coated ends (L: 70 cm). • 16 model sheets at a 1:1 scale, divided into 4 sets of 4 sheets (L/W: 32.5 x 12 cm).

4 laces

313 309 375 144 7

B

4 Child Extension Pack

This material adds to Lacing Set Goldilocks ans the 3 Bears and enables an additional 4 children to join in. • 13 figures in varnished wood and 4 laces. • H of figures: 6.3 and 6.8 cm; thickness: 1.5 cm. • L of lace: 70 cm. 313 309 375 145 4

16 figures in varnished wood

135


136


Pretend Play

To discover... NEW

P

retend playing at tea parties or shopkeepers are all-important activities for young children. Children can better understand the world of grown-ups by imitating it. These role-playing situations help children develop their language and social skills. Deliberately uncluttered and highly realistic, our furniture and accessories stimulate children’s imagination and encourage interaction. These modular, fun products are made with natural materials selected for their environmental qualities. They comply with safety standards for intensive use in groups.

Kitchen Corner Modular Kitchen - 4 colours

P.140

Vitamin Kitchen

p. 138

Modular Kitchen

p. 140

Compact Kitchen

p. 142

Traditional Kitchen

p. 144

Zen House

p. 146

Nathan House

p. 147

Dining Set

p. 148

Grocery Corner Play Food and Grocer

p. 149

Shopping Corner

p. 150

House Corner

Nathan House

P.147 NEW

At Home

p. 151

Vitamin Bedroom

p. 152

Traditional Bedroom

p. 153

Red Bedroom

p. 154

Dolls and Accessories

p. 156

Theatre Corner Dressing-up

p. 158

Theatre and Puppets

p. 160

Pretend Group Play The Car, The Boat

p. 161

Play Corners

Vitamin - Storage Unit

P.152

Farm and Animals

p. 162

Animals, Playing Table

p. 164

Doll House, Castle

p. 165

Garages, Road Circuit

p. 166

Vehicles

p. 168

Train Set

p. 169

Water and Sand Equipment

p. 170

137


Kitchen Corner

Vitamin Kitchen 2 YEARS + • A choice of 7 modules that can be set up in a linear or island configuration using the 2 square and rounded quadrant shapes. • A wide range of possible activities.

• Suitable for classroom and kindergarten spaces of all kinds. • Ideal for 2 to 4 years. • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

GUARANTEE

Practical details of the range:

• H. of playing surfaces, 48 cm; table, 40 cm. • Raised modules for easy cleaning, 7 cm. • Lacquered 15 mm thick plywood.

138

POINTS • Safe anti-pinching system. • Rounded edges and corners for safety. • The bowl of the sink is fixed to prevent it moving.


• All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests.

Sink 1 round white sink, 1 angled metal tap unit, 2 rotating red and blue buttons, 1 fixed shelf, 2 curtains. • In MDF board 15 mm thick with a pink finish. • L/W/H: 42 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm. 313 309 371 204 2

Plethora of possible layouts

Cooker

Washing Machine

3 cooking hobs, 1 lateral-opening oven door with an anti-pinching system, Plexiglas window, 1 fixed shelf, 4 rotating buttons.

Round Plexiglas lateral door and anti-pinching system. Rotating window, fixed inside drum. 2 buttons to press, 1 four-colour adjustment button, 1 work surface.

• In MDF board 15 mm thick with an orange finish. • L/W: 38 x 38 cm. • H. work surface: 48 cm; H. total: 54 cm. 313 309 371 212 7

• In MDF board 15 mm thick with a blue finish. • L/W: 38 x 38 cm. • H. work surface: 48 cm; H. total: 54 cm. 313 309 371 214 1

The sink bowl is fixed and the buttons turn.

Special system to prevent pinched fingers.

Kitchen Corner

Nathan Commitments

Do the washing by turning the drum.

EW

Table Rectangular table for 4 children, to be placed next to 2 kitchen units or next to a wall. Plastic pads.

Storage Unit Storage Unit for Sorting For tidying and sorting according to the shape of the object. The surface has 3 holes (round, rectangle and surprise). 1 low shelf and 1 wooden bin with 3 compartments fitted with an anti-drop system. • In MDF board 15 mm thick with a green finish. • L/W: 38 x 38 cm, rounded quadrant façade. • H. work surface: 48 cm; H. total: 54 cm. 313 309 371 220 2

For playing at emptying and filling, with 2 sliding doors designed to prevent trapped fingers: 1 side door from which things can be tidied into 2 compartments and 1 door on the top (handles in solid varnished wood).

• In MDF board 15 mm thick with a yellow finish. • Support thickness 15 mm, coated in 2 layers of protective varnish. • L/W: 76 x 38 cm; H: 40 cm.

• In MDF board 15 mm thick with a purple finish. • Support thickness 15 mm, coated in 2 layers of protective varnish. • Side: 38 cm; H of play surface: 48 cm; total H: 54 cm. 313 309 371 240 0

Slide under the table easily. With solid wood supports and plastic pads.

313 309 371 205 9

Stools - Set of 2 • In MDF board 15 mm thick with an orange finish. • Support thickness 15 mm, coated in 2 layers of protective varnish. • H of seat: 20 cm; side: 21 cm. 313 309 371 206 6

Once the washing up has been sorted, the tray slides out so that it can be emptied.

Special system to prevent pinched fingers.

SEE ALSO Vitamin Bedroom

p. 152

139


Kitchen Corner

Modular Kitchen 2 YEARS + • 8 modular elements in 4 colours suitable for classroom and kindergarten spaces of all kinds. • 2 possible work surface heights through use of a removable base. • High-quality varnished plywood, 10 mm thick, and MDF; meticulous finishes, easy to maintain. • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

2 possible heights: For 2-3 year olds: without base, H.: 50 cm. For 3 year olds and above: with base, H.: 55 cm.

GUARANTEE

Side by side Sink-Plus + Cooker-Plus

140

Back to back Cooker-Plus + Sink-Plus

Rounded edges


Fridge Highly complete layout with 2 shelves, 1 inside adjustment knob, 1 egg and butter tray and 1 bottle tray in the door.

The bowl of the sink is fixed to prevent it moving.

Sink Equipped with wooden tap and storage shelves concealed by a curtain. Base included. Made of varnished plywood for easy cleaning.

• L/W/H: 42 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm.

• L/W/H: 42 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm.

Red Red

Red Red

Yellow

Blue

313 309 371 244 8

313 309 371 241 7

313 309 371 210 3 313 309 371 210 3

313 309 371 216 5 313 309 371 216 5

Kitchen Corner

POINT

Cooker Equipped with 3 burners and an oven with Plexiglas door. Base included. Made of varnished plywood for easy cleaning.

Dishwasher 1 central shelf with 4 slots for plates, 6 wooden spikes for glasses, 3 external adjustment knobs and even 1 powder compartment in the door. Can contain a red basket.

• L/W/H: 42 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm.

Red Red

• L/W/H: 42 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm.

313 309 371 215 8 313 309 371 215 8

Red

Orange

313 309 371 209 7

313 309 371 243 1

Washing Machine

Microwave Oven This space-saving microwave oven with revolving inner tray stands upright and is complemented by a storage area with a central shelf. Side-opening door with Plexiglas window. Made of varnished plywood.

With opening plexiglas door, pull-out washing powder compartment and turnable adjustment knob. • L/W/H: 42 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm.

Red Red

313 309 371 208 0 313 309 371 208 0

• L/W/H: 40 x 29 x 73 cm or H. with base: 78 cm.

Green

Red

313 309 371 242 4

313 309 371 211 0

POINT The bowl of the sink is fixed to prevent it moving.

Kitchen Sink-Plus

Cooker-Plus

Includes a sink, a refrigerator, 2 storage shelves and a rounded work surface. Made of varnished plywood for easy cleaning.

Includes 3 burners, 1 oven with Plexiglas door, 2 storage shelves and a rounded work surface. Made of varnished plywood for easy cleaning.

• L/W/H: 84 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm.

• L/W/H: 84 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm.

Red Red

Red Red

Blue Blue

Orange Orange

313 309 371 246 2

313 309 371 245 5

313 309 371 218 9 313 309 371 218 9

313 309 371 217 2 313 309 371 217 2

141


Kitchen Corner

Compact Kitchen 3 YEARS + • 6 functions of the Compact Kitchen: oven, cooking hobs, sink, refrigerator, work top and storage space. • Suitable for classroom and kindergarten spaces of all kinds. • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

GUARANTEE

Rounded edges for children’s safety

105 cm

Hooks sold in white p. 145

Wall Grid Creates useful storage space on a wall for the smaller accessories used in a kitchen corner. Can be fixed to a wall with 4 screws (included) at any height. Red wire. • W/H grid: 105 x 50 cm. • L/W/D basket: 25 x 12.5 x 8.5 cm. • Weight: 3715 g. • Comes with 2 baskets and 5 hooks. 313 309 370 992 9

Fixed bowl

Opens to the side

POINT

Plexiglas door

57 cm

Sliding drawer

The bowl of the sink is fixed to prevent it moving.

Full Kitchen Unit All the basic functions of a kitchen corner in one activity unit: sink, cooker and refrigerator. The 2 plastic shelves and drawer provide storage space for the toy dining set. In red and beech finish melamine with white wire accessories: 2 oven shelves, refrigerator door fittings and 2 shelves.

142

• L/W/H: 105 x 30 x 57 cm. 313 309 370 824 3 105 cm


Kitchen Corner

110 cm

52 cm

Dresser The top section has 2 shelves for storing dishes. The bottom section has 2 red doors with a cutout handle to avoid pinched fingers. The middle shelf provides an extra-wide storage surface.

Ø 60 cm

• L/W/H: 67 x 33 x 110 cm. 313 309 371 075 8

Stools - Set of 2 Small varnished wood stools with red seats. Designed to match the Kitchen Table and the Dressing Table (p. 155). Supplied in pairs, ready-assembled.

Big enough for 4 children to play together. Round varnished wood table with red top. • Ø/H: 60 x 52 cm.

30 cm

Kitchen Table

• H. seat: 30 cm.

Red

Red Red

313 309 371 200 4 313 309 371 200 4

313 309 371 201 1

Blue Kitchen Table – Blue

Yellow Yellow

313 309 371 247 9

313 309 371 248 6

110 cm 38 cm

Table Top Cooker Extra Larder A food storage unit: groceries on the shelves, fruits and vegetables in the baskets. Includes 3 shelves concealed by a curtain and 3 plastic baskets. Red and beech finish melamine. • L/W/H: 40 x 30 x 110 cm. 313 309 370 990 5

Compact wooden table top cooker. The 2 knobs turn. Very stable due to the use of 4 non-slip rubber pads. Accessories not included. 2 year guarantee. • In natural varnished 15 mm and 8 mm plywood and wood. • 2 orange screen-printed hobs. • L/W/H: 38 x 28 x 2 cm. 313 309 372 027 6

143


Kitchen Corner

Traditional Kitchen 2 YEARS + • Stimulates the imagination through its fairy-tale inspired design. • A choice of natural and durable materials in solid wood and plywood, with an ivory gloss and brown varnish finish. • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

Nathan Commitments • All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests.

GUARANTEE

Table A logical extension to kitchen activities, this rectangular table seats up to 6 children at a time, who can gather round it “like a family”. The top is of brown-varnished plywood, the legs of ivory-lacquered solid wood. • L/W/H: 72 x 54 x 48 cm. • Accessories sold separately. 313 309 370 807 6

POINTS • All kitchen funnctions in a single g item of furnitu furniture. Hotplates, cooker, sink, refrigerator, cupboard and work surface. • The bowl of the sink is fixed to prevent it moving.

Stools - Set of 2 Practical and fun, they are easy to move from place to place thanks to their central tulip-shaped cut-out. The wide, square seat makes them very comfortable to sit on. • L/W/H: 28 x 25 x 26 cm. 313 309 370 808 3

Bench Suitable for 3 children or 2 around a table, this small bench owes its solidity to its stable right-angled central structure with tulip cut-out. Made of ivory and brown-lacquered plywood.

144

• L/W/H: 60 x 25 x 26 cm. 313 309 370 809 0

SEE ALSO Traditional Bedroom

p. 153


Kitchen Corner

43 cm

112 cm

Hanging-Rail

Utensil Hooks

Dining Set sold separately Combination Kitchen Unit

Buffet

Fixed bowl

56 cm

Basket sold separately p. 257 Plexiglas door

Combination Kitchen Unit A crucial element of the kitchen, this combination unit groups together all the essential functions: hotplates, cooker, sink, refrigerator, work surface, central storage cupboard. The uprights are in solid wood, the top is in thick plywood and the body of the unit is in MDF. The unit can also be used to separate areas thanks to the smart white-lacquer finish on the back. When stood against a wall, a Hanging-Rail can be put up above it. The combination unit includes: 4 hotplates, oven with shelf and door in Plexiglas opening on one side, sink, metal tap and cross-shaped knobs in wood, refrigerator with shelf and white-lacquered metal rack fixed on the door, work surface, central storage cupboard. • L/W/H: 112 x 36 x 56 cm. • Accessories and Hanging-Rail sold separately. 313 309 370 823 6

Open to the side

Metal tap

Hanging-Rail Practical and attractive, it is the perfect addition to the Combination Kitchen Unit. Made of two round bars in solid wood and an ivory-lacquered plywood base, it provides room to both hang up kitchen utensils and store play dining sets on the shelf. Fixes on the wall at the desired height. • L/W/H : 112 x 9.5 x 18 cm. • Accessories sold separately. 313 309 370 806 9

2 cloth hooks

Utensil Hooks 10 white hooks for hanging kitchen utensils on the Hanging-Rail. Metal with white epoxy finish. • H/D: 60 x 3 mm for Ø 22 mm rail. • Set of 10. 313 309 370 900 4

Buffet A set of 4 genuine cooking utensils including: 1 saucepan, 1 stew pot, 1 frying pan and 1 casserole dish.

A practical and compact unit to store toy food, dining sets and accessories in a number of ways: in a basket, on a shelf, in compartments, on coat pegs and on bottle racks.

• Ø saucepan: 13 cm. • Ø frying pan: 16 cm. • Ø casserole dish: 16.5 cm. • Ø stew pot: 16.5 cm. 313 309 333 165 6

• In thick plywood with solid wood stiles. • L/W/H: 43 x 36 x 104 cm. • Delivered with a red plastic basket, accessories sold separately. 313 309 370 820 5

Pots & Pans

145


Kitchen Corner

Zen House • • • • •

Nathan Commitments • All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests.

Robust furniture with soft and simple lines. All edges and corners are rounded. Varnished birch plywood, clear varnish and white melamine particle board. Suitable for children under 3. Flat-packed furniture with assembly instructions.

GUARANTEE All rounded edges and corners. The tap turns.

A

C

D

B E

A

Cooker A very strong piece of furniture with simple, soft lines and natural colours - perfect for small children. Non-removable sink, 2 turning buttons and 1 tap, doorless oven, 2 side storage spaces and 2 silkscreen hotplates. The façade notches enable objects to fall from above to be collected below.

B

A large bed for dolls or... to cuddle up yourself! Very low and strengthened at ground level to withstand children jumping and to enable them to get out without moving the bed.

• Varnished birch wood, clear varnish and white melamine particle board. Tap and buttons in solid wood. • L/W/H: 70 x 40 x 55 cm; Work surface H.: 45 cm. 313 309 372 886 9

C

Bed

• L/W/H: 72 x 43 x 36 cm. 313 309 372 887 6

Highchair Pyramid design for high stability. Melamine tray suitable for frequent washing. • L/W/H: 40 x 28 x 50 cm. Tray H: 38 cm. 313 309 372 888 3 E

D

Stools - Set of 2 The stools store away below the table and are stackable. • Stool L/W/H: 31 x 32 x 22 cm; Seat H: 20 cm. 313 309 372 896 8

146

Table and Stool Set consists of a table and a stool. The pyramid design of the component ensures high stability. Washable white melamine surface. • Table L/W/H: 42 x 42 x 37 cm; Work surface H.: 35 cm. • Stool L/W/H: 31 x 32 x 22 cm; Seat H: 20 cm. 313 309 372 895 1


• A fun, original concept using modular façades that can be combined to create numerous different play spaces. • The façades can be attached together at right angles or in a straight line using the wood fastenings provided. The fastenings can also be used to mount a panel on the wall.

Technical information

• Façades in thick plywood (15 mm) with shockresistant decorations screen-printed on 1 side. • Wood connectors supplied with each façade. • The façades are stable if assembled at right angles. • Requires assembly. Assembly instructions included.

GUARANTEE

Kitchen Corner

Nathan House

Shop Counter Façade • L/W/H: 100 x 20 x 120 cm; H of counter: 48 cm. 313 309 372 050 4

1 Shop Counter Façade + 1 Windows Façade

Windows Façade • L/W/H: 100 x 21.5 x 88 cm; H of seat: 20 cm. 313 309 372 051 1

Garage Façade • L/W/H: 100 x 30 x 75 cm; L of opening: 35 cm. 313 309 372 052 8

1 Entrance Façade + 1 Façade with Flowers + 2 Windows Façades

Comfort mat sold separately p. 208 Roof closed with 2 sections

House Roof Façade with Flowers

Entrance Façade

Roof to be attached only between façades with a triangular top.

• L/W/H: 100 x 26.5 x 120 cm; H of window sill: 55 cm. 313 309 372 053 5

• L/W/H: 100 x 23 x 120 cm; L of opening: 45 cm. 313 309 372 054 2

• Plastic-coated fabric with attachment hooks. • 2 sections 77 x 99 cm, held by 4 horizontal bars. 313 309 372 055 9

147


Kitchen Corner

Dining Set

EW

Play Basins

Dining Set Set of 48 pieces: 8 dinner plates, 8 soup bowls, 8 knives, 8 forks, 8 spoons and 8 beakers. In 4 colours.

4 lightweight round basins in green plastic for filling, emptying, and carrying objects. For use both indoors and outdoors. Easy to grip with their ergonomic handles. Stackable.

• Ø plate: 19 cm. • L. cutlery: 13.5 cm. 313 309 333 150 2

• Ø/H of basin with handle: 27 x 9.5 cm; Ø interior: 21 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 333 398 8

Cutlery Set of 33 pieces: 8 knives, 8 forks, 8 spoons and 8 teaspoons, all packed in a special tray. In 4 colours.

Cookware Set of 4 pieces: 2 saucepans, 1 frying pan and 1 casserole dish. In 3 colours.

Kettle & Pressure Cooker

• L. cutlery: 13.5 cm. • L/W tray: 26 x 19.5 cm. 313 309 333 152 6

• Ø frying pan: 13 cm. • Ø casserole dish: 14 cm. 313 309 333 157 1

• H/Ø pressure cooker: 10.5 x 11 cm. • H/Ø kettle: 14 x 13.5 cm. 313 309 333 159 5

Coffee Service

Cooking Utensil Set

Coffeepot in transparent plastic.

15 items: 4 cups and saucers, 4 teaspoons in four assorted colours, 1 sugar bowl, 1 milk jug and 1 tray.

Set of 14 pieces: 2 mixing bowls, 2 whisks, 2 ladles, 2 knives, 2 spatulas, 2 slotted spatulas, and 2 pastry cutting wheels. In 4 colours.

• H: 21 cm. 313 309 333 301 8

• Ø cup: 6 cm. 313 309 333 300 1

• Ø bowl: 12 cm. Average L: 18 cm. 313 309 333 158 8

Coffeemaker

Scales and Cash Register Place Mats Set of 4 place mats in 4 colours. Soft, hard-wearing washable plastic.

148

• L/W: 33 x 27 cm. 313 309 333 167 0

A cash register with a solar-powered calculator. Scales for weighing fruits and vegetables. In plastic.

Baskets - Set of 6

• L/W/H scales: 30 x 18 x 16 cm. • L/W/H cash register: 15 x 14 x 20 cm. • Basket and vegetables sold separately. 313 309 333 216 5

• L/W/H: 19 x 13 x 8 cm. 313 309 345 071 5

Hard plastic shopping baskets in 3 assorted colours.


Grocery Corner

Play Food and Grocer

Dry Goods

Market Stall

14 plastic dry goods for playing shopkeeper and stocking the kitchen corner.

Wooden stall with an awning and 6 compartments. Can stand on a table or on the ground. The handle baskets can be placed in the compartments (sold separately).

• H/Ø round tin: 10 x 7 cm, 6 x 6.5 cm, 4 x 4.5 cm. • W/H carton: 10 x 6.5 cm. • Set of 14 pieces. 313 309 345 053 1

• In 12 mm plywood, clear varnish and red lacquer. • L/W/H: 60 x 47 x 58 cm. • Requires assembly. Supplied with assembly instructions. Accessories not included. 313 309 372 897 5

Meat

Bread

Market Vegetables

1 joint of beef with two cut slices, 1 dry sausage, 2 chicken legs, 1 large sausage, 1 pork sausage, 1 pork chop.

1 trout, 1 sole, 1 red mullet, 6 sardines.

A 1/2 French loaf, 2 slices of French loaf, 1 round loaf, 1 slice of white bread, 1 slice of rye bread, 1 roll.

6 tomatoes, 6 onions, 6 red peppers, 6 green peppers, 6 leeks, 6 potatoes, 6 carrots, 6 courgettes. Reduced scale.

• Set of 9 pieces. 313 309 345 065 4

• Set of 7 pieces. 313 309 345 078 4

• Set of 48 pieces. 313 309 387 084 1

• Set of 9 pieces. 313 309 345 079 1

Fish

EW

Cut-up Magnetic Fruits

Market Fruit

Fruit Basket

6 oranges, 6 lemons, 6 green apples, 6 red apples, 6 bananas, 6 pears, 6 apricots, 6 clementines. Reduced scale..

Tropical Fruit Pineapples, watermelon, grapefruit, banana, lemon and fig. Actual size.

1 tangerine, 1 orange, 1 lemon, 1 red apple, 1 banana, 1 pear, 1 apricot, 1 fig, 1 plum, 1 peach, 1 grapefruit, 2 strawberries.

• Set of 48 pieces. 313 309 345 049 4

• Set of 6 items. 313 309 345 109 5

• Set of 13 pieces. 313 309 345 075 3

3 magnetic fruits that are easy to cut up with a knife: 1 orange (in 2 parts), 1 pear (in 3 parts) and 1 apple (in 4 parts). With 1 fabric bag with handles, which is useful for tidying up. • Plastic. • Ø orange: 7 cm; Ø apple: 7.3 cm; Ø pear: 9.3 cm; L of knife: 16 cm. • H/W of bag: 28 x 19 cm. 313 309 398 359 6

149


Grocery Corner

Shopping Corner • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

GUARANTEE

130 cm

3 YEARS +

Shop Counter Solid wooden uprights, thick red plywood shelves, a transparent Plexiglas façade and a red plastic drawer, all under a striped awning. • L/W/H: 105 x 34.5 x 130 cm. • H. counter: 60 cm. • Accessories sold separately. 313 309 372 803 6

Customise with your own images

Conveyor belt Laminated tough surface

Protected edging

Baskets sold p. 257

Easy movement provided by two small swivel wheels.

Rubber front wheels act as bumpers.

Shop Visit the local shop or supermarket with this shop counter, generating numerous dialogue scenarios. Create food and goods displays on the shelving and counter. The angled structure clearly sets out two play spaces - indoors and outdoors. The shelved or basket-based food display (baskets sold separately) also enables quick game storage.

Rear View

150

• Comes with a natural wood conveyor belt, base for screwing onto the countertop. • Particle board, green melamine and birch colour, thickness 15 mm, protected edging and rounded corners. • L/W/H: 100 x 86 x 120 cm. • H. counter: 60 cm. • Requires assembly with assembly instructions - accessories not included. 313 309 372 877 7

Shopping Trolley For shopping and walking the baby (dolls up to approx. 50 cm) - very solid and stable, capable of supporting the weight of a child. • In solid varnished 12 to 22 mm plywood with metal joins and red lacquer. • L/W/H: 47 x 40 x 59 cm. • H. handle: 58 cm; baby seat side: 13 cm at the top 9.5 cm at the bottom. • Requires assembly with assembly instructions accessories not included. 313 309 345 107 1


House Corner

At Home • Wooden unit supplied with assembly instructions.

2 YEARS +

Laundry Unit All the basic functions of the laundry corner in one unit: washing, drying, ironing and folding laundry. Red and beech finish melamine, comes with a wooden iron. 2 year guarantee. • L/W: 105 x 30 cm. • H. ironing board: 55 cm. • H. total: 100 cm. 313 309 371 231 8

Adjusts to children’s height

Ironing Table Foldable and adjustable (2 heights: 55 or 62 cm). Comes with a wooden iron. Thick varnished plywood. 2 year guarantee. • L/W: 74 x 21.5 cm. 313 309 371 016 1

Iron • Sturdy solid wood and varnished plywood. • L/W/H: 18 x 9 x 8 cm. 313 309 371 158 8

Workbench Clothes Dryer Clothes dryer with 5 lines for clothing of all kinds. Lightweight and easy to tidy. Supplied with 10 wooden clothes pegs in 4 assorted colours. 2 year guarantee.

Housekeeping Set A stand holding a broom, a dustpan and brush and a scrubbing brush. Solid wood stand and brooms; plastic dustpan and brush. 2 year guarantee.

• In wood. • L/W/H: 44 x 35 x 58 cm.

• H. stand : 92 cm. • L. broom: 70 cm. • No assembly required.

313 309 332 967 7

313 309 371 232 5

Workbench with a set of tools: 1 set square, screws, 1 clamp, 1 vice, 1 spanner, 1 hammer, 1 screwdriver, wedges, planks in 5 shapes or different sizes. Stable, robust wood, includes 3 boxes in 3 different colours for storing all 44 accessories. • In natural varnished wood. • L/W/H: 50 x 35 x 54 cm. 313 309 345 450 8

151


House Corner

Vitamin Bedroom

Nathan Commitments • All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests.

2 YEARS + • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

GUARANTEE

Rounded corners and edges

B A

SEE ALSO Vitamin Kitchen Zen Cooker

p. 138 p. 146

Highly resistant reinforced bottom

B

A

Bed Bed for dolls up to 45 cm long. Highly robust and able to resist the weight of two children. • In MDF board 15 mm thick with a blue finish. • L/W/H: 50 x 30 x 38 cm. 313 309 371 226 4

Vitamin Sink and Vanity Unit

Fixed sink basin

For playing at washing, changing and dressing baby, while looking in the mirror! Unit with sink, tap and 2 turning buttons on retaining elastic, 1 soap holder, 2 shelves, 1 round box and 1 towel rail. • In MDF board 15 mm thick with a green finish. • Fixed sink in blue plastic. • Metal towel rail, unbreakable Perspex mirror with bevelled edges. • L/W/H: 38 x 38 x 86 cm. • H. work surface: 48 cm. 313 309 371 225 7

EW Table Rectangular table for 4 children, to be placed next to 2 kitchen units or next to a wall. Plastic pads.

Storage Unit Washing Machine Round Plexiglas lateral door and anti-pinching system. Rotating window, fixed inside drum. 2 buttons to press, 1 four-colour adjustment button, 1 work surface. • In MDF board 15 mm thick with a blue finish. • L/W: 38 x 38 cm. • H. work surface: 48 cm; H. total: 54 cm. 313 309 371 214 1

152

• In MDF board 15 mm thick with a yellow finish. • Support thickness 15 mm, coated in 2 layers of protective varnish. • L/W: 76 x 38 cm; H: 40 cm.

For playing at emptying and filling, with 2 sliding doors designed to prevent trapped fingers: 1 side door from which things can be tidied into 2 compartments and 1 door on the top (handles in solid varnished wood).

313 309 371 205 9

• In MDF board 15 mm thick with a purple finish. • Support thickness 15 mm, coated in 2 layers of protective varnish. • Side: 38 cm; H of play surface: 48 cm; total H: 54 cm. 313 309 371 240 0

• In MDF board 15 mm thick with an orange finish. • Support thickness 15 mm, coated in 2 layers of protective varnish. • H of seat: 20 cm; side: 21 cm. 313 309 371 206 6

Stools - Set of 2 Slide under the table easily. With solid wood supports and plastic pads.


2 YEARS + • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

GUARANTEE

All corners and edges are rounded

House Corner

Traditional Bedroom

POINT Anti-tipping drrawers.

SEE ALSO The Traditional Kitcheen pp. 144-145

Changing Table Bed A large cot for dolls up to 50 cm long. The extremely solid plywood base and the rounded knobs glued at the top of each post make it suitable for all ages. • In solid wood, in honey lacquered plywood and in ivory lacquered MDF. • Frieze with a tulip-shaped cut-out. • L/W/H: 63 x 35 x 39 cm. 313 309 371 131 1

A table for changing “baby” dolls and storing their clothes. Ideal for the bedroom play corner. The storage part has one shelf and two large capacity antitipping drawers. • In solid wood, in honey lacquered plywood and in ivory lacquered MDF. • Frieze with a tulip-shaped cut-out. • L/W/H: 57 x 40 x 67 cm. • H. changing table: 56 cm. • L/W inside of drawers: 42 x 32 cm. 313 309 371 133 5

Dressing Table For 2 children. One large oval mirror, 3 drawers for accessories and secrets, 1 large drawer and 1 work surface. Enough space for 2 stools (sold separately p. 144). • In solid wood, in honey lacquered plywood and in ivory lacquered MDF. • L/W/H: 64 x 40 x 97 cm. • H. work surface: 45 cm. 313 309 371 159 5

Bedding For the cradle or beds; an allin-one mattress, pillow and blanket. Polyester filling covered with 100% cotton fabric. Machine-washable at 40°C. • L: 114 cm (opened), 64 cm (folded). • W: 30 cm. 313 309 333 180 9

153


House Corner

Red Bedroom 2 YEARS + • • • •

A design with gentle, rounded shapes. A complete range of furniture and accessories to play with dolls. Suitable for classroom and kindergarten spaces of all kinds. Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

SEE ALSO • Stools • Bedding • Dolls

p. 143 p. 153 p. 156

GUARANTEE

Bunk Beds

A unit for washing and changing baby, and for storing accessories and clothes on either shelves or hangers. Red and beech finish melamine.

An extremely stable bed for two large dolls up to 50 cm long. With its rounded design and smooth angles, it blends perfectly with the “red and wood” range to create a harmonious and convivial bedroom play corner.

• L/W/H: 98 x 32 x 72 cm. • H. changing table: 60 cm. 313 309 370 991 2

• Clear varnished plywood with red panels. • L/W/H: 60.5 x 37 x 68 cm. 313 309 371 132 8

Changing Unit

154

Doll’s Cradle Rounded bottom to rock the cradle. 2 holes in the head and foot make it easy to pick up and carry. • In varnished plywood. • L/W/H: 60 x 30 x 30 cm. 313 309 371 088 8


House Corner

A drawer for storing accessories

Solid beech legs

Beechwood cross-pieces

Dressing Table A dressing table with rounded corners, 2 shelves on either side of the mirror and 1 plastic drawer for storing jars, bottles, make-up, combs and brushes. • Red and beech finish melamine. • Accessories sold separately. • Total H: 90 cm. • L/W/H table: 75 x 33 x 52 cm. 313 309 371 230 1

Red Wardrobe A large storage space with 2 shelves for doll’s clothes, 1 rail and 2 coat pegs. The doors are designed to prevent children from trapping their fingers. Body in varnished plywood, doors in red varnished MDF, rail in solid wood. • L/W/H: 65 x 30 x 100 cm. 313 309 372 860 9

Door with anti-pinching system

Vanity Table

108.5 cm

Stable and easy to move. Integrated storage space for hair or make-up accessories. Accessories not included.

Mirror An unbreakable full-length Plexiglas mirror. Sides made of solid wood strips and mounted on a red MDF frame. • W/H: 108.5 x 44.5 cm. 313 309 371 235 6

• In natural and red lacquered 10 mm plywood. • Unbreakable Perspex mirror (L/W: 21 x 23 cm). • L/W/H: 29 x 19 x 34 cm. 313 309 372 026 9

Doctor’s Case 7 examination and treatment instruments: 1 pair of scissors, 1 apparatus for measuring blood pressure, 1 ear examination instrument, 1 reflex hammer, 1 thermometer, 1 syringe and 1 stethoscope. • Made of plastic. • L/H: 26 x 23 cm. 313 309 332 002 5

155


House Corner

Dolls and Accessories POINT Light and washable.

Toddler Trolley

12 MONTHS +

Designed with child-friendly rounded shapes, this cart transports loads in two compartments while steadying toddlers as they take their first steps. Push-bar adjustable to two heights: 56 and 61 cm. 2 year guarantee.

Basket Quilted cotton basket for holding a doll and toys. Easy to fill, empty and transport with 2 handles.

• Solid wood push-bar, seat in plywood and fibreboard.

• Washable at 30°C. • L/W/H: 39 x 25.5 x 13 cm. 313 309 399 388 5

• L/W: 50 x 30.5 cm. 313 309 371 117 5

Ethnic Baby Dolls • Small Baby Doll: 28 cm. • Big Baby Doll: 45 cm. • Washable.

Small Baby Doll Big Baby Doll

28 cm

45 cm

• A baby doll with a fabric body and plastic arms and legs. • Easy to dress for young children.

• Big African. • Small African. 313 309 333 224 0 313 309 333 225 7

• Big European. • Small European. 313 309 333 226 4 313 309 333 223 3

• Big North African. • Small North African. 313 309 333 228 8 313 309 333 229 5

Ethnic Dolls • Small Ethnic Doll: 34 cm. • Big Ethnic Doll: 43 cm. • Easy-to-brush hair.

Small Ethnic Doll Big Ethnic Doll

34 cm

• 6 models of washable dolls in 2 sizes with articulated limbs, fixed eyes and easy-to-style hair.

• Small African Girl. 313 309 333 275 2

• Small European Boy. 313 309 333 278 3

• Small European Girl. 313 309 333 279 0

• Big African Boy. • Big African Girl. 313 309 333 268 4 313 309 333 269 1

• Big European Boy. 313 309 333 272 1

• Big European Girl. 313 309 333 273 8

43 cm

• Small African Boy. 313 309 333 274 5

156

• Big Asian Boy. 313 309 333 270 7

• Big Asian Girl. 313 309 333 271 4


House Corner Pushchair

High Chair

Sturdy design in solid varnished wood. Fabric seat can be removed and washed.

A classic design and very stable. In solid, natural wood, this high chair blends with every type of kitchen style.

• H.: 51 cm. • Front wheelbase: 36.5 cm. • Rear wheelbase: 40.5 cm. • Cotton fabric, removable, machine washable at 30°C. 313 309 371 068 0

• L/W/H: 46.5 x 35 x 70 cm. • H. seat: 35 cm; H. tray: 50 cm. • Removable cotton fabric, machine washable at 30°C. 313 309 371 000 0

Dolls’ Clothing Range • Attractive cotton dolls’ clothing; easy to slip on and fasten, using Velcro®. • Washable at 30°C.

For 30 to 34 cm Dolls:

Dress Set

Trouser Set

Sports Outfit

Including a dress, a jacket and trousers.

1 cap, 1 jumper and 1 pair of trousers.

Consists of trousers and a sweatshirt.

Baby Sleep Bag

313 309 332 982 0

313 309 332 984 4

313 309 332 980 6

313 309 332 979 0

For 43 to 45 cm Dolls:

Trouser Set

Dress Set

Including soft jeans and a stripy jumper.

1 long-sleeved dress with collar and 1 pair of trousers.

Pyjama Set 1 pair of pyjamas and nightcap.

Summer Dress

313 309 332 981 3

313 309 332 986 8

313 309 332 985 1

313 309 332 978 3

157


Theatre Corner

Dressing-up • A complete range of furniture and accessories for successful festive activities: theatre, celebrations, holidays, etc.

Dressing-up Unit Functional and with large storage capacity for organising dressing-up activities. Easy and fun access to accessories stimulates the imagination. Consists of 2 storage boxes, 3 shelves, 2 hanging rails, 1 shoe box and 1 large mirror. Casters allow easy movement. 2 year guarantee. Supplied with assembly instructions. • L/W/H: 120 x 50 x 123 cm. • Internal dim. of 2 boxes: 44 x 41 x 32 cm. 313 309 371 162 5

POINTS • Large storage capacity. • Easy to set up. • Rounded Corners.

Helmets 2 helmets - plastic - adjustable width: one fireman’s helmet and one workman’s helmet. • Plastic. • L/W/H: 28 x 20 x 11 cm. 313 309 340 218 9

Make-up sticks 6 sticks in 6 colours (red, green, yellow, black, white and blue), very practical and easy to use, just like felt-tip pens. Simply remove the cap and turn the base. Soft and non-greasy, they are gentle on skin and non-irritant. • L.: 10.5 cm; Ø: 1.8 cm. 313 309 340 097 0

158

“3 Cape Set” Disguise 3 items: witch’s cape, prince’s cape and princess’s cape. • Cotton, washable at 30°C. • Easy to put on, close with Velcro®. 313 309 340 193 9


Theatre Corner Compact Dressing-up Unit Compact and sturdy, this costume and make-up unit on wheels includes an unbreakable Plexiglas make-up mirror, a clothes-hanging rail, 4 transparent plastic storage trays and 1 rail with 7 hooks. • In beech effect melamine. • L/W/H: 70 x 55 x 124 cm. W/H mirror: 40 x 100 cm. 313 309 371 229 5

Doctor

Cook Fireman

Adjustable using Velcro®.

1 apron and 1 chef’s hat. Adjustable using Velcro®. Accessories not included.

• H: 45 cm. • 100% cotton, washable at 30°C. 313 309 340 225 7

• H: 45 cm. • 100% cotton, washable at 30°C. 313 309 340 226 4

• H: 45 cm. • 100% cotton, washable at 30°C. 313 309 340 224 0

Adjustable using Velcro®. Accessories not included.

Police Officer

• H: 45 cm. • 100% cotton, washable at 30°C. 313 309 340 223 3

Adjustable using Velcro®.

159


Theatre Corner

Theatre and Puppets

POINT Small footprint with built-in storage of puppets.

6 elastic bands to hold the puppets in place

Magnets to hold the door shut

Puppet Theatre To set up theatrical activity in the blink of an eye, a puppet theatre for placing on a table or piece of furniture. Two round windows on the front allow interactions between the stage and the characters. Practical design: once the story is finished, the curtains and doors close to store up to 6 puppets. 2 year guarantee.

• Plywood, 12 and 14 mm thick, orange and blue with natural varnish finish. • Blue fabric curtains, metal curtain rod. • L/W/D: 85 x 56 x 18 cm. 313 309 336 194 3

Dog Marotte Puppet Finger Puppets for Nursery Rhymes 7 endearing coloured glove puppets to bring alive the favourite nursery rhymes and counting songs of children: Hickory Dickory Dock, Once I Caught a Fish Alive, The Teddy Bears’ Picnic etc. • In cotton and cotton velvet. • Machine washable at 30°C. • Average H.: 11 cm. 313 309 352 486 7

Plush puppet held on a wooden rod. The puppet is flexible, turning around and hiding within its cone. It is easy to handle and can be used to tell stories to children and stimulate their imagination.

Ulysses the Puppet

• In cotton, wood and cardboard. • H of puppet: 26 cm; total H: 53 cm. 313 309 352 402 7

• H.: 42 cm. 313 309 342 177 7

Ulysses the globe-trotter helps children discover the world. He encourages storytelling and questions, all on travel-related themes.

Hand Puppets

EW

These highly expressive puppets encourage roleplaying. They have hard heads and fabric clothing and hands.

Animal Hand Puppets 3 appealing, expressive hand puppets that are soft and very pleasant to the touch. Designed to develop children’s imaginations: the legs and head can be animated very easily to give them their expressions. They stand upright and can also be used as soft toys.

• Average H.: 30 cm.

• Acrylic and polyester, machine washable at 30°C. Leave to dry at room temperature then dry gently. • H: 25 cm.

Wolf 313 309 352 414 0

Girl

160

Mouse

Monkey

Crocodile

313 309 352 496 6

313 309 352 495 9

313 309 352 494 2

313 309 352 416 4

Boy 313 309 352 415 7


• A fun and original play area with its own game world. • Suitable for classroom and kindergarten spaces of all kinds. • Supplied with assembly instructions.

GUARANTEE

POINT • 6 seater. • A wide id range of possible activities.

Pretend Group Play

The Car, The Boat

Front view Rear view

The Car A fun, original play area with its own game world. Take your dolls or friends on holiday. Climb in, press the button, move into gear, indicate, and steer away. Storage space under the seats. Curved shapes and protective sides.The Car will soon become a popular feature of the classroom or play area. • In thick varnished plywood and red lacquered fibre panels. Rear-view mirror in unbreakable Plexiglas. • L/W/H: 113 x 74 x 55 cm. • H. seat: 25 cm. 313 309 370 985 1

Rear view

Play Boat All aboard! Formidable adventures are in store with this fully equipped boat in bright colours: 2 ship’s wheels, 1 serigraphed compass, 1 anchor, 1 chest with drawer, 1 movable gangplank, 2 portholes (1 closed with Plexiglas) and one mast with flag. • 18 mm plywood, plain varnish and blue and orange lacquer. • For indoor use only. • L/W/H: 156 x 78 x 95 cm (without the mast), 135 cm (with the mast). • Gangplank: 31 cm wide. 313 309 370 981 3

Raise anchor

Hide the pirate treasure

Slide through the large porthole

161


Play Corners

Farm and Animals • With its removable roof and large format, this farm allows 4 children to play at the same time. • A complete play world with animals and characters (sold separately).

Removable roof for easy interior access

The Farm A large-scale farm in varnished plywood. Its many doors and windows and a removable roof allow several children to play at once, with plenty of room for handling the animals. • L/W/H: 54 x 54 x 28.5 cm. • Delivered in kit form with assembly instructions. 313 309 371 063 5

Figurines

54

cm

• All characters and animals are in semi-hard painted plastic.

Farm characters 8 figurines: farmer, farmer’s wife, their 2 children and 4 animals: a dog, a hen, a rabbit and a donkey.

Cats and Dogs

• Farmer H: 10 cm. 313 309 345 413 3

• L/H dalmatian: 9 x 7 cm; L/H brown cat: 5 x 6 cm.

Farm Animals 9 animals: cow, goat, lamb, ewe, sheep, hen, cock, pig and horse.

162

6 animals: 4 dogs and 2 cats. 313 309 345 434 8

The Herd and their Babies 7 animals: bull, cow, calf, horse, foal, boar, sow with her piglets.

• L/H turkey: 6 x 8 cm; L/H horse: 11.5 x 8 cm.

• L. cow: 13 cm. • L. calf: 8 cm.

313 309 345 436 2

313 309 345 433 1


Play Corners

Cow-Shed Paddock A very open game board, for use on its own or with the cow-shed. Can also be used to complete the large wooden farm made from the same materials. Animals not included.

A feeding trough and 2 windows to see what is going on inside. When placed on the paddock, it is held in place by 3 bushes. Animals not included.

• In natural and red lacquered 10 mm plywood and MDF. • Requires assembly - Assembly instructions included. • L/W/H: 44 x 27 x 5.5 cm. 313 309 345 438 6

• In natural and red lacquered 10 mm plywood and MDF. • Requires assembly - Assembly instructions included. • L/W/H: 20 x 15 x 14 cm. 313 309 345 437 9

The forest

• Mat for 6 children. • Animals in their natural environment. (Animals sold separately. Semi-rigid plastic and hand-painted).

• Hemmed edges • New material

Non slip Underside

Large Nature Mat This activity mat illustrates 4 different natural environments (the countryside, the forest, the savannah and the sea) to develop animal games and stimulate the imagination. Anti-slip rubber covered with a 100% polyamide level loop carpet, the mat is very easy to roll. Sold without accessories. Washable in soapy water. • W/L mat: 150 x 100 cm. 313 309 345 414 0

Marine Animals 6 animals: polar bear, penguin, ray, tortoise, shark and dolphin. • L. bear: 13 cm. 313 309 345 432 4

The countryside

The sea

The savannah

Forest Animals In semi-hard painted plastic: wolf, fox, deer, hind, fawn, beaver, hedgehog, squirrel, rabbit and badger. • Average H: 4.5 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 345 410 2

Mother and Baby Animals

Wild Animals

In semi-hard painted plastic, wild animals represented by a mother and her baby: giraffes, elephants, tigers, hippopotamuses, zebras.

In semi-hard painted plastic: 1 rhinoceros, 1 leopard, 1 elephant, 1 zebra, 1 giraffe, 1 panther, 1 crocodile, 1 dromedary, 1 lion and 1 tiger.

• H. giraffe: 16 cm. • Set of 10.

• Average L/H: 10 x 6 cm. • Set of 10.

313 309 345 408 9

313 309 345 407 2

163


Play Corners

Animals, Playing Table EW

Soft Animals • A collection of soft, thick, light animals that are very pleasant to the touch. • Hand-painted and made from a natural material: latex.

Mare and Foal

Cow and Calf

• L/W/H of mare: 16 x 5 x 14 cm; L/W/H of foal: 11 x 4.5 x 11.5 cm. 313 309 345 462 1

• L/W/H of cow: 18 x 5 x 11.5 cm; L/W/H of calf: 10.5 x 4 x 7.6 cm. 313 309 345 463 8

Giraffe and Lion

Elephant and Baby Elephant

Ewe and Lamb

• L/W/H of giraffe: 19 x 7 x 20 cm; L/W/H of lion: 16 x 6 x 10 cm. 313 309 345 465 2

• L/W/H of elephant: 18.5 x 8 x 11.5 cm; L/W/H of baby elephant: 14 x 5 x 8.5 cm. 313 309 345 466 9

• L/W/H of ewe: 13 x 4.5 x 9.8 cm; L/W/H of lamb: 9 x 3 x 8 cm. 313 309 345 464 5

Closed

Open

138

74. cm

70

cm

5c

m

70

cm

2 YEARS +

Playing Table Stowaway children’s table for playing and storing figurines, animals or cars. Its simple shape and design lends itself to many different play worlds (house, garage, castle, farm). The table is two tables in one: the lower table which has wheels and storage compartments slides underneath when not in use. The bridge connects the two levels during play.

164

• Green lacquered varnished plywood. • L/W: 74.5 x 70 cm. • H. upper level/lower level: 27/ 21 cm. 313 309 372 494 6 Lower table on wheels


Play Corners

Doll House, Castle • A complete play world with accessories (sold separately).

2 YEARS +

Doll House This big wooden house, open on four sides, is designed so that several children can play together. Its two floors, doorways and large scale stimulate children to create their own make-believe world. Comes with a ladder. Furniture sold separately.

POINTS • Robust furniture in solid wood. • Rounded shapes. • No small parts that can be swallowed.

• H/W: 62 x 58 cm. 313 309 370 200 5

Doll Furniture Doll house furniture in solid natural wood, silk-screen printed and varnished in red.

Kitchen and Bathroom

Lounge and Bedroom

9 components: 1 kitchen unit, 1 round table and 4 chairs, 1 bath tub, 1 unit and wash basin, 1 toilet.

8 components: 1 sofa, 1 coffee table, 2 armchairs, 1 double bed, 1 desk, 1 chair and 1 sideboard.

• L/W/H kitchen unit : 8 x 4 x 6 cm; Ø/H round table: 9 x 5.5 cm; H/W chair: 4 x 7 cm; L/W bath tub: 12 x 7 cm. 313 309 370 203 6

• L/W/H sofa: 12 x 6 x 6 cm; L/W/H table: 7 x 7 x 3 cm; H/W armchair: 5 x 6.3 cm; L/W/H bed: 16 x 9.8 x 6.3 cm. 313 309 370 204 3

Families • These dolls can stand up and the braided body can be bent to bring them to life. • Wooden heads and feet.

European Family

African Family

• H.: 13/12/11/10.5 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 333 170 0

• H.: 13/12/11/10.5 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 333 241 7

3 YEARS +

The Castle Square-built and very sturdy, this fortified castle creates endless play situations for several children at a time. The drawbridge is raised using a small cord, crimped at the end to hold it. Bottomless, the castle ambiance changes depending on the surroundings (carpet, grass, etc.). Crenels are slightly rounded. Comes with a wooden ladder. • Made of varnished plywood, red-lacquered drawbridge. • L/W/H: 47.5 x 37.5 x 26.5 cm. • Characters sold separately. 313 309 370 201 2

165


Play Corners

Garages, Road Circuit • A set of garages, vehicles and accessories to bring the car corner to life.

2 YEARS +

Multi-Level Garage A parking garage in varnished plywood big enough for several children to play together. Red wooden tubes support the floors. Traffic flows easily up and down 6 ramps connecting the 3 levels. • L/W/H: 51 x 41 x 32 cm. • Comes in kit form, cars sold separately. 313 309 371 015 4

Service Station Hard-wearing and comprehensive: 1 access ramp, 1 fixed vehicle lift, 2 petrol pumps, 2 mobile rollers and a shop corner. For use on its own or combined with the large garage so that up to 6 children can play with it. • L/W/H: 30 x 40 x 14 cm. • In clear varnished and green lacquered plywood. • Requires assembly. • Assembly instructions included, cars not included. 313 309 371 166 3

Non-slip underside

Road Mat This lively coloured mat fosters children’s imagination and enables them to grasp the concepts of organising space. Anti-slip rubber covered with a 100% polyamide level loop carpet. Easily rolled up to facilitate storage. Sold without accessories. Washable in soapy water.

166

• L/W mat: 150 x 100 cm. 313 309 333 185 4

POINTS • A large play sppace for 4-6 children. • Each E h side id can be “connected” to a 2nd mat to expand the game.


Play Corners

Lift

Two way door

Car wash rollers

Garage Station On 3 storeys, accessible by 3 ramps and 1 lift. With 2 gates to open and close, 1 two-way door, 2 car wash rollers, 1 petrol pump, parking spaces and a helipad. For 4 children. • In varnished plywood with a natural and yellow finish. • L/W/H: 61 x 50 x 39 cm. 313 309 371 160 1

Petrol pump

Little People The European family and the mixed-race family with mother, father, daughter and son. Each doll can be in a sitting or standing position. • H. standing: 5.5 cm. • Set of 8. 313 309 363 056 8

Wooden Vehicles

Wooden Cars

In stained solid wood: Jeep, 4x4, taxi, Formula 1, van, bus.

Varnished wooden cars in three colours. The wheels are permanently attached and roll on any surface.

• Silent wheels in flexible plastic. • Average L/W/H: 4.8 x 2.5 x 3.5 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 333 283 7

• L/W/H: 6.5 x 3.2 x 3.5 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 333 069 7

Race Track 4 cars race around a circuit on levels. • Wood. • H: 24 cm. • L: 25 cm. • Car L/W: 4 × 3 cm. 313 309 399 384 7

Toy Road Signs Made of unvarnished wood, the main signs regulating road traffic. • H.: 6 cm. • Set of 14. 313 309 333 173 1

167


Play Corners

Vehicles • A range of plastic vehicles with rounded edges in bright, permanent colours. • The soft, silent rubber wheels are attached by special non-removable rivets.

Mobile ladder 14 c

m

16 cm

Ambulance and Fire Engine 4 vehicles: 2 ambulances with opening rear door, and 2 fire engines with mobile ladder. • L: 14 cm. 313 309 333 299 8

Building-Site Trucks

25 cm

In robust, rigid plastic, 4 trucks with different functions.

Large Fire Engine

• L: 16 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 333 169 4

• With 2 characters. • L: 25 cm. 313 309 387 140 4

Big Lorries These 2 large plastic lorries are strong and articulated. They can be used for many different loading and unloading games. They have wide, very quiet wheels.

Detachable shovel Inclining carrier bed

25

cm

Trucks Dumper truck and tank truck that can be filled and emptied, rotating cement-mixer.

Dump Truck

Tractor-Digger

• L/W/H: 25 x 12 x 15 cm. • Set of 3. 313 309 387 083 4

• L/W/H: 31 x 23 x 21 cm. • Wheels L: 5 cm. 313 309 387 165 7

• L/W/H: 41 x 19 x 18 cm. • Wheels L: 5 cm. 313 309 387 166 4

7 cm

Sports Cars

168

9 cm

Family Cars

A collection of soft plastic cars: F1 racers, Porsches, convertibles and Renault Alpines.

A collection of soft plastic vehicles: Volvo 760, Ford Scorpio, Mercedes 300, Saab 900 convertible.

• L/W: 7 x 5 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 333 074 1

• L/W: 9 x 5 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 333 075 8

7 cm

Plastic Vehicles 8 vehicles: sports car, 4-wheel drive car, small van, fire engine, ambulance, airliner, private plane, helicopter. • L: 7 cm. 313 309 332 983 7


Play Corners

Train Set • To create a dynamic play world - easy to assemble wooden parts: wooden rails, train, animals. A wooden bridge can be added as well as a passenger train.

POINT Excellent quality finish.

Wooden Train Set A full circuit made up of: 10 rails including 1 bridge, 1 locomotive, 3 carriages, 3 signals, 2 buildings, 2 trees and 2 animals. • Circuit dimensions: 60 x 44 cm. • 25 pieces. 313 309 345 457 7

Express Train This express train comes with 1 carriage and 2 locomotives, enabling children to choose the direction of the train and turn it round. • L/W/H: 37 x 3.5 x 5 cm. • 3 pieces. 313 309 345 458 4

Magnetic coupling system Front / Back

Reversible curves enabling bends to the left and right.

The Station Bridge-Viaduct A Bridge-Viaduct to add extra detail to the Rail Circuit and expand the zoo play universe. • L/H: 37 x 7 cm. • 3 pieces. 313 309 345 454 6

Extra Rails 16 rails with assorted points. 313 309 345 456 0

Wooden station with two decorated façades, one with clock. Rails integrated in the platform, mobile signals and a bench. The roof is transparent. • L/W/H: 19 x 12.5 x 15 cm. 313 309 345 459 1

169


Play Corners

Water and Sand Equipment Double Water Basin This double unit in thick resistant plastic contains two basins of different depths separated by a lock. A channel runs all around the edges to keep the water flowing. Fitted with a drainage tap, height-adjustable and caster-mounted. • Basin L/W/H: 130 x 78 x 30 cm; H. from floor to basin edge: 51 to 64.5 cm; weight: 14 kg; depth basin: 23/16 cm. • Storage Shelf sold separately. 313 309 373 135 7

Storage Shelf This red shelf in flexible plastic fits the metal frames of all the basins, for storing all water game accessories. • L/W/H: 80 x 72.5 x 7 cm. 313 309 373 136 4 Drainage tap

Storage Shelf sold separately

Height-adjustable

Playing Surface Cover Thick varnished fibre panel with rounded angles for fitting inside the edges of the Double Water Basin so that its surface can be used as an activity area. Its casters and handles make it easy to move it about. • L/W: 132 x 81 cm. 313 309 373 139 5

Caster-mounted

POINT 2 trays of differing depths to enable the flow of water between them, or for fun with different materials such as sand and gravel.

Water and Sand Basin A play area with two interconnecting levels. Water and sand can be moved up and down two ramps. Fitted with a drain, stopper and 2 casters.

Legs fitted with casters

• L/W/H tub: 97 x 74.5 x 22 cm. • H. from floor to edge: 50 to 63 cm. • Weight: 1 kg. • Storage Shelf sold separately. 313 309 373 122 7

2 handles make it easy to move about

Storage Shelf This red shelf in flexible plastic fits the metal frames of all the basins, for storing all water game accessories. • L/W/H: 80 x 72.5 x 7 cm. 313 309 373 136 4

POINTS

Storage Shelf sold separately

170

Height-adjustable

• Water and sand basin designed for 4 to 6 children. • Robust metal structure. • Height-adjustable.


Play Corners

Small Transparent Sand and Water Tub

Many possible uses (can be placed on the ground)

A strong plastic transparent tub with raised edges to help children experiment and see their results. The tub is fitted with a valve for emptying. It comes with a cover, which can be placed under the tub for placing accessories, and has height-adjustable tubular legs (44-58 cm), equipped with casters and a brake. • L/W/H: 89 x 63 x 44 or 58 cm. • Depth of tub: 23 cm.

Height adjustable

313 309 373 007 7

Shelf

Casters make this tub easy to move about

Handling Tray Garden Tools 6 tools - hard-wearing metal with wooden handles for small hands: 2 rakes and 4 spades in 2 different shapes. • L. spade: 21 cm. • L. rake: 15 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 333 314 8

2 hard-wearing spades and rakes, made of plastic, in 2 matching colours.

A rectangular plastic tray to fill with water, sand, grains or soil. Can be used freely by several children, indoors or out, for handling or building games or for creating plantations. Hangs on a wall after use.

• L.: 15 cm. • 4 pieces. 313 309 333 315 5

• In thick, rigid, red plastic. • L/W/H: 70 x 50 x 17 cm. 313 309 333 330 8

Spades and Rakes

Boats Spades

4 different models of plastic boats (sailing boats, rowing boats, tugs and trawlers) which can be hooked together front to back.

Handles are contoured to fit the shape of children’s fingers. 3 colours.

Small Ladles

• L: 23 cm. • Set of 12.

• Ø: 8 cm; L. handle: 6 cm. • D: 4 cm.

• L/H: 11 x 6.5 cm (except sailing boat, 13 cm high). • Set of 8.

313 309 333 054 3

313 309 333 061 1

313 309 333 155 7

Adapted for small hands, 6 ladles in 3 different colours.

Sieves A variety of sizes with different grades of mesh. 3 colours. • L: 22 and 16.5 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 333 131 1

Have fun with running water

Pouring Containers

Perforated Small Ladles

In thick resistant plastic. 3 colours.

In thick resistant plastic, 3 different sized recipients. 3 colours. Not suitable for children under 36 months.

• Ø/H: 18 x 16 cm. • Set of 6.

• H. blue pitcher: 13 cm; Ø: 24/19/15 cm. • Set of 3.

• Average L/W/H: 11.5 x 10 x 3 cm. • Set of 36.

• Ø: 8 cm; L. handle: 6 cm. • Depth: 4 cm.

313 309 333 053 6

313 309 333 043 7

313 309 380 020 6

313 309 333 309 4

Buckets

Sand Moulds 16 means-of-transport moulds and 20 animal moulds. 4 colours.

12 small ladles in 4 different colours for fun letting water or sand flow through the little holes.

171


172


To discover... N NEW

Artistic Activities Musical Instruments Audio Games

P.175

rtistic activities such as music, painting, drawing etc. develop children’s listening skills, self-expression through movement, manual dexterity, imagination and creative spirit from the earliest age. Selected and designed with the greatest care, our instruments, our supports, accessories and tools offer all kinds of artistic possibilities that children will love to use, while encouraging their creativity.

A

Music

EW

Instruments

p. 174

Arts and Crafts

Illustrated Stickers Creating People

P.179

Stickers

p. 176

Things to Decorate

p. 180

Materials

p. 187

Paper and Cardboard

p. 191

Markers and Felt-tips

p. 192

Painting and Accessories

p. 194

Stencils

p. 198

Foam Stamps

p. 199

Modelling and AfďŹ xing

p. 200

Beads and Accessories

p. 202

NEW N

Marionettes for Decorating

P.180 173


Music

Instruments

Large-bar Metallophone

Dring, dring, dring: 8 bells on metal handles; clip clap: small plastic discs; chang chang: 2 pairs of small metal cymbals; chu chu chu: wheel of pearls.

Mounted on a wooden sounding box for excellent resonance, 8 long bars measuring 11 to 15 cm, with wide spacing between attachment points for easy striking. Screw-on natural metal bars, from C to C, solid wood base with natural varnish finish. Sold with 2 mallets in natural wood.

• L: 12 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 380 405 1

• L/W/H: 25 x 15.5 x 3 cm. • L. mallet: 19 cm. 313 309 380 493 8

Musical Rattles

Soprano Recorder

Small Maracas

Small Rain Sticks

Soft-toned recorder, baroque fingering.

• Ø maracas: 5.8 cm. • Made of plastic. 313 309 380 362 7

• L/Ø: 20 x 5 cm. • Set of 2. 313 309 380 292 7

• L: 32 cm. 313 309 380 489 1

Cuckoo and Dove Bird Calls

Cymbals

Two wooden instruments to faithfully imitate birdcalls.

With fabric handles for striking together.

• L: 8 cm and 10.5 cm. 313 309 380 487 7

• Ø: 20 cm. 313 309 380 479 2

2-Tone Wooden Guiro 2 notched tubes of different lengths and a wooden scraper stick in two tones. 313 309 380 481 5

2-Tone Woodblock Two-tone musical tube with sleeve and wooden stick. • L. woodblock: 19.5 cm. 313 309 380 486 0

Tambourines In wood, natural skin and metals. • Ø: 20 cm.

Bongos

174

A pair of varnished wood drums, with natural skin. Tuning key included.

Rhythm Tambourine

Tambourine with Jingle Cymbals

Tambourine without Skin

• Ø/H bongos: 19 and 16 cm x 17 cm. 313 309 380 316 0

Made with natural skin.

With 6 pairs of jingle cymbals.

With 6 pairs of jingle cymbals.

313 309 380 490 7

313 309 380 477 8

313 309 380 478 5


Music

3 YEARS +

Musikit These high quality instruments allow teachers to organise workshops for learning about music. With 20 rhythmic instruments, this very complete set can be used to equip a class or music workshop. It comprises: 1 tambourine with drumskin, 1 tambourine with jingle cymbals, 1 tambourine without drumskin, 2 triangles, 2 pairs of claves, 1 wooden guiro, 1 two-tone woodblock, 1 single-tone woodblock, 1 guiro-maracas, 2 pairs of wood maracas, 2 pairs of finger cymbals, 1 pair of cymbals, 2 jingle bell bracelets, 2 pairs of plastic castanets. All supplied in a bag with pockets, handles and attachment points for easy storage and transport. • Instruments in solid wood, natural skin and metal, plastic castanets. • Ø tambourine: 20 cm; cymbals: 15 cm. • L. maracas: 15 cm; triangles: 10 and 14 cm; claves: 17 cm; guiro-maracas: 15 cm. 313 309 380 245 3

Instrument Holder Bag 313 309 380 244 6 18 cm

EW

Language game 16 photo boards

24 cm

4 YEARS +

6 CHILDREN

For setting up activities around spoken language, listening and discovery of the world on the theme of musical instruments. • Language game: by looking at the photo boards, children learn to recognise different instruments, their family (strings, wind, percussion, etc.), what they are made of (wood, brass, metal, plastic, etc.), their origin, their sound and so on, and acquire an accurate vocabulary. • Audio lotto games: several activities with progressively increasing difficulties around 36 different sounds, to develop listening, discrimination and aural memory. • L/W of photo boards and lotto boards: 24 x 18 cm. • Ø token: 3.5 cm. • The box contains: 16 cardboard photo boards, 6 cardboard lotto boards, 36 plastic tokens, 1 CD lasting 40 minutes and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 226 0

18 cm

Musical Instruments Audio Games

Lotto games 6 lotto boards 24 cm

1 CD lasting 40 minutes 36 tokens

Cords go through slit between lids.

Portable Listening Unit

Stereo Headphones

Very compact and lightweight, this listening unit is easy to carry around, facilitating listening workshop activities. It has two covered compartments which hold up to 26 CDs, 11 audio cassettes, 1 multiheadphone adapter, etc. Headphones hang up on the crossbar. The side storage area can be used for documents (maximum format A4).

Comfortable lightweight, adjustable headphones, specially designed for young children. For individual listening or use in workshops.

• L/W/H: 33 x 32 x 43 cm. • L/W/D compartment: 27 x 14.5 x 16 cm and 27 x 12 x 16 cm. • In thick varnished plywood, red finish on lids. 313 309 372 836 4

• Fitted with 3.5 mm jack. • Ø headband: 3.5 cm. • Ø speakers: 7 cm. 313 309 379 048 4

Stereo MultiHeadphone Adapter To create listening groups and eliminate interference, this adapter allows children to plug in their headphones 5 at a time and listen to the same CD. • Fitted with 3.5 mm jack. • L. jack: 3.5 cm. 313 309 379 049 1

175


Arts and Crafts

Stickers

POINT Precut stickers for easy use.

1.450

1.800

STICKERS

STICKERS

2.5 cm

2 cm

Stickers - Circle

Stickers - Geometric Shapes

1.450 stickers. 16 sheets. 3 sizes in 8 assorted colours.

1.800 stickers. 16 sheets. 3 shapes in 8 assorted colours and 2 sizes.

• Ø: 2.5/2/1 cm. 313 309 321 252 8

• L/W: 2 x 1 cm. 313 309 321 326 6

1.400

380

500

STICKERS

STICKERS

4 cm

STICKERS

4 cm

4 cm

Stickers - Fancy Shapes

Maxi Stickers - Bears

Maxi Stickers - Geometric Shapes

1.400 stickers. 16 sheets. 8 shapes in 8 assorted colours.

380 stickers. 16 sheets. 3 sizes in 8 assorted colours.

500 stickers. 16 sheets. 10 shapes in 8 assorted colours.

• L/W: 1.2 x 1 cm. 313 309 321 254 2

• L/W: 4/3.5/2.8 cm. 313 309 321 253 5

• Average L/W: 3 x 2.5 cm. 313 309 321 327 3

320 STICKERS

3 cm

680

STICKERS

STICKERS

3 cm

2 cm

Metallic Stickers - Party

Metallic Stickers - Fantasia

320 stickers. 10 sheets. 5 assorted metallic colours: gold, silver, blue, red and green.

620 stickers. 10 sheets. 19 shapes and 5 assorted metallic colours: gold, silver, blue, red and green.

680 stickers. 10 sheets. 15 different designs in 5 metallic colours: pink, green, turquoise, gold and silver.

• L.: 3 cm. 313 309 321 324 2

• Average H: 2 cm. 313 309 321 323 5

• Average size: 2 cm. 313 309 321 322 8

Metallic Stickers - Stars

176

620


Arts and Crafts

Colouring-in Stickers Shapes and background suitable for colouring in: non-slip matt paper for use with felt-tip pens, pastels, coloured pencils, etc., compact shapes to avoid tearing, easy to separate corners.

360 430

400

STICKERS

STICKERS

STICKERS

POINT Moveable

2.7 cm

3 cm

4 cm

Number Colouring-in Stickers

Alphabet Colouring-in Stickers 430 black and white stickers: 26 letters and 8 accents and signs (1 to 4 copies per sheet), half of which include patterns to provide decoration ideas. 12 sheets. • H: 3 cm. 313 309 321 403 4

400 black and white stickers with 35 simple, evocative designs: animals, methods of transport, flowers, decorations. 12 sheets.

360 black and white stickers with the numbers 0 to 9. 3 examples of each number are presented, 2 of which have a pattern to encourage colouring-in. Supplied on 6 detachable strips to make them easy to share out amongst the pupils. 12 sheets.

• Average L: 3.2 cm. 313 309 321 402 7

• L/W: 3 × 3 cm. 313 309 321 405 8

Various Designs Colouring-in Stickers

960

450

1.750 STICKERS

STICKERS

STICKERS

1.8 cm 1.9 cm 2 cm

Counting Stickers

Chromatic Stickers - Sea

960 stickers: 26 capital letters and one hyphen. 4 assorted colours. 16 sheets.

1.750 stickers. 28 sheets. Figurative stickers and counting dots from 1 to 5, numbers from 0 to 9 and round stickers for number association.

• H. letter: 1.9 cm. 313 309 321 321 1

• Average H.: 1.8 cm. 313 309 321 209 2

• Average size: 2 cm. 313 309 321 352 5

Capital Letter Stickers

450 chromatic stickers printed in 4 colours. 6 sheets. 24 different marine plants and animals.

500

420

STICKERS

STICKERS

Self-adhesive Outlines 2 cm

Chromatic Stickers Nature 500 chromatic stickers printed in 4 colours. 6 sheets. 25 different designs. • Ø small flower: 1.9 cm; L. flower: 2.3 cm. • Ø ladybird: 1.7 cm; L. butterfly: 3 cm. 313 309 321 349 5

A clever and original way of decorating greeting cards or surfaces such as paper, card, glass or plastic. Each sheet contains small, self-adhesive shapes that form a gold or silver outline, thus preventing the child from going over the edge when colouring in. 16 sheets with 4 different themes: dolphins, clown fish, flowers and animals. • L/W: 10 x 24.5 cm. 313 309 340 300 1

Stickers - Eyes 210 pairs of eyes on photo paper, very realistic. 15 sheets. 7 different styles. • Ø eye: 3 cm. 313 309 321 266 5

177


480

STICKERS

STICKERS

3.2 cm

3.2 cm

Arts and Crafts

500

Illustrated Stickers - The Castle

Illustrated Stickers - Children of the World

500 stickers. 12 sheets. 4 colours based on the theme of the castle, with 40 characters.

480 stickers. 12 sheets. 4 colours, 40 different girls and boys from all over the world.

• Av. H: 3.2 cm. 313 309 321 328 0

• Av. H: 3.2 cm. 313 309 321 332 7

500

480

820

STICKERS

STICKERS

STICKERS

Illustrated Stickers Figurines

Illustrated Stickers Wild Animals

500 stickers. 12 sheets. 4 colours based on the theme of the farm. 17 different characters and animals.

820 stickers. 12 sheets. 16 different motifs in 4 colours.

480 stickers. 12 sheets. 17 different wild animals in 4 colours.

• H. frog: 2 cm; H. horse: 3.5 cm; H. hen: 2.7 cm. 313 309 321 325 9

• Average H: 2 cm. • H. tree and house: 3.5 cm. 313 309 321 239 9

• Average size: 3 cm. 313 309 321 319 8

750

750

430

STICKERS

STICKERS

STICKERS

4 cm

2.7 cm

4.3 cm

Illustrated Stickers Shapes and Colours

Illustrated Stickers - Jobs

750 stickers. 18 sheets. 23 different motifs in 4 colours.

750 stickers printed in 4 colours, 3 different shapes: hearts, circles and stars with highly varied designs and colours. 12 sheets.

430 stickers. 12 sheets. 20 jobs - easy to recognise, name and use. Most are duplicated in different colours and positions.

• Average H: 3.5 cm. 313 309 321 238 2

• H. large heart/small heart: 2.7 cm and 2 cm. 313 309 321 333 4

• H: approx. 4 cm. 313 309 321 334 1

Maxi Illustrated Stickers Party

178

2 cm

3 cm

3 cm

Illustrated Stickers Farm Animals


POINT

Can be repositioned during activity.

Delayed-effect sticking action action.

600

540

STICKERS

STICKERS

4.5 cm

6.5 cm

Illustrated Stickers - Creating People 600 stickers. 12 sheets. Hats, heads, bodies and legs: 50 parts to build together into 13 characters in a logical way, or free creation of funny or surprising combinations.

Illustrated Stickers - Garden

• H: 2 to 3 cm. 313 309 321 335 8

• H. mother: 4.5 cm; H. daughter: 3 cm. 313 309 321 331 0

540 stickers in 4 colours that can be repositioned to create various scenes on the theme of the garden. 12 sheets. 20 different illustrations.

560

550

STICKERS

STICKERS

3.1 cm

3 cm

Illustrated Stickers - Seasons

Arts and Crafts

S t i c k e r s

POINT

560 stickers. 12 sheets. 4 colours on the theme of the seasons, illustrated by clothes and accessories, animals, plants, fruit, trees and the weather.

Photo Stickers - Farm Animals

• Size: 1.5 to 3 cm. 313 309 321 330 3

• H. chick: 1.2 cm; L/H cow : 4.5 x 3 cm. 313 309 321 401 0

550 stickers. 12 sheets. 46 photos of farm and wild animals. Relative sizes respected.

POINT

POINTS

Photo stickers..

• Detachable strips. • Delayed-effect sticking action.

450

560

STICKERS

STICKERS

2.1 cm

3 cm

Maxi Illustrated Stickers - Little Creatures

Photo Stickers - Foods

450 stickers in 4 colours that can be repositioned. Large format and rounded shapes arranged over 4 detachable strips make them easier to use for toddlers. 16 sheets.16 different, fun and decorative animals.

560 stickers. 12 sheets. 47 photos representative of each food group (meat, fish, dairy products, starchy foods, cereal-based products, sugary foods, fruits, vegetables).

• L: 3 cm. 313 309 321 318 1

• H. pineapple: 3.3 cm; L. carrot: 4 cm. 313 309 321 404 1

179


Arts and Crafts

Things to Decorate EW

Marionettes for Decorating 15 precut bears and 15 precut characters to decorate with the child’s choice of materials and assemble using brads (sold separately). 4 precut accessories for decoration can be stuck onto the marionettes. • 15 boards, 2 characters/board. • H: 23 cm. 313 309 340 240 0

Multicoloured Brads 120 brads for creating, decorating or attaching pieces together (paper flowers, marionettes for decoration, etc.) as the child wishes. 2 different sizes and 6 different colours. • Metal. • Ø of head: 0.5 and 0.8 cm. 313 309 379 120 7

Giant Tree to Decorate Tree in thick cardboard for decoration all year round as a group activity. The tree is easy for the children to customise, perhaps as a four seasons tree or festive tree, with cotton, Christmas decorations, Easter eggs, drawings of animals, flowers, dead leaves, acorns, etc. • 6 pieces for the trunk and 3 pieces for the top of the tree. • Assembly instructions. • H/W: 95 x 77 cm. • Weight: 0.75 kg. 313 309 340 301 8

Crowns 32 cardboard crowns to decorate. 4 different models.

180

• L/H flat: 53.5 x 9.5 cm. 313 309 340 145 8


Arts and Crafts Baskets for Decorating

Lanterns for Decorating

32 precut, grooved baskets for decorating, with 4 different models. The baskets can be filled with sweets, chocolates, trinkets, etc., with or without the handle.

32 grooved lanterns for decorating, with 4 different precut models that can be used to slide objects inside, brighten up Christmas trees or classrooms during the festive season, etc.

• L/W/H completed basket without handle: 9.5 x 9.5 x 4 cm.

• H/W completed lantern: 11 x 5.5 cm.

313 309 340 205 9

313 309 340 203 5

Bookmarks

Photo Frames

30 precut and grooved bookmarks for decorating, including 6 different animal models.

30 3-section photo frames in 6 different precut, grooved models for decorating to enhance a photo.

• Average H: 15 cm.

• L/H: 22 x 11 cm.

313 309 340 216 5

313 309 340 215 8

Figure Frames Cards for Decorating 36 cards for decorating, with 6 different precut models that can be used for writing little poems and tender words to loved ones. • L/W folded card: 11 x 11 cm. 313 309 340 204 2

30 precut figures to decorate (15 girls and 15 boys) and customise with an identity photo. The notches on the arms allow them to be hooked together. They can be hung up or stood up using the self-supporting feet. • H/W: 15 x 11.5 cm; Ø of photo space: 3.5 cm; light card grammage: 350 g. 313 309 339 412 5

181


Arts and Crafts

Decorating Kits SEE ALSO

• Figurative shapes in white cardboard to cut out and decorate.

• Cabochons • Paper and Cardboard

p. 189 p. 191

Blank Books Cardboard covers.

Large Size

Small Size

3 books, 24 pages each.

3 books, 20 pages each.

• L/W: 32 x 24 cm. 313 309 339 346 3

• L/W: 22 x 19 cm. 313 309 339 348 7

Frames for Decorating Landscape Format 10 notebooks of 32 pages each. 3 printed lines at the bottom of each page for writing. Soft cover. • L/W: 21 x 15 cm. Weight: 80 g. 313 309 324 246 4

An assortment of 30 square frames and 30 round frames, in 2 sizes. In very thick cardboard, can be decorated with felt-tip pens, stickers or glued items: crystals, glitter, colour pompoms, mosaics, etc. • Ø square frame: 11 and 21 cm. • Ø round frame: 11 and 21 cm. • Set of 60. 313 309 340 150 2

Robust handles in twisted brown paper

Calendars for Decorating 5 monthly calendars in white cardboard to decorate.

182

• L/W: 29.7 x 21 cm. Weight: 120 g. 313 309 340 175 5

Bags for Decorating 20 craft paper bags for decoration. • H/W/D: 21 x 18 x 8 cm. • Weight: 110 g. 313 309 340 178 6


Arts and Crafts

Fabric Supports • A range of textile supports for customisation and decoration. • 100% cotton, washable at 30°C.

Aprons

Bags to Decorate

Shopping Bags Small Model

15 aprons with one large pocket.

12 bags to hold small objects and gifts.

20 shopping bags.

• L/W: 60 x 50 cm. 313 309 370 084 1

• L/W: 20 x 20 cm. 313 309 370 300 2

• L/W: 28 x 24 cm.

Shopping Bags Large Model

Pencil cases to decorate

Purses

20 shopping bags.

12 pencil cases with zip closure.

20 purses with a zipper and key ring.

• L/W: 38 x 42 cm.

• L/W: 21.5 x 13.5 cm. 313 309 370 158 9

• L/W: 8.5 x 7 cm.

313 309 370 079 7

Dimensional Fabric Paint

Fabric Paint

Fabric paint that swells with heat, creating an embroidery effect. Clean with water before drying. Comes in 30-ml bottles.

Ready-to-use gel suitable for any fabric, natural or synthetic. Colours are set with an iron. Cleans with water. Comes in 100-ml bottles.

• 6 colours: red, yellow, green, blue, violet and black. • Set of 6 bottles.

• 6 colours: red, pink, yellow, green, blue and black. • Set of 6 bottles.

313 309 351 001 3

313 309 351 281 9

313 309 370 078 0

313 309 370 149 7

Fabric Markers These markers can be used on all kinds of fabric. The drawing is set by ironing the reverse side of the cloth, making it machinewashable in warm water. Assortment of 10 colours. • L: 14 cm; Ø: 4 mm. • Set of 10. 313 309 351 433 2

183


Arts and Crafts

Papier Mâché and Wooden Shapes for Decorating

Multi-Boxes for Decorating Sturdy cardboard boxes in 5 different shapes (square, round, rectangle, hexagon and star).

Treasure Chests for Decorating 15 treasure chests to decorate and fill with treasure.

• L/W/H rectangle: 10 x 6 x 5 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 340 139 7

• L/W/H: 8 x 5.5 x 5.5 cm. 313 309 340 207 3

1 original model

Mini-notebooks

Small Trays

15 mini-notebooks in cardboard to decorate and personalise.

5 papier mâché trays for decoration.

• L/W: 8 x 6 cm. 313 309 340 217 2

• L/W/H: 22 x 16 x 5 cm. 313 309 340 197 7

Miniframes

Candle Holders

Sturdy cardboard frames. 4 shapes (square, round, oval and heart-shaped).

15 papier mâché candle holders to be decorated, with 2 different models: heart and flower.

• L/W: 7.5 x 7.5 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 340 169 4

• L/W/H: 8 x 7 x 2 cm. • Candle holder: Ø 4 cm. 313 309 340 211 0

Wooden Bracelets 10 wooden bracelets in 2 sizes to paint. • Ø/W: 7 x 2.5/2 cm. 313 309 339 485 9

Large Wooden Buttons

10 papier mâché handbags in rounded shapes for decoration.

Egg Cups 30 wooden egg cups for decorating.

60 large wooden sewing buttons in 3 different shapes: flower, butterfly and star, for stringing together to make necklaces, or for pasting to different surfaces. They can be decorated using paint (gouache, acrylic, etc.), felttip pens, paper or other decorative accessories.

• H/W: 8 x 12.5 cm. 313 309 340 195 3

• Ø: 4.5 cm; H: 4.5 cm. 313 309 339 470 5

• Average size: 6.5 cm. 313 309 339 409 5

Handbags

184


Wooden Magnets 32 wooden magnets in 8 different shapes: house, elephant, whale, teddy, sweetie (or girl’s head), character, giraffe and T-shirt to decorate with paint (gouache, acrylic, etc.), felt-tip pens, paper or other decorative accessories. • Average size: 6 cm. 313 309 339 407 1

Wooden Key Ring

t o

D e c o r a t e

Decorative Bottle Openers 16 wooden bottle openers to decorate: 8 girls and 8 boys. • In wood and metal. • H/W/thickness: 10 x 5 x 0.8 cm. 313 309 339 468 2

Christmas Trees for Decorating

32 wooden key rings in 4 different shapes: heart, flower, car and fish for decorating using paint, (gouache, acrylic, etc.), felt-tip pens, paper or other decorative accessories.

10 Christmas trees with rounded corners, made up of 2 parts that easily slot together. The trees are made stable thanks to their base. 5 trees have holes to thread strings or raffia, for example.

• Average size: 6 cm. 313 309 339 408 8

• L/W/D: 14 x 11 x 0.3 cm. 313 309 339 402 6

Dressing-up Characters

Arts and Crafts

T h i n g s

Wooden Stars

20 wooden characters.

15 wooden stars, made up of 2 parts that easily slot together. They are drilled to allow them to be hung up using string or raffia.

• L: 14 cm. 313 309 340 176 2

• H/W/thickness: 11 x 10 x 0.3 cm. 313 309 340 232 5

Potted Flowers to be Decorated Coloured Sticks • L/W: 11 x 1 cm. • Set of 1.000. 313 309 350 224 7

10 wooden flowers with rounded edges, in 2 different models: daisy and tulip. A 2-part base that easily slots together makes the flower very stable. • H/W/thickness: 14.5 x 11 x 0.4 cm. 313 309 339 410 1

185


Arts and Crafts

T h i n g s

Plastic Supports

t o

D e c o r a t e

EW

Vases to Decorate 16 transparent plastic vases for decoration with all-purpose felt tip pens, metallic felt tip pens, raised effect felt tip pens or acrylic paint. The vases can be filled with water, fine sand or small stones.

Masks

• H/W: 27 x 15 cm. • Set of 16.

10 plastic masks for decoration, fitted with an elastic string. Can also be used as moulds.

313 309 350 232 2

• H.: 16.5 cm. 313 309 340 179 3

Magic Plastic

Transparent Shapes Transparent shapes in hard plastic. Each shape opens in 2 parts and can be decorated or filled with light objects: balls, star, bell, Santa Claus, Christmas tree. All these objects can be hung up. • H. bell: 10 cm; Ø ball: 6 and 8 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 350 225 4

Hanging Christmas Decorations 8 different shapes in transparent plastic to be decorated with Deco pens, glitter, raisedeffect pens, paper (tissue paper, patterned cardboard), beads, raffia, etc. and hung up.

Plastic which heat-shrinks to make brooches, tags, key-rings. After colouring the matt surface with coloured pencils, cut out the plastic as shown. When baked, it shrinks and becomes 3 times thicker and smaller. Not for use with felt-tip pens. Pencils may be used.

• Average H/W: 10 x 7 cm.

• L/W sheet: 30 x 20.5 cm. • Set of 10 sheets.

313 309 350 229 2

313 309 318 012 4

Polystyrene Shapes

186

Eggs

Wreaths

Balls

Hearts

30 eggs.

15 wreaths.

50 balls.

15 hearts.

• Ø: 45 and 60 mm.

• Ø: 15 cm.

• Ø: 60, 80 and 100 mm.

• H.: 9 cm.

313 309 350 228 5

313 309 350 226 1

313 309 350 227 8

313 309 350 230 8


Arts and Crafts

Materials Mirrors Unbreakable plastic covered with reflective film. Can be attached with glue to any material (cardboard, wood, etc.).

Square Mirrors

Felt Sheets

• L/W/D: 12 x 12 x 0.15 cm. • Set of 10.

25 sheets of felt in 7 assorted colours. Easy to cut up.

313 309 340 100 7

313 309 339 488 0

• L/W: 31.5 x 22.5 cm.

Round Mirrors • Ø/D: 12 x 0.15 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 340 154 0

Sponge Sheets Synthetic sponge sheets, easy to cut with scissors or a craft knife, can be glued onto various surfaces. 4 assorted colours. • L/W: 30 x 20 cm. • Set of 14. 313 309 339 490 3

6,7 cm

Fun Shaped Hole-Punches 4 hole-punches with waste storage, with a flexible press to punch holes effortlessly. 4 fun shapes (heart, flower, star, fir tree). • L. of cut: 2 to 2.5 cm. • L/W/H: 6.7 x 4 x 6 cm. 313 309 348 078 1

Sponge Shapes 600 synthetic sponge shapes in bright colours which can be stuck to various materials. • Average L: 4 cm. 313 309 339 508 5

187


Arts and Crafts

Alumargent Sheets Annealed aluminium foil designed for the repoussé technique. Silver-coated on both sides.

Rhodoid

• L/W/D: 27 x 20 cm x 6/100. • Set of 20 sheets.

10 transparent plastic sheets for window decorations and mobiles. For use with Stained Glass Paint and Lead Piping.

313 309 340 107 6

313 309 380 243 9

Mosaic Chips Plastic mosaic chips in 9 lively assorted colours. Simple to use with white tube glue for a variety of surfaces: wood, glass, cardboard, tin, plastic.

10 mm

Coloured Wood Mosaic Chips To paste onto any rigid surface. 4 assorted colours.

• Average dim: 1 cm; 225 g. • + 1000 chips. 313 309 339 502 3

• L/W/D: 1 x 1 x 0.2 cm. • 4 bags of 500 g. 313 309 339 495 8

Glitter

Multi-Coloured Spangles

Shiny powder in 5 different colours to glue on all surfaces.

Sparkling spangles to glue onto a variety of surfaces.

• 5 x 50 g jars. 313 309 339 507 8

• Comes in 50 g shaker jar. 313 309 339 501 6

9 mm

7 mm

Heart and Star Shaped Studs

188

7 mm

Approximately 460 studs in transparent, coloured plastic, for sticking on all surfaces. 2 shapes, 12 colours.

Decorative Shapes

• L. heart: 0.7 cm; L. star: 0.9 cm.

• Size: 0.7 to 3 cm.

313 309 339 505 4

313 309 339 535 1

Approximately 230 decorative shapes in different precious materials for sticking on all surfaces.

30 mm


Paper flowers 30 paper flowers in 5 different bright, sparkling colours and 2 different shapes for use on various media, stuck and/or linked together with a brad.

M a t e r i a l s

Multicoloured Brads 120 brads for creating, decorating or attaching pieces together (paper flowers, marionettes for decoration, etc.) as the child wishes. 2 different sizes and 6 different colours.

• Ø: 2 to 5.5 cm.

• Metal. • Ø of head: 0.5 and 0.8 cm.

313 309 339 540 5

313 309 379 120 7

Arts and Crafts

EW

Raffia To decorate various objects by weaving or gluing (lamp shades, clothes, hair, etc.). 125 g rolls (about 260 m), 6 assorted • Set of 6. 313 309 339 498 9

22 mm 33 mm

Wiggle Eyes Personalise puppets, characters and other creative projects with these eyes that stick on a variety of surfaces. An assortment of black and coloured eyes. • Ø: 2/1.8/1.5/1 cm. • Set of 200. 313 309 339 500 9

Self-adhesive Precious Stones

Cabochons In transparent coloured plastic, for sticking or moulding. • L/W large star: 3.3 x 3.3 cm. • In 7 shapes and 6 assorted colours. • 1 bag of 960 g. 313 309 315 052 3

Sticky Butterfly Cloth Flowers 118 bright little motifs in high-quality fabric, in 2 shapes and sizes, in 4 different shades, matt and glossy. 6 sheets. • Ø: 3/2.2 cm. 313 309 340 005 5

Glitter Frieze Stickers

136 sticker stones in transparent, coloured plastic, for sticking on all surfaces. 1 shape, 3 different sizes and 8 colours.

Small Organza Bags 15 organza bags, 4 different colours. For giving small gifts or storing jewels.

45 glittery friezes with 3 different shapes and 6 bright assorted colours. Cut-up and stick onto all surfaces. 9 sheets.

• Large square L: 0.6 cm. 313 309 315 059 2

• L/W: 10 x 7.5 cm. 313 309 340 233 2

• L/W: 30 x 0.5 cm. 313 309 340 013 0

189


Arts and Crafts

M a t e r i a l s

EW

Self-adhesive Ribbons

Striped Pipe Cleaners

8 rolls of sticky tape that can be applied to rice paper, which children can then write on with a felt tip pen or writing pen. Easy to unstick. Can be used on paper, fabric, glass, wood, metal, etc.

100 pipe cleaners with stripes in 7 different colour combinations. Silky and flexible, for creating, embellishing and decorating. Very easy to handle.

• L/W: 10 m x 1.5 cm.

• L/Ø: 30 x 0.5 cm. 313 309 340 234 9

313 309 339 539 9

190

Sparkle Pipe Cleaners

Assorted Pipe Cleaners

10 assorted colours, velvety-soft and flexible.

10 assorted colours, velvety-soft and flexible.

• L/Ø: 30 x 0.6 cm. • Set of 100.

• L/Ø: 50 x 0.8 cm. • Set of 100.

313 309 340 167 0

313 309 340 174 8

Locks of Hair

Fancy Feathers

Coloured Feathers

Synthetic hair and beards in 3 colours to glue on paper, cardboard, wood, etc.

Approx. 300 guinea-fowl feathers, uniform or speckled.

Approx. 100 brightly-coloured turkey feathers.

• 150 g. 313 309 339 486 6

• L: 1 to 5 cm. 313 309 340 099 4

• L: 7 to 15 cm. 313 309 340 140 3

Pompoms

Shiny Pompoms

8 assorted colours.

8 assorted colours.

Coloured pompons with a hole in the middle to string onto yarn, laces, pipe-cleaners etc.

• Ø: 3.5/2.5/1.2 cm. • Set of 200.

• Ø: 2/1 cm. • Set of 120.

• Ø: 4/3/2/1.5 cm. • Set of 200.

313 309 340 161 8

313 309 387 011 7

313 309 340 172 4

Pompom Beads


Arts and Crafts

Paper and Cardboard Folding paper Paper specially adapted to folding activities. 500 sheets: 10 lively colours.

Coloured Drawing Paper Squares

Rounds

• Side: 15 cm; weight: 65 g. 313 309 370 012 4

• Ø: 15 cm; weight: 65 g. 313 309 370 013 1

50 large-format sheets of paper in 25 assorted vat-dyed colours. • L/W: 50 x 35 cm; weight: 130 g. • Set of 50 sheets. 313 309 370 041 4

Brads sold separately

Tissue Paper

Transparent Paper

Pearl Paper

Dyed paper for decorating, folding activities and making bouquets. 8 assorted colours.

25 large-format sheets of transparent paper in 10 assorted colours. Filter light when coloured.

• L/W: 75 x 50 cm; weight: 18 g. • Set of 24 sheets.

• L/W: 70 x 100 cm; weight: 42 g. • Set of 25 sheets.

• L/W: 23 x 33 cm. • Weight: 160 g.

313 309 380 205 7

313 309 370 049 0

313 309 370 082 7

Animal Motif Paper

Corrugated Cardboard

18 two-sided sheets with 6 different animal patterns: dalmatian, leopard, tiger, zebra, snake, cow, etc. Ideal for decorating boxes, frames.

20 sheets of micro-corrugated cardboard in 10 assorted vat-dyed colours. Very easy to cut.

Card for Cutting

• L/W: 25 x 35 cm. • Weight: 300 g.

• L/W: 35 x 50 cm. • Weight: 250 g.

• L/W: 40 x 30 cm. • Weight: 435 g.

313 309 370 040 7

313 309 370 038 4

313 309 380 236 1

Pearl-effect coloured textured paper, printed both sides. 10 sheets of 10 assorted colours.

20 sheets of card, one white side, one grey side.

191


Arts and Crafts

TIP:

Markers and Felt-tips

Should only be used in guided activity under adult supervision.

Fine Markers

Broad Felt-Tip Pens

12 markers, assorted colours.

Assortment of 12 colours.

• L.: 14 cm; Ø tip: 2 mm. • Set of 12.

• L.: 12.5 cm; Ø tip: 6 mm. • Set of 12.

313 309 351 801 9

313 309 351 802 6

POINTS • Crush-proof. • Water-washable. W t h

EW

MAGNETIC 2 YEARS + PIECES

Fabric Markers Felt-tip Pens 10 pens with different effects for use in stamping and decorating children’s work. Pack of 10 different colours. Washable inkremoved from hands using soap and water. • L.: 14 cm. 313 309 340 219 6

These markers can be used on all kinds of fabric. The drawing is set by ironing the reverse side of the cloth, making it machinewashable in warm water. Assortment of 10 colours. • L: 14 cm; Ø: 4 mm. • Set of 10. 313 309 351 433 2

Magnetic Erasable Whiteboards Whiteboards that can be written on and/ or have magnetic items put on them. For everyday classroom activities. For use with felt tip pens that are erasable with water. • Plastic and metal. • L/W: 33 x 24 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 375 149 2

Whiteboard Markers with Fixed Tip • Whiteboard markers, also usable on plastic, glass, and paper. • Washes clean with a wet sponge. • 8 assorted colours.

Graphic Slates

Whiteboard Markers

192

Fine Board Markers

• L.: 12 cm; Ø tip: 4.5 mm. • Set of 8.

• 8 assorted colours. • L: 14 cm; Ø tip: 3 mm. • Set of 8.

313 309 351 810 1

313 309 387 102 2

Erasable transparent plastic slates for coloured pencils and water-based felt-tip markers. Lines can be erased using an eraser or damp cloth. • L/W slate: 30 x 21 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 305 105 9


Arts and Crafts Universal Markers

Raised-effect Pens 6 small tubes in 6 colours, used just like felt-tip pens. Thick texture applied directly from the tube for a surprising raised effect. Can be used on all surfaces: wood, metal, card, plastic, clay, fabric. The glistening colours give an immediate decorative effect to children’s creations: pearl bright red, pearl carnation green, pearl capri blue, pearl white, brilliant black, sparkling gold. Clean with water before dry. • 37 ml tube. • Screw-off cap, fine nozzle.

6 markers to decorate different surfaces: paper, card, wood, plastic, glass, metal, papier mâché etc. Wipe clean with a damp cloth on smooth surfaces, indelible on porous surfaces, remove with water once dry, wash ink from hands using soap and water. • Marker L: 14 cm; Ø tip: 4 mm. 313 309 340 220 2

313 309 351 826 2

Glitter Gel Perfect for festive craft projects, decorating objects or cards, these 6 glitter markers in sparkling colours clean with water. Assortment of 6 colours. • 10 ml each. • Set of 6. 313 309 351 817 0

Metallic Markers For decorating different surfaces: paper, cardboard, plastic, glass, metal. Clean with water before drying. Assortment of 5 colours. • L.: 13.5 cm; Ø tip: 5 mm. • Set of 5. 313 309 351 435 6

Pencils

Actual Size

Maxicolour

My First Pencils

Coloured Pencils

Pack of 12 short pencils. Chunky easy-tohandle pencils: all the better for drawing clear lines and colouring.

Pack of coloured pencils in 12 assorted colours with hard-wearing lead. In easy-tosharpen wood.

Pack of 12 pencils in 12 assorted colours. These thick coloured pencils provide better grip and make tracing and colouring easier for little hands.

• L/Ø: 8.5 x 1 cm.

• L/Ø: 18 x 0.7 cm.

• L/Ø: 18 x 1 cm.

313 309 380 107 4

313 309 380 114 2

313 309 380 113 5

193


Arts and Crafts

Painting and Accessories

POINTS • High covering capacity and excellent light resistance resistance. • Allows use of a wide variety of techniques. • Can be mixed with Coline glue (see p. 197). • Non-toxic ingredients of natural origin.

Gouache Creacolour • Ready-for-use, high-density gouache with high pigment concentration. • Non-drip, ideal for use with an easel. • Adapted for all porous media: paper, card, canvas, wood, earthenware, plaster, cellulose. • May be diluted with water.

1-litre container

Creacolour n°2

2-litre container

• 6 colours: orange, pink, ultra-marine, brown, purple and spring green.

• 1-litre containers (6) 313 309 351 023 5

Creacolour n°1 • 6 colours: vermilion, green, lemon, cyan blue, white and black.

TIP:

• 1-litre containers (6). 313 309 351 022 8

Easy to clean from both hands and clothes: remove excess and wash.

• 2-litre containers (6). 313 309 351 024 2

Acrylic Paint • Acrylic paint is a plastic-based paint that is indelible once it is dry.

SEE ALSO Activity Side Table

194

p. 262

Acrylic Paint

Gloss Paint

Opaque acrylic paint for all surfaces. Can be used face-to-face (folding) for glazed effects using superimposed colours. Clean with water before drying.

Ready-to-use gloss acrylic paint which polymerises on contact with air and forms a glossy waterproof film when dry. Can be thinned with water and used on any surface. Clean with water before drying.

• 5 colours: pink, yellow, green, blue and black. • 5 measuring-cap bottles containing 250 ml. 313 309 351 000 6

• 5 colours: red, green, yellow, blue and white. • 5 bottles containing 250 ml. 313 309 351 006 8


Sheer gloss paint suitable for glass, transparent film, aluminium and terracotta. Ready-to-use, it can be thinned and cleaned with alcohol. • 6 colours: pink, yellow, orange, green, blue and purple. • 6 bottles of 100 ml.

313 309 351 252 9

Arts and Crafts

Stained Glass Paint

Colorine Drawing ink whose 5 concentrated shades are used pure or thinned with water; can be layered and blended together. Clean with water. • 5 colours: red, green, yellow, blue and pink. • 2 assortments in 250-ml bottles.

Poster paint rubbing Thick black, uniform poster paint to spread evenly on media previously worked with thick chalk, wax or Colorine. After scraping, the colours in the sub-layer appear. • 2 jars of 125ml. 313 309 351 010 5

313 309 351 002 0

Non-spill Paint Pots 6 flexible plastic pots. They consist of 3 parts: a transparent pot, a funnel-shaped hole to prevent liquid spilling out and a hermetically-sealed lid with 2 slots for inserting paint brushes. In 6 different colours. • H. with lid: 7.5 cm. • Ø: 8 cm. 313 309 349 040 7

Paint Pot Holders 2 plastic paint pot holders for easy transport of up to 12 paint pots without spillage. Used with anti-spill paint pots. • L/W/H: 30 x 19 x 7 cm; Ø hole: 7.5 cm. • Set of 2. 313 309 339 467 5

Overalls Long-sleeved loose-fitting overalls in soft waterproof nylon. Velcro® fastener in the back. Assortment of 3 colours. Comes in 3 sizes.

Medium Size • L/W: 60 x 45 cm. • Set of 3. 313 309 385 102 4

Paint Roller Palettes 4 palettes in rigid plastic.

XS Size

• L/W/H: 54 x 26 x 4.5 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 387 074 2

• L/W: 53 x 35 cm. • Set of 3. 313 309 385 098 0

EW

Large Size • L/W: 67 x 54 cm. • Set of 3. 313 309 385 101 7

195


Arts and Crafts

Tactirollers 12 mini plastic and foam rollers, funny and original for sliding onto a finger, to dip in Créacolour® gouache and to roll onto a sheet of paper. 4 different prints.

Shapes Rollers

• L/Ø: 5.5 x 1.4 cm. 313 309 385 030 0

• L.: mark: 10 cm; Total L: 17.5 cm. 313 309 385 031 7

5 rubber rollers for use with Créacolour® gouache. 5 different fantasy prints.

Picture Rollers Christmas and Easter 8 rubber rollers to create delicate and detailed patterns. Short soft plastic handle ensures a good grip. Used with Creacolour® Gouache.

10 large foam cylinders complete with different foam shapes: snowman, stars, gifts, sleigh, hen, eggs, rabbits, etc. Size and shape make it easy to grip for toddlers.

• W. mark: 4 cm. • L. handle: 7 cm. 313 309 385 005 8

• W. mark: 6.5 cm. • L. handle: 7 cm. 313 309 385 003 4

Fun Rollers

196

Paint Pattern-Rollers 1

Paint Rollers

Colour Rollers

Foam cylinders on soft plastic handles.

Foam cylinders on soft plastic handles.

Foam cylinders (3 large and 1 small) with 4 different cut-out designs and plastic handles.

• L/Ø: 4.5 x 3 cm. • Set of 5. 313 309 349 020 9

• L/Ø: 7 x 4.5 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 387 010 0

• Av. W. of design: 7 and 2.5 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 385 008 9

Broad Sponge Brushes

Fine Sponge Brushes

Paint Pattern-Rollers 2

Foam tips, 2 different sizes and shapes, soft plastic handles.

Foam tips, 3 different shapes, soft plastic handles.

Foam cylinders (3 large and 2 small) with 5 different cut-out designs and plastic handles.

• H/W: 7 x 7 cm; 7 x 5 cm; 6 x 3 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 385 164 2

• H/W: 5 x 1.5 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 351 445 5

• W. design: 7 and 2.5 cm. • Set of 5. 313 309 385 007 2


a n d

A c c e s s o r i e s

Ergonomic Stamps Materials Stamps 4 stamps in different materials to make 4 original prints. Short plastic handles ensure a good grip. • L.: 13 cm (average). 313 309 385 303 5

8 flexible plastic stamps to make geometric and freeform shapes (4 geometric and 4 freeform shapes). Ergonomic handles for easy gripping. • L: 14 cm; Ø shape: 2.5 cm. • Set of 8. 313 309 385 032 4

Tactifingers

Fun Finger Stamps

Soft plastic finger stamps with 3 different prints so that children can vary their patterns.

16 practical, fun and novel soft plastic stamps that slide onto the finger for easy creation of pretty patterns. 8 different prints.

• L/Ø: 3 x 1.8 cm. • Bag of 30. 313 309 351 647 3

Arts and Crafts

P a i n t i n g

• Ø: 3 cm. 313 309 385 004 1

Right-Handed Scissors

Left-Handed Scissors

• L: 12 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 348 014 9

• L: 12 cm. • Set of 5. 313 309 348 008 8

POINTS • Can be used on all surfaces, pure or diluted. • Dries quickly: 3 - 4 mins.

POINT Protects colours permanently against UV light.

Coline Glue

Glue Brushes

White vinyl glue with paste consistency. Provides a transparent gloss on drying. Suitable for: paper, wood, earthenware, plaster, cellulose, polystyrene, glass, enamel, fabric, felt.

Synthetic bristle brushes, hard-wearing and easy to clean. Wooden shaft, aluminium ferrule.

• 2 l bottle with handle. 313 309 348 059 0

• L/W: 17.5 x 0.7 cm. • Set of 50. 313 309 351 566 7

• 5 l bottle with pouring lip and handle. 313 309 348 058 3

Varnish Quick-drying glossy varnish for all surfaces. To obtain a matt finish add up to 50% water and stir. Brushes can be cleaned with alcohol. • 500 ml bottle. 313 309 351 312 0

197


Arts and Crafts

Stencils Frame Stencils The decorative motifs can be used as a pattern. • L/W: 21 x 29.7 cm.

Fun Round Stencils Christmas Frame Stencils

Stencil Frames

• Set of 4 frames in A4 format. 313 309 351 438 7

• Set of 4 frames in A4 format. 313 309 351 439 4

Christmas Stencils

4 different attractive forms for decoration of all rounded shapes. • Ø: 15 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 351 037 2

6 different designs on the theme of Christmas.

Transport and Animal Stencils

Fruit and Vegetable Stencils

Letter Stencils

• L/W: 15 x 14 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 351 427 1

• L/W: 15 x 14 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 351 432 5

• L/W: 15 x 14 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 351 430 1

• W/H: 11 x 9 cm. • Set of 26. 313 309 351 407 3

26 stencils from A to Z.

Large-sized lines and pictures for easier use by younger children. The large shapes make handy models once detached.

Number Stencils 10 large stencils from 0 to 9. • L/W: 22 x 15 cm. 313 309 351 408 0

Rubbing Tiles Animal Skins Large Farm Animal Stencils

198

4 double-sided tiles, 8 designs.

Hard plastic tiles with raised patterns on both sides. To reproduce the pattern, place a sheet of paper on the tile and scribble with chalk, colour pencils or pastels.

• L/W tile: 15 x 15 cm. 313 309 385 025 6

• L/W tile: 15 x 15 cm. 313 309 385 035 5

6 stencils on the theme of farm animals.

Large Shape Stencils Christmas Rubbing Tiles 12 stencils, 12 different shapes.

• Sides: 20 cm. • Pack of 6. 313 309 351 402 8

• Sides: 20 cm. • Pack of 12. 313 309 351 403 5


Arts and Crafts

Foam Stamps Transparent Foam Stamps 3 YEARS +

The arrow indicates the direction of the motif

• Transparent foam stamps with a large, round coloured handle that is easy to hold. Can be used with gouache or an inkpad. • Av. L. of stamped pattern: 6 cm. Visible motif

Easy grip thanks to the handle

Capital Letter Stamps

Number and Counting-dot Stamps

26 stamps of the 26 capital letters of the alphabet.

20 stamps of the numbers from 0 to 9 and counting dots from 1 to 10.

313 309 385 018 8

313 309 385 019 5

Stamps in Geometric Shapes

Figurative Rubber Stamps

14 different stamps.

14 stamps in hard rubber with different figurative patterns.

313 309 385 028 7

313 309 385 015 7

Transportation Stamps

Farm Animal Stamps

14 stamps depicting different means of transport.

14 different stamps on the theme of farm animals.

313 309 385 017 1

313 309 385 020 1

Stamps - Sea life

Season Stamps

14 different stamps on the theme of the sea life.

14 different stamps.

313 309 385 029 4

313 309 385 024 9

199


Arts and Crafts

Modelling and Affixing TIP:

3 YEARS +

Should only be used in guided activities under adult supervision.

Modelling Clay • Easy to work for toddlers and very resistant once dry. No chemical properties. • Does not dirty hands or clothes.

Basic Modelling Clay

Pastel Modelling Clay

6 x 250 g blocks in 6 different colours.

6 x 250 g blocks in 6 different colours.

• 6 blocks. 313 309 339 033 2

• 6 blocks. 313 309 339 030 1

Potter’s Clay • These natural clays are ideal modelling materials. Shaped easily by hand, they can also be worked with various tools and modelling sticks. • Air-hardens without baking. Objects can be strengthened by applying a coat of varnish. • Can be oven-baked (minimum temp. 1.000°C).

Plastanat

Red Clay

White plastic modelling material, ready-to-use. Air-hardens without baking. Must be moistened to join pieces together. Once dry, it darkens and can be sculpted, painted with gouache and varnished.

• 10 kg bag. 313 309 339 028 8

• 2 kg bag. 313 309 339 034 9

White Clay

200

• 10 kg bag. 313 309 339 029 5

Assorted Punches 12 figurative shapes in plastic. • L/H: 7.5 x 7 cm. 313 309 387 065 0

SEE ALSO Overalls

p. 195


Arts and Crafts Modelling Pattern-Rollers 2 Modelling Pattern-Rollers Varnished natural wood, 4 different patterns. • Total L: 17 cm; Ø: 3.5 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 349 016 2

Modelling Tools 10 wooden tools treated so that clay does not stick as it dries: 1 spatula, 1 double-ended hole cutter, 1 toothed wheel, 1 crocodile, 1 modelling stick, 4 different shaping chisels, 1 rolling pin. • L: 15 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 349 011 7

Tools made of hard plastic for modelling clay: 2 cutting wheels (1 straight and 1 squiggly), 1 smooth clay rolling pin and 4 different patterns. • L/Ø handle: 14 x 3.5 cm. • L/Ø wheel: 18.5 cm x 6.5 cm. • Set of 7. 313 309 349 014 8

Modelling Rolling Pins Plain wood. • Total L: 20 cm. • Ø: 3.5 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 349 025 4

SEE ALSO Multi-activity Table p. 262

EW

Duo-art Modelling and Painting Tools 3 painting and modelling tools with two ends for making 6 different patterns. Ergonomic handles with an anti-slip surface to make gripping easier. • L: 13 to 17 cm; W: 3.4 cm. 313 309 385 033 1

201


Arts and Crafts

Beads and Accessories 38 mm

ACTUAL SIZE

20 mm

Fun Wooden Maxi-Beads

111 wooden beads in different shapes and sizes, 4 different colours.

20 wooden beads in 7 different shapes (3 animals: chicken, cat, rabbit) and 6 assorted colours (blue, yellow, red, green, orange and white). Supplied with 2 x 1 metre cotton laces. Suitable for children under 36 months.

• Ø. bead: 10 to 20 mm. • Ø hole: 2 to 5 mm. 313 309 380 071 8

• Ø round bead: 45 mm. • Ø cat: 38 mm. 313 309 315 058 5

Wooden Beads

ACTUAL SIZE

18 MONTHS +

35 mm

Translucent Maxi-Beads

Babybeads 48 plastic beads in 4 shapes and 4 different colours.

Plastic, translucent, large-sized, an assortment of 6 colours and 6 shapes.

• Edge of cube: 3.5 cm. • Ø sphere: 4.5 cm. 313 309 315 000 4

• Ø: from 1.7 to 2.5 cm. • Approx. 100 beads. 313 309 315 151 3

18 mm

ACTUAL SIZE

ACTUAL SIZE

3 YEARS +

Figurative Beads

Plastic, large-sized, an assortment of 6 colours and 6 shapes.

Large plastic beads in a variety of shapes and 6 colours.

• Ø: from 17 to 25 mm. • Approx. 100 beads. 313 309 315 150 6

• L: 20 mm. • Set of 192. 313 309 315 053 0

18 mm

20 mm

Maxi-Beads

POINT ACTUAL SIZE

6 mm ACTUAL SIZE SIZE ACTUAL

Fun Colour Beads

Animal-Shaped Beads

202

• L: 20 mm. • Set of 192. 313 309 315 054 7

20 mm

Big plastic beads, 8 different animals in 9 assorted colours.

3 types of beads: Opaque bbeads O d Pearly beads Transparent beads

Beads in transparent, opaque and pearly plastic, in 6 different colours and 9 different shapes, to create beautiful pieces of jewellery. Not suitable for children under 36 months. • Ø: from: 6 to 14 mm. • Approximately 1.800 beads in a case with compartments. 313 309 380 066 4


ACTUAL SIZE

Loose Beads

Matt Beads

Glass beads in assorted colours.

Made of plastic, 13 assorted colours.

• Ø: 3 mm. • 500 g. 313 309 315 115 5

3 mm

• Ø: 7 mm. • 500 g. 313 309 315 123 0

ACTUAL SIZE

Arts and Crafts

ACTUAL SIZE

7 mm

ACTUAL SIZE

Star Beads Transparent plastic beads in 10 pastel colours that can be strung or snapped together. • Ø hole: 2 mm; total Ø: 18 mm. • Ø: 8 mm. • Approximately 340 beads. 313 309 380 062 6

Ring Beads Plastic and easy to thread. In 11 different translucent colours. 18 mm

• Ø: 16 mm. • Set of 500. 313 309 315 124 7

16 mm

Lacing

Maxi Laces Acrylic. Extra wide. 5 assorted colours.

Rayon Laces

• Total L: 1.25 m. • Ends: 5 cm. • Set of 15. 313 309 303 008 5

Assortment of 4 colours. • L: 1 m. • Set of 32. 313 309 303 013 9

Plastic Laces Assortment of 5 colours. • L: 1 m. • Ends: 5 cm. • Set of 30. 313 309 303 018 4

Nylon Thread • L/Ø: 100 m x 0.4 mm. • 3 rolls. 313 309 318 015 5

203


204


Furniture

To discover... NEW

A

well designed classroom layout will aid children’s education and development. Children must be able to freely develop in this organised space dedicated to discovery and experience. That is why we have designed our modular furniture so that it creates a harmonious, safe environment which can be adapted for children of different ages. All of our products comply with current manufacturing and safety standards, as well as satisfying the quality requirements specific to use in a group: choice of materials, quality in terms of manufacture, assembly and finish.

Spaces for Toddlers Activity Units for Assembly - Clorofile

P.218 NEW

Partitionettes and Bush Supports - Clorofile

p. 206

Mats, Cushions, Mobile

p. 208

Wall Panels

p. 210

Actimousse® for Little Ones

p. 212

Mini Actibaby

p. 214

Spaces for Older Children Activity Units Fully Assembled - Clorofile

p. 216

Activity Units for Assembly - Clorofile

p. 218

Nathan House

p. 224

Tables, Chairs - Clorofile

p. 226

Actibaby

p. 228

Communal Areas

Mobile Cloakroom

P.232 NEW

Display Boards

p. 231

Reception Area

p. 232

Gathering Corner

p. 234

Seats, Mattress, Cushions

p. 236

Library Furniture MobiNathan Library Furniture

p. 238

Double-sided Library Furniture

p. 240

Display and Shelving Units

p. 242

Book Boxes: Individual or Grouped Units

p. 244

Storage Units

Storage Units - Clorofile

P.246

Storage Units - Clorofile

p. 246

Storage Units MobiNathan

p. 248

Units with Shelves and Doors

p. 250

Units with Pigeonholes

p. 251

Units with Trays

p. 252

Plastic Trays

p. 255

Back Units

p. 256

Storage Boxes and Trays

p. 257

Activity Equipment Artistic Activities

p. 258

Computer Corner

p. 263

205


Spaces for Toddlers

Partitionettes and Bush Supports - Clorofile • A range of 6 partitions and 5 Bush Supports to combine to create safe, fun living spaces. • In decorated, varnished wood. Easy to open for an adult Attaches to the wall with the connector

7.5 m² configuration (3.18 x 2.45 m): 1 big door, 2 adjustable partitions, 2 openwork partitions, 1 activity partition, 1 mirror partition, 2 fixed angle high bush supports, 4 high bush supports, 2 low bush supports, 2 partitionette connectors.

Bush supports are doubled up for greater stability

Fun partitionettes

Protective Pieces for Bush Supports 4 protective pieces to prevent damage to high bush supports or to cover edging that is already damaged. Attached at 3 points with very strong sticky tape (provided).

Bush Supports • In lacquered MDF and 15 mm birch plywood.

• L/W/D: 75 x 45 x 25 mm. 313 309 372 540 0

Low Bush

Fixed Angle Low Bush

High Bush

Straight construction with dark green finish.

Right angle construction with dark green finish.

Straight construction with light green finish.

• L/H: 57 x 43 cm. 313 309 372 531 8

• L/W/H: 34 x 34 x 43 cm. 313 309 372 530 1

• L/H: 57 x 60 cm. 313 309 372 529 5

Partitionette Connector

Fixed Angle High Bush

206

Variable Angle High Bush

Right angle construction with green finish.

Two uprights freely fixed at an angle between 45 and 155°. Light green finish.

• L/W/H: 34 x 34 x 60 cm. 313 309 372 528 8

• L/W/H: 34 x 34 x 60 cm. 313 309 372 527 1

Consists of a support section and a bush section. Allows activity units to be connected to partitions, and partitions to be attached to the wall. • Support in 18 mm varnished birch plywood. • Bush in 15 mm varnished painted birch plywood. • Overall dimensions: L/W/H: 39 x 27 x 50 cm. 313 309 372 388 8


• In 15 mm birch plywood.

Activity Partition

Panel with curved gaps to peek through.

A mobile element (with a flower on one side and a butterfly on the other) to be moved up the zigzag slot before it spins back down by itself, and a game with 5 balls on a string.

• W/H: 89 x 68 cm; W. gap: 4 cm. • Fixing centre: 70 cm. 313 309 372 487 8

• W/H: 89 x 68 cm. • Fixing centre: 70 cm. 313 309 372 522 6

Openwork Partition

Window Partition 2 round windows. The largest is closed off with transparent Plexiglas. • W/H: 105 x 80 cm; Ø window: 24 x 8.5 cm. • Flower decoration on one side. • Fixing centre: 89 cm. 313 309 372 485 4

Spaces Encastrements for Toddlers

Partitionettes

Big Door • Highly resistant: solid wood spindle, door frame with braced uprights, can be locked shut by adults (elastic tie). • Anti-noise and anti-pinching system. • For optimum stability, we recommend doubling up the straight bush supports around the door. • In natural varnished 15 mm plywood and MDF board with a blue finish and green silk-screen printing.

Mirror Partition A large unbreakable Plexiglas mirror with inaccessible edges. Flower decorations on the reverse side. • W/H: 105 x 80 cm; L/H mirror: 74 x 57 cm. • Fixing centre: 89 cm. 313 309 372 484 7

Double up the straight bush supports attached to a door.

• W. base: 36 cm. • W/H: 114 x 80 cm. • L. opening: 59.5 cm. • Fixing centre: 103 cm. 313 309 372 526 4

Adjustable Partition Allows the configuration of each space to be adjusted. Centre distance adjustable from 70 to 85 cm. Partition decorated on both sides. One side allows for Manipano Activity Panels to be attached (see p. 222). • In 15 mm plywood. • L/H: 96 x 72 cm. • Centre distance adjustable from 70 to 85 cm. 313 309 372 577 6

Adapts to any space Centre distance adjustable from 70 to 85 cm

Installation recommendations SEE ALSO For greater stability and resistance to pushing from children, we recommend you double up the bush supports back to back.

Partitionnettes Combination Options pp. 220-221

To calculate the length of the assemblies, add up the centre distances, i.e. the distances between the upper attachment screws. Example

Fixing centre Total length

From 346.8 to 361.8 cm

207


Spaces for Toddlers

Mats, Cushions, Mobile Confort Mats • 4 mats to provide bright, comfortable protection in partitioned or open spaces. • Double stitching on 4 sides provides good wear. • Colours and formats matching Clorofile partitions.

280 cm

100 x 50 Technical information 100 x 90 cm

100 x 90 cm

200 cm

• In 28 kg/m3 inaccessible density foam. • Coated fabric fireproof coating. • Non-slip underside. • Thickness: 4 cm. 150 x 100 cm

OM

W IT

P LI E S RD

C

180 x 100 cm

H STAND

A

REGISTRATION No phthalates

Mix and match the 4 formats to cover your area

208

Comfort Mat - Green

Comfort Mat - Light Blue

• L/W: 100 x 50 cm.

• L/W: 150 x 100 cm.

313 309 387 408 5

313 309 387 410 8

Comfort Mat - Yellow

Comfort Mat - Navy Blue

• L/W: 100 x 90 cm.

• L/W: 180 x 100 cm.

313 309 387 409 2

313 309 387 411 5


Spaces Encastrements for Toddlers Easy to move

3 MONTHS +

Nest Baby Cushion A large, soft cushion for babies and for older infants to curl up comfortably. The fabric is very comfortable and pleasant to the touch, and is also waterproof.

3 MONTHS +

• Interior padding covered in waterproof fabric. • Exterior cover in cotton velvet, attached using elastic. • Machine washable at 30°C. • Green and blue, orange interior. • Ø: 80 cm. • H: 18 cm. 313 309 372 881 4

Wooden Babygym To stimulate the baby’s senses, a wooden mobile that is stable, easy to transport and modular. The complete set includes 1 wooden mobile and 3 nature mobiles. • Velcro® fastener. • L/H mobile: 93 x 59 cm. L/H of opening: 65 x 47 cm. • Mobiles washable at 30°C. 313 309 399 325 0

Spare Cover 313 309 372 889 0

OM

W IT

P LI E S RD

C

150 cm

H STAND

A

EN 71-2

100 cm

Flammability

37

cm

12 MONTHS +

Bolster - Large Model

Manipano

Orange with light green ends. • L/Ø: 150 x 22 cm. 313 309 372 878 4

Bolster - Small Model

Two-tone Square Cushion

Light green with orange ends.

Light green sides and base, orange top.

• L/Ø: 100 x 22 cm. 313 309 372 879 1

• L/W/H: 37 x 37 x 18 cm. 313 309 372 880 7

Fun activities for developing young children’s dexterity and fine motor skills. Manipano can be placed on the floor in two different positions so that the different activities can be accessed whilst the toddler is sitting or standing. • In varnished wood, comprising 10 activities. • H/W: 55.5 x 45.5 cm. 313 309 345 100 2

209


Spaces for Toddlers

Wall Panels

Foam padding, 2 cm thick.

6 MONTHS +

Sea World Wall Panel A large, padded panel to protect small children and create a soft corner with marine animals that can be attached by Velcro® anywhere on the panel! Includes a shellfish that opens and closes, a piece of seaweed for touching and a storage pocket. Specially designed for creating large backgrounds by juxtaposing several panels. Supplied with Velcro® attachments on all 4 sides and metal mounting eyelets for wall mounting with screws (screws not provided). • Panel in polyester fabric, quilted polyester padding. Animals in cotton velvet. Machine washable at 30°C. • L/W: 138 x 112 cm. • Thickness: 1.5 cm. • Supplied with 4 animals, the backs of which adhere to the panel. 313 309 345 429 4

POINT Practical! Can be attached to the wall using the metal eyelets or Velcro® strips provided.

Area layout with 2 Sea World Wall Panels and 1 set of 2 Wave Mats.

Velcro Marine Animals Additional pack of 4 animals to attach with Velcro® on the Sea World Wall Panel, or on any other suitable surface. • Set of 4: goldfish (L. 17 cm), orange starfish (Ø 15 cm), green seahorse (L. 22 cm), orange crab (L. 22 cm). Adherent on the back (rough side). Thickness: 1.5 cm. In quilted cotton velvet. Machine washable at 40° C. 313 309 345 428 7

Wall Mirror A large oval mirror and 5 small round mirrors for infants to play and find their own image! A wooden frame with rounded corners surrounds the mirrors. This can also be attached with 5 small upper mirrors (or with small mirrors below for babies, or arranged vertically). Can be combined with the wall-mounted bar. • In varnished birch wood, clear varnish; unbreakable Plexiglas mirror. • Attached at 2 points, wall screws not supplied - to be adapted according to material. • L/W/thickness: 95 x 76 x 1 cm. • Ø small mirrors: 8 cm. 313 309 372 542 4

Wall-mounted Bar A support bar to help babies stand up. On two levels, 8 cm apart, they help babies hoist themselves up to two heights and encourage them to move around. Attachable to the wall at the required height. Can be combined with the wall mirror. • In green epoxy lacquered metal. • Wall screws not supplied - to be adapted according to material. • Bar/wall space: 6 cm. • L: 103 cm. • Ø: 2 cm.

210

313 309 372 541 7

Wave Mats - Set of 2 These two thick, comfortable mats are ideal for children to play on in playing and rest areas. They can be assembled using the self-fastening strips to form a semi-circle. • In soft, resistant coated fabric, light blue, 5 cm thick, anti-slip, M2 anti-fire treated, foam filled with a density of 24 kg/m3 which is inaccessible thanks to a hidden closing fastener. • Used to cover a quarter-circle area measuring 140 x 140 cm. 313 309 372 861 6


Spaces Encastrements for Toddlers

Manipano Activity Panels • 4 panels, 4 actions, 4 sensory objectives: touch, fine motor skills, sight and hearing. • These panels allow for experimentation and stimulate children’s imaginations. • The wall mounting kit is sold separately.

Mounting Kit This kit allows you to mount Manipano products on the wall or on Activity Units. 313 309 373 226 2

Visual Moving the handle makes two different visual effects appear.

Tactile

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 196 6

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 198 0

Audio

Gestural

The two wheels turn to produce two different sounds.

Spiral path for experiencing circular movement.

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 197 3

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm.

3 different materials to discover.

313 309 375 199 7

12 laminated cards that slide under the grid Panel that can be used by 2 children simultaneously

2 YEARS +

Wall-mounted Maxicoloredo® Vertical tiling activity consisting of a wall-mounted panel overlaid with a transparent stud grid. Dual-sided pattern cards are provided representing figurative drawings or mosaics that slide under the grid. Children fill in their drawings with round pieces that are simply pressed onto the stud grid. These pieces are stored in the tray on the panel provided for this purpose. • L/W panel: 68 x 58 cm. • L/W pattern card: 61 x 41 cm. • Ø counter: 3.3 cm. • The complete set contains: 1 panel with plastic tray, 1 transparent stud grid, 12 laminated cards illustrated on both sides and 225 round counters in 4 colours. 313 309 345 106 4

211


Spaces for Toddlers

®

Actimousse for Little Ones • Foam modules for assembly to create sensory routes for early years fun. Encourage children’s motor-skills and sensory exploration. • Covered with thick, soft, easy-clean coated fabric.

NF EN 1021-1 and 1021-2 Ignitability of upholstered furniture

REACH Phthalate-free products

POINT Detachable, interchangeable discs

Various possible configurations

Technical information

• Attached using a Velcro® strip. Makes it possible to keep the modules firmly attached together during play. Strong seams. • Firmness of foam: density of 24 kg/m³ or 38 kg/m³. • Safety: fire-resistant covers with no access to foam.

Sensory Routes Discs sold separately

Sensory Disc - Set of 2 1 velvet cotton disc and 1 plastic textured disc. For use on routes or on their own. • Ø: 34 cm; thickness: 4 cm. 313 309 370 511 2

Straight Route Supplement with 2 discs or round pouffes sold separately. Folds up easily into 3 parts. • L/W: 150 x 50 cm; thickness: 4 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 509 9

Mirror Disc - Set of 2 2 discs with mirrors in unbreakable plexiglas. For use on routes or on their own.

Discs sold separately

Corner Route Supplement with 2 discs or round pouffes sold separately. Folds up easily into 3 parts. • L/W: 100 x 100 cm; thickness: 4 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 510 5

212

• Ø: 34 cm; thickness: 4 cm. 313 309 370 515 0

Discovery Disc - Set of 2 2 yellow discs with 2 different interior compositions and densities. For use on routes or on their own. • Ø: 34 cm; thickness: 4 cm. 313 309 370 512 9


POINT

Spaces Encastrements for Toddlers

EW

Movement Routes can be combined with Sensory Routes

Movement Routes

Platform Non-slip underside.

Inclined Plane

Stair

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 505 1

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 4 to 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 503 7

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 7.5 to 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 506 8

Round Pouffe

Brick Wave Platform

For creating movement routes and varying activities.

For sitting on or playing at rolling over. Can also be used in sensory and movement routes to vary the activities.

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 13 to 18 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 513 6

• L/W: 50 x 25 cm; H: 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 507 5

• Ø: 34 cm; H: 25 cm; foam density 38 kg/m³. 313 309 370 502 0

POINT Easy, quick storage and space saving

Arch 2 arches fit together to create a tunnel or a ball pool (balls sold separately p. 271).

Hill and Valley

• L/W: 70 x 25 cm; H: 60 cm; foam density 38 kg/m³. 313 309 370 508 2

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 4 to 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 504 4

Non-slip underside for the valley.

213


Spaces for Toddlers

Mini Actibaby • First motor-skill course for getting ready to walk in complete safety. • A variety of exploration activities from age 9 months: crawling, sliding, pulling themselves up, going through arches, etc. • The two modules can be attached together.

EN 71-1-2-3 NFS 54-300 Educational material for motor skills

GUARANTEE

Nathan Commitments • All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainablymanaged forests. • Furniture delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

Technical information

• In clear varnished and blue or orange lacquered plywood. • Wood thickness: 22 mm. • Accessible H course: 24 cm; accessible H activity podium: 16 cm.

Large space Configuration created using: 1 Route + 1 Activity Podium + 3 green comfort mats + 2 light blue comfort mats. • L/W/H: 400 x 150 x 83 cm. 1 Route

2 Comfort Mat blue

1 Activity Podium

SEE ALSO Comfort Mats Wave Mats Activity Panels Mini Actibaby

214

p. 208 p. 210 p. 230 pp. 214-215


Spaces Encastrements for Toddlers Large play centre Configuration created using: 1 Route + 1 Activity Podium + 3 green comfort mats + 1 yellow comfort mat + 2 wave mats. • L/W/H: 250 x 250 x 83 cm; Diagonal: 290 cm.

Different heights for children to pull themselves up

Climbing and sliding in complete safety

Pushing balls through holes

A bar for children to pull themselves up on

Climbing Podium 3 steps to reach the platform and a gentle slope to slide down... or climb back up! With several openings for playing at looking through and being under the supervision of an adult. • L/W/H: 108 x 108 x 83 cm; highest point: 24 cm. • H/D of step: 8 x 29 cm. 313 309 373 216 3 108

cm

Activity Podium 2 steps, a threshold to step over, a window to go through and a large tray for playing or resting in, with a bar for children to pull themselves up. Activity panels to mount on the uprights

• L/W/H: 108 x 108 x 79 cm; highest point: 16 cm. • Dimensions of tray: 100 x 50 cm; depth: 16 cm without mat (sold separately). • Ø of holes: 6 and 8 cm. 313 309 373 217 0 m

8c

10

215


Spaces for Older Children

• A range of 9 Units to be combined in straight lines or at right angles, to create a play space. Games are always accessible

Appropriate height of playing surfaces, with edging strips

Technical information Activity Units - In 18 mm birch plywood. - Fastenings provided for connecting the units together. - Very strong melamine playing surface. Accessories - Backs can be attached in front of or behind other units (fastenings provided). - Shelves adjustable to 3 different heights supplement all the units in the range.

Back to be attached in front of or behind other units

Units raised by 10 cm with plastic legs for easy cleaning

Units for playing in complete safety

216

Stable and robust

Gentle rounded corners

Field of vision maintained

Excellent stability to prevent any risk of tipping over. Very strong melamine playing surface.

The gentle rounded edges prevent toys from falling off and also allow children to hold themselves upright.

Low, open units for effective supervision.


2-Compartment Low Storage Unit

3-Compartment Mixed Storage Unit

With 2 simple backs and 4 plastic legs.

With 1 simple back and 4 plastic legs.

With 2 simple backs and 4 plastic legs.

• L/W/H: 39 x 39 x 86. 313 309 372 383 3

• L/W/H: 76 x 39 x 50. 313 309 372 379 6

• L/W/H: 76 x 39 x 86. 313 309 372 385 7

Low Activity Unit

Low Activity Unit on Casters

With 2 simple backs and 5 plastic legs.

With 2 simple backs, 1 shelf with a fastening bolt to keep the plastic tray in place and 5 plastic legs.

With 2 simple backs, 1 shelf with a fastening bolt to keep the plastic tray in place and 5 self-locking casters.

• L/W/H: 113.5 x 39 x 50. 313 309 372 381 9

• L/W/H: 113.5 x 39 x 50. 313 309 372 380 2

• L/W/H: 113.5 x 39 x 48. 313 309 372 387 1

3-Compartment Low Storage Unit

4-Compartment High Storage Unit With 2 simple backs and 4 plastic legs. • L/W/H: 76 x 39 x 86. 313 309 372 382 6

SEE ALSO Clorofile Extras pp. 222-223

Spaces forEncastrements Older Children

2-Compartment High Storage Unit

High Storage Unit with Storage Unit on Casters With 2 simple backs, 1 large attached back and 1 box with casters.

Double-sided Unit

• L/W/H: 76 x 39 x 86.

• L/W/H: 76 x 39 x 86. 313 309 372 386 4

313 309 372 384 0

With 1 simple back and 4 plastic legs.

SEE ALSO Clorofile Units pp. 246-247

217


Spaces for Older Children

EW

• 9 units to put together and combine in a straight line or at an angle to create your own space. • The supplementary units are offered in three colours to match the tables, chairs and storage units in the Clorofile range.

Very strong melamine playing surface

Plastic legs for easy cleaning

Design your units in 3 stages!

Self-locking pivoting casters Backs available in 3 colours

1

Choose your activity unit.

2-Compartment Low Storage Unit

2-Compartment High Storage Unit

Supplement with a set of 4 legs or casters and at least 1 back.

Supplement with a set of 4 legs and at least 1 back, to be attached in the upper section.

• 18 mm birch plywood. • L/W/H: 76 x 39 x 40 cm. 313 309 372 230 0

• 18 mm birch plywood. • L/W/H: 39 x 39 x 76 cm. 313 309 372 231 7

2

Low Activity Unit

Supplement with a set of 5 legs or casters and at least 1 back.

With 1 shelf and 1 plastic tray. Supplement with a set of 5 legs or casters and at least 1 back, to be attached in the central section.

• 18 mm birch plywood. • L/W/H: 113.5 x 39 x 40 cm. 313 309 372 235 5

• 18 mm birch plywood. • L/W/H: 113.5 x 39 x 40 cm. 313 309 372 239 3

Give your unit one or more backs (available in 3 colours) and shelves.

Simple Back - Set of 2

218

3-Compartment Low Storage Unit

• 10 mm melamine birch plywood. • L/W/H: 35.5 x 35.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 372 241 6 313 309 372 242 3 313 309 372 350 5

Magnetic Panel Back

Mirror Back

• 10 mm melamine birch plywood. • 27 x 27 cm magnetic surface. • L/W/H: 35.5 x 35.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 372 245 4 313 309 372 246 1 313 309 372 390 1

• 10 mm melamine birch plywood. • 27 x 27 cm mirror surface. • L/W/H: 35.5 x 35.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 372 243 0 313 309 372 244 7 313 309 372 391 8


Spaces forEncastrements Older Children

Mix and match unit back panels! Just some of the dozens of possible combinations... Example 1: 2-compartment high storage unit + 1 Green mirror back + 4 Green plastic legs

Q Q Q

Example 2: 3-compartment mixed storage unit + 1 Orange magnetic back + 4 Prange plastic legs

Q Q Q Example 4: High storage unit for storage unit on casters + 2 simple Blue backs + 1 Blue storage unit on casters

Example 3: 3-compartment low storage unit + 1 Blue magnetic back + casters

Q Q Q Q Q Q

3-Compartment Mixed Storage Unit

4-Compartment High Storage Unit

Supplement with a set of 4 legs and at least 1 back, to be attached in the upper section.

Supplement with a set of 4 legs and at least 2 backs, to be attached in the upper section.

Double-sided Unit

High Storage Unit for Storage Unit on Casters

Supplement with a set of 4 legs or casters.

Supplement with 2 backs. Storage Units on Casters (sold separately p. 223).

• 18 mm birch plywood. • L/W/H: 76 x 39 x 76 cm. 313 309 372 232 4

• 18 mm birch plywood. • L/W/H: 76 x 39 x 76 cm. 313 309 372 233 1

• 18 mm birch plywood. • L/W/H: 76 x 39 x 76 cm. 313 309 372 234 8

• 18 mm birch plywood. • L/W/H: 76 x 39 x 86 cm. 313 309 372 236 2

3 Shelves

Complete with a set of legs or casters.

Plastic Legs - Set of 4

Each shelf is provided with 4 locking pegs.

• Ø/H: 5.5 x 10 cm. Q 313 309 372 250 8 Q 313 309 372 252 2 Q 313 309 372 248 5

• 10 mm birch plywood. • L/W/H: 36 x 35.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 372 389 5

Plastic Legs - Set of 5

SEE ALSO Extras and Plastic Trays

pp. 222-223

• Ø/H: 5.5 x 10 cm. Q 313 309 372 251 5 Q 313 309 372 253 9 Q 313 309 372 249 2

Casters Easy to install kit with easy adaptation to low units and the double-sided unit. • 4 self-locking pivoting casters. • Silent polypropylene pivoting casters with nonmarking rubber strip (Ø: 50 mm). • Solid wood crosspieces, pre-drilled (screws provided). 313 309 372 079 5

219


Spaces for Older Children

Combination Options

SEE ALSO Activity Units

pp. 216-219

Connection Combine a unit and a partition at an angle*

Combine a unit and a partition in a straight line

Attach a partition to the wall

Support section

Bush section

Fix ing 17. cent 8 c re: m

tre: cen g n Fixi 39 cm

re: ent c g n Fixi 17.8 cm

*Only with the support section

Partitionette Connector Consists of a support section and a bush section. Allows activity units to be connected to partitions, and partitions to be attached to the wall. • Support in 18 mm varnished birch plywood. • Bush in 15 mm varnished painted birch plywood. • Overall dimensions: L/W/H: 39 x 27 x 50 cm. 313 309 372 388 8

220

Example configuration produced by combining 1 partition connector with activity units and 1 large door to create an enclosed space.


Technical information Recommendations for installing other configurations: • Double up the straight bush supports attached to a door or stairwell. • Double up the straight bush supports on assemblies with just one side without corners.

Angled configuration L/W: 1.89 x 1.54 m

4-Unit Combination

Small Right Angle

1 2-Compartment Low Storage Unit + 1 Low Activity Unit + 1 2-Compartment High Storage Unit + 1 4-Compartment High Storage Unit.

L/W: 2.57 x 1.36 m 9 components: • 5 low straight bush supports • 1 fixed angle low bush

• 1 activity partition • 1 openwork partition • 1 mirror partition

Spaces forEncastrements Older Children

6 examples of possible configurations

Angled configuration L/W: 2.28 x 3 m

6-Unit Combination 1 3-Compartment Low Storage Unit + 1 Low Activity Unit + 1 2-Compartment High Storage Unit + 1 4-Compartment High Storage Unit +1 3-Compartment Mixed Storage Unit + 1 Doublesided Storage Unit.

Playpen L/W: 2.49 x 2.15 m 17 components: • 3 high bush supports • 3 fixed angle high bush supports • 3 openwork partitions

Mixed Set of Units and Partitions

Big Playpen

L/W: 2.88 x 3.70 m 18 components: 3-Compartment Mixed Storage Unit + 4-Compartment High Storage Unit + 3-Compartment Low Storage Unit + 1 Low Activity Unit + 4 Partitionette Connector + 1 Big Door + 2 Adjustable Partitions + 1 Openwork Partition + 1 Activity Partition + 1 Fixed Angle High Bush Support + 4 High Bush Supports.

L/W: 3.18 x 2.68 m 29 components: • 6 high bush supports • 4 fixed angle high bush supports • 5 openwork partitions

• 1 big door • 2 light blue Comfort mats (150 x 100 cm) • 2 yellow Comfort mats (100 x 90 cm) • 1 large orange bolster (150 cm) • 2 small green bolsters (100 cm)

• 1 activity partition • 2 big doors • 1 mirror partition • 1 window partition • 5 light blue Comfort mats (100 x 150 cm) • 2 two-tone square cushions • 2 large orange bolsters (150 cm)

221


Spaces for Older Children

Develop Your Play Corners with Clorofile Extras! Backs and Manipano Activity Panels • All the Clorofile Activity Units shown on pages 216 to 219 can be supplemented with backs and Manipano Activity Panels.

Mirror Back • 10 mm melamine birch plywood. • 27 x 27 cm mirror surface. • L/W/H: 35.5 x 35.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 372 243 0 313 309 372 244 7 313 309 372 391 8

Magnetic Panel Back • 10 mm melamine birch plywood. • 27 x 27 cm magnetic surface. • L/W/H: 35.5 x 35.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 372 245 4 313 309 372 246 1 313 309 372 390 1

Simple Back - Set of 2 • 10 mm melamine birch plywood. • L/W/H: 35.5 x 35.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 372 241 6 313 309 372 242 3 313 309 372 350 5

4-Compartment High Storage Unit + 1 Green Mirror Back + 1 Orange Magnetic Back + 1 Simple Blue Back + 1 Manipano Gestural

Manipano - Gestural

Manipano - Audio

Manipano - Visual

Manipano - Tactile

Spiral path for experiencing circular movement.

The two wheels turn to produce two different sounds.

Moving the handle makes two different visual effects appear.

3 different materials to discover.

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 199 7

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 197 3

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 196 6

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 198 0

Manipano - Mounting Kit This kit allows you to mount Manipano products on the wall or on Activity Units. 313 309 373 226 2

SEE ALSO Manipano Activity Panels

222

p. 91

3-Compartment Low Storage Unit + 1 Orange Mirror Back + 1 Manipano Mani’touch


Spaces forEncastrements Older Children

Shelves, plastic trays, storage units on casters • The shelves can be adjusted to 3 different heights and used with all the Units in the range. • Shallow trays and deep trays are useful for storing games so that they are readily available. • Storage Units on Casters can accompany the High Storage Unit designed to go with them, or be used alone.

SEE ALSO Clorofile Storage Units pp. 246-247

Shelves Each shelf is provided with 4 locking pegs. • 10 mm birch plywood. • L/W/H: 36 x 35.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 372 389 5

3-Compartment Low Storage Unit + 3 Shelves + 1 Simple Blue Back + 5 blue plastic legs + plastic trays

Deep Multicoloured Trays

Shallow Clear Trays

• L/W/H: 37.5 x 31 x 15 cm. • Set of 3: 1 red, 1 green, 1 blue. 313 309 363 059 9

• L/W/H: 37.5 x 31 x 7.5 cm. • Set of 3. 313 309 363 067 4

Storage Unit on Casters 4 self-locking casters. • L/W/H: 72 x 36 x 35 cm. 313 309 372 238 6 313 309 372 237 9 313 309 372 393 2

Connection • Allows activity units to be connected to partitions or the Nathan House façades to create lots of different layouts.

Support section

Partitionette Connector Consists of a support section and a bush section. Allows activity units to be connected to partitions, and partitions to be attached to the wall.

Bush section

• Support in 18 mm varnished birch plywood. • Bush in 15 mm varnished painted birch plywood. • Overall dimensions: L/W/H: 39 x 27 x 50 cm. 313 309 372 388 8

SEE ALSO Nathan House

pp. 224-225

223


Spaces for Older Children

Nathan House • A fun, original concept using modular façades combined together to create numerous play spaces. • The façades are stable when assembled at right angles. For arrangements in a straight line, the façades need to be fixed to the wall and supplemented with bush supports (see p. 206).

GUARANTEE

Roof open with 1 section

Semi-open assembly

Big House Set consisting of: 1 Garage Façade + 1 Façade with Flowers + 1 Façade with Windows +1 Entrance Façade + 1 Roof. The façades can be assembled to form a corner or in a straight line. • Footprint: Enclosed assembly: 149 x 146 cm; Height: 120 cm. Semi-open assembly: 129 x 243 cm; Height: 120 cm.

Closed façade assembly

Two façades are attached together, at right angles or as a straight line, using wooden attachments. Technical information

• In thick (15 mm) colourless natural varnished plywood with designs screen-printed on 1 side. • Shock-resistant façades and unpainted edges. Assembly required. Assembly instructions provided. • Wooden connectors provided with each façade. • The flexible roof is easy for an adult to fold back during activities.

House and Shop Corner

224

Set consisting of: 1 shop counter façade and 1 façade with windows. • Footprint: 120 x 120 cm; H: 120 cm.


Spaces forEncastrements Older Children Corner assembly of façades with bush supports

Assembly information

• Two façades can be fixed together, at right angles or in a straight line, using the wooden fastening pieces provided, or using a Clorofile bush support.

Nathan Street

• One façade can be fixed to a Clorofile partition using a bush support. • Configurations in a straight line must be fixed to the wall and stabilised with bush supports behind the façades. Fixing centre: 89 cm.

To create a refuge

Set consisting of: 1 Shop Counter Façade + 1 Windows Façade + 1 Entrance Façade + 1 Fixed Angle High Bush + 2 Low Bush Supports. The façades can be assembled at right angles or in a straight line. 382 cm

• Footprint: Corner assembly: 257 x 111 cm; Height: 120 cm. Straight line assembly: 382 x 22 cm; Height: 120 cm.

Straight line assembly with bush supports

Roof closed with 2 sections

House Roof Roof to be attached only between façades with a triangular top. Comfort mat sold separately p. 208

• Plastic-coated fabric with attachment hooks. • 2 sections 77 x 99 cm, held by 4 horizontal bars. 313 309 372 055 9

Windows Façade • L/W/H: 100 x 21.5 x 88 cm; H of seat: 20 cm. 313 309 372 051 1

Shop Counter Façade

Entrance Façade

Façade with Flowers

Garage Façade

• L/W/H: 100 x 20 x 120 cm; H of counter: 48 cm. 313 309 372 050 4

• L/W/H: 100 x 23 x 120 cm; L of opening: 45 cm. 313 309 372 054 2

• L/W/H: 100 x 26.5 x 120 cm; H of window sill: 55 cm. 313 309 372 053 5

• L/W/H: 100 x 30 x 75 cm; L of opening: 35 cm. 313 309 372 052 8

225


Spaces for Older Children

• Tables with adjustable heights from size 00 to size 1. • Two table shapes in three different colours allow for numerous configurations. • Stable, comfortable, robust chairs for children and adults.

GUARANTEE

Technical information

• 18 mm thick melamine birch plywood. • Structure and legs in solid beech. • Pre-assembled seat and back support. • Rounded endings and edges. • Anti-noise plastic pads. • Detachable plastic legs and wooden end pieces to boost the tables (S00: 35 cm, S0: 40 cm and S1: 46 cm).

Determination of heights based on the NF-EN 1729-1 standard Size Average age of the children Height of the children Height of table tops Chairs, height of seat

S00 Less than 2 years Less than 80 cm 35.5 cm 18 cm

S0 2 years 80-95 cm 40 cm 21 cm

S1 3-4 years 93-116 cm 46 cm 26 cm

EN 1729 1-2 Classroom furniture

VARIOUS POSSIBLE CONFIGURATIONS: FOR 4 CHILDREN

FOR 6 CHILDREN

Rolling Stool Robust, ergonomic stool for moving around at the same level as the children.

Adult Chair Stackable. • Structure and feet in varnished solid wood. • H of seat: 35 cm; weight: 4.5 kg/chair. • Supplied pre-assembled. 313 309 372 352 9

226

• Structure and feet in varnished solid beech. • H of seat: 35 cm; width and depth of seat: 33 cm; weight: 4.4 kg. • Handle for moving the stool. • Supplied pre-assembled with 4 silent, non-marking, self-locking casters. 313 309 371 174 8

FOR 8 CHILDREN


EW

Table with height adjustable from 00 to size 1

Booster end piece

Plastic leg

Rectangular Table

Half-moon Table Clorofile

Extremely strong, washable board surface. Legs are easily assembled by simply screwing them in. 4 booster legs.

Extremely strong, washable board surface. Legs are easily assembled by simply screwing them in. 4 booster legs.

• 18 mm thick melamine birch plywood. • Board: 60 x 80 cm; Board H: 35 / 40 cm.

• 18 mm thick melamine birch plywood. • Board: 60 x 120 cm; Board H: 35 / 40 cm.

Green

Green

313 309 372 397 0

313 309 372 394 9

Blue

Blue

313 309 371 172 4

313 309 371 171 7

Orange

Orange

313 309 371 170 0

Armchairs Size 00 Set of 2

Spaces forEncastrements Older Children

POINT

313 309 371 173 1

Armrests to hold the child in the correct position.

Chairs Size 0 - Set of 2

Chairs Size 1 - Set of 2

Stackable.

Stackable.

• Structure and legs in solid varnished beech. • Seat H: 18 cm; Weight: 2.6 kg. • Ready-assembled. 313 309 372 396 3

• Structure and legs in solid varnished beech. • Seat H: 21 cm; Weight: 2.5 kg/chair. • Ready-assembled. 313 309 372 395 6

• Structure and feet in varnished solid beech. • H of seat: 26 cm; weight: 2.8 kg/chair. • Supplied pre-assembled. 313 309 372 358 1

227


Spaces for Older Children

Actibaby • A structure for motor activities adaptable to the smallest spaces. • Line, angle, or star-shaped, with or without ball pool, the Actibaby modular elements adapt to your project. • Both simple and entertaining, they allow children from 15 months to climb, slide, crawl and hide. • The activity panels enhance game and discovery possibilities (sold separately p. 230). • Supplied with assembly Technical information and care instructions.

GUARANTEE

• In natural varnished plywood and MDF board with a green, blue or pink finish. • Thick. wood: 22 mm. • L. stairs: 100 cm. • L. slide: 133 cm. • L. platform: 53 cm. • Accessible H.: 59 cm.

NFS 54-300 Educational material for motor skills

EN 71-1-2-3

Nathan Commitments

• All items in this range are made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably managed forests. • Delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

Straight configuration

Angled configuration

Large Actibaby A stair unit, slide and square platform for connecting in straight or angled configurations. A large area accessed via arches and windows allows children to play underneath.

Possible configuration examples using different Actibaby elements

• L/W/H in straight configuration: 286 x 53 x 129 cm. • L/W/H in right angle configuration: 153 x 186 x 129 cm. 313 309 398 016 8

POINT Long gently-sloping slide.

Large Actibaby + 1 Slide Ramp + 1 Safe Ladder L/W/H: 319 x 253 x 129 cm

Maxi Actibaby + 1 Platform L/W/H: 439 x 159 x 129 cm

Small Actibaby A stair unit and slide with space formed of arches and windows underneath it.

228

• L/W/H: 233 x 53 x 113 cm. 313 309 398 017 5

1 Slide Ramp + 1 Safe Ladder + 2 Platforms L/W/H: 286 x 106 x 129 cm


Spaces forEncastrements Older Children Maxi Actibaby Stairs, a slide ramp, a safe ladder and two platforms. This set provides a large area where 5 children can play together. • L/W/H: 339 x 239 x 129 cm. 313 309 398 018 2 Maxi Actibaby + T Configuration L/W/H: 339 x 153 x 129 cm

Actibaby Elements

Actibaby Safe Ladder 7 alternate short and long copings for children to find their own climbing strategy. Small coping on the top.

Actibaby Stair Unit

• L/W/H: 100 x 48 x 116 cm. 313 309 373 230 9

• L/W/H: 100 x 48 x 116 cm. 313 309 373 205 7

5 steps with well rounded edges. 1 arch and 1 porthole below.

POINT Long gentlysloping slide.

Actibaby Platform

Wooden slide curved to create a gentle slope. 1 arch and 1 porthole below.

To connect the various elements and create straight, right angle or other configurations. The 2 vertical panels can be fixed on any of the 4 sides. With 3 arches and 1 porthole below.

• L/W/H: 133 x 48 x 116 cm. 313 309 373 214 9

• L/W/H : 53 x 53 x 129 cm. 313 309 373 207 1

Actibaby Slide Ramp

229


Spaces for Older Children

A c t i b a b y Pool closed

Pool and Slide Connectors Two foam pads to fix the pool in position around the slide, and a small blocking mat with adhesive strips for placing under the slide and pool to complete the join. • In 24 kg/m3 density foam covered with M2 fire-resistant thermoplastic fabric. • Light blue. • Supplied with assembly instructions. • L/W/H: 11 x 11 x 39 cm. 313 309 373 215 6

Adaptable Ball Pool A pool that can be used on its own or connected to the Actibaby slide (connectors sold separately). One of the sides can be placed in a closed or half-open position using the reversible step. Powerful Velcro® tabs hold the parts in place. Supplied with assembly instructions. • In soft and durable 24 kg/m3 density foam covered with M2 fire-resistant thermoplastic fabric. Light blue and yellow. • Bottom mat is 4 cm thick with a non-skid underside. Navy blue. • Balls sold separately. • L/W/H pool closed: 168 x 100 x 44 cm. • L/W/H pool half-open: 182 x 100 x 44 cm (H. side of stair: 30 cm). 313 309 387 477 1

Ball Pool Balls Set of 500 balls. • Ø: 7 cm soft, strong plastic. • 4 assorted colours. 313 309 387 471 9

Actibaby Gate

A perfect fit with the dimensions of the Actibaby slide. Non-skid underside and bevelled corners. Supplied with a fastening system to connect the slide securely to the mat.

A foam pad that can be inserted between the side walls of the slide or stair unit to prevent children from accessing them if necessary. Must only be used to prevent children accessing the bottom of the structure.

• L/W/D: 99 x 66 x 4 cm. • In 24 kg/m3 density foam, covered with M2 fire-resistant, texture-free, non-skid thermoplastic fabric. • Navy blue. 313 309 373 213 2

• L/H/W: 47 x 54 x 55 cm. • In 24 kg/m3 density foam covered with M2 fire-resistant thermoplastic fabric. • Light blue. 313 309 373 212 5

Actibaby Landing Mat

Activity Panels • 3 panels for exercising fine motor skills through play. • Attach to Actibaby structural elements or a wall (screws provided).

230

Technical information

• Fastenings supplied for fixing onto Actibaby elements. • Plywood. • D.: 18 mm.

Activity Panel - The Cylinder

Activity Panel - The Wheel

Activity Panel - The Eyes

Turns endlessly. Good grip. Very rounded corners.

When you turn the handle, the eyes go cross-eyed! Anti-pinching system.

Its rotation speed produces varied visual effects. It can be placed horizontally or upright.

• Ø/thickness: 27 x 6.5 cm. 313 309 373 227 9

• L/W/D: 28.5 x 16.5 x 5 cm. 313 309 373 228 6

• L/W/D: 23 x 19 x 8 cm. 313 309 373 229 3


Metal Board Board for writing on with markers that can be erased with or without water, as well as for displaying magnetic objects. Includes 1 tray and 2 hooks for horizontal hanging.

60 cm

1m

Communal Encastrements Areas

Display Boards

90 cm

Giant Wall Pouch

Large Model 75 cm

• L/W: 90 x 60 cm. Reinforced corners.

Large pouch with 10 transparent strips. Comes with 30 ruled labels in cut-out cardboard to associate words with pictures.

313 309 387 143 5

• W/H pouch: 100 x 75 cm. • H. strip: 5 cm. • L/W label: 8 x 7.5 cm. 313 309 363 038 4

Small model • L/W: 60 x 45 cm. Reinforced corners. 313 309 387 142 8

20 magnetic label holders

MAGNETIC

PIECES

MAGNETIC

PIECES

Magnetic Storage Pocket

Adhesive Magnetic Rubber

Pocket is attached to a metal surface and used to store small items. In transparent plastic with a gusset for easy access.

2-sided strips: magnetic/adhesive. For affixing any kind of material on metal surfaces.

Magnetic Label Holders

• Magnetic pocket in transparent plastic. • L/W: 24 x 20 cm. 313 309 388 064 2

• Strip L/W: 100 x 2 cm. • Set of 3 strips. 313 309 379 014 9

• 20 magnetic label holders. • L/W: 8 x 5 cm. 313 309 379 069 9

20 label holders to customise for the activities carried out with the children.

Can be easily affixed on all paper surfaces

22 mm

Tidy-Pouches Supple, colourful pouches that can be attached with Velcro® to their flat backing support and affixed to the wall horizontally, vertically or diagonally. The pouches are readily customisable and ideal for storing cuddly toys, shoes, letters, etc.

Magnetic Counters Plastic counters in assorted colours, shaped for easy grip. Strongly magnetised for affixing any kind of document to a metal surface. • Ø: 22 mm. • Set of 10. 313 309 379 004 0

Wall-Tac Plastic adhesive for tacking cards, pictures and posters to clean dry surfaces. • 3 strips of 100 g. 313 309 339 041 7

• Made of cotton and Velcro® and supplied in sets of 2 supports with 8 pouches in assorted colours. • Total L/W with backing: 112 cm. • Ø pouch: 21 cm. • Set of 2. 313 309 372 517 2

231


Communal Areas

Reception Area • A complete solution: a wall-mounted or mobile cloakroom to fit your space. • The hooks and colourful trays with photo holders make it possible to identify the storage space available to each child easily and therefore promote the children’s independence. • Structures in birch-effect melamine, 18 mm thick, with rounded PVC edges.

Nathan Commitments • All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainablymanaged forests. • Furniture delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

GUARANTEE

10 plastic trays with photo holders

130 cm

100 cm

10 hooks

Mobile Cloakroom Double-sided compact mobile unit for 10 children. With 10 hooks and 10 colourful trays with photo holders to help children identify their individual storage space.

232

cm

313 309 371 167 0

74

• L/W/H: 100 x 74 x 130 cm. • Height of seat: 25 cm. • L/W/depth of toy box: 12 x 18 x 10 cm. • Structure in birch-effect melamine, 18 mm thick with rounded PVC edges. • Supplied with 10 very strong plastic hooks, 10 plastic trays (2 red, 2 orange, 2 green, 2 blue, 2 transparent) and 10 assorted photo holders. • 4 pivoting casters with brakes. • Supplied flat with assembly instructions.

Double-sided unit with pivoting casters


Communal Encastrements Areas

EW

SEE ALSO The car

p. 161

100 cm

42 cm

43 cm

100 cm

35 cm

Wall-mounted Changing Unit A compact coat hook and storage solution for 5 children. With 5 hooks and 5 colourful trays with photo holders to help children identify their individual storage space. To attach to the wall at the desired height.

Mobile Bench The bench moves easily with its 4 pivoting casters. It can also hold small plastic trays (sold separately p. 233).

• L/W/H: 100 x 35 x 42 cm. • Structure in birch-effect melamine, 18 mm thick with rounded PVC edges. • Robust metal fastening brackets (wall screws not included). • Supplied with 5 very strong plastic hooks, 5 plastic trays (1 red, 1 orange, 1 green, 1 blue, 1 transparent) and 5 assorted photo holders. • Supplied flat with assembly instructions.

• L/W/H: 100 x 35 x 43 cm. • H of seat: 25 cm. • 4 pivoting casters, 2 with brakes. • Structure in birch-effect melamine, thickness of 18 mm with rounded PVC edging. • Supplied flat with 1 set of assembly instructions.

313 309 371 168 7

313 309 371 169 4

Small Multicoloured Trays Set of 5 5 stackable trays (1 blue, 1 orange, 1 green, 1 red and 1 transparent) that can be customised with photo holders to identify the contents (sold separately). Their format allows them to be used with Activity Units, MobiNathan Tray Units and the Mobile Bench. • Washable solid plastic. • L/depth/H: 31 x 17.5 x 12 cm. 313 309 363 075 9

Small Transparent Trays Set of 5 5 stackable transparent trays that can be customised with photo holders to identify their contents (sold separately). Their format allows them to be used with Activity Units, MobiNathan Tray Units and the Mobile Bench.

Plastic Photo Holders Set of 5 Clip onto the small plastic trays or attach to the wall: 1 blue, 1 orange, 1 green, 1 red and 1 transparent.

• Washable solid transparent plastic. • L/depth/H: 31 x 17.5 x 12 cm.

• Washable opaque plastic. • L/W/H: 10.5 x 17.5 x 12 cm. • Ø photo frame: 6 cm.

313 309 363 074 2

313 309 363 071 1

233


Communal Areas

Gathering Corner

POINT Non-slip underside.

Gathering Carpet A large colourful polyamide carpet adapted for school use. Sponges clean with soapy water. • L/W: 2 x 2 m. 313 309 380 056 5

Multi-coloured Floor Cushions Comfortable foam and coated fabric seat. Cotton bag to store the 8 cushions, in the following colours: 2 yellow, 2 blue, 2 orange and 2 green. • Phthalate-free fabric coating, foam density 28 kg/m3, not accessible to children. • Ø: 34 cm; Thickness 5 cm. • Clean with a damp sponge. 313 309 372 903 3

EW

POINT The patterns on 2 rugs fit together to form a circle.

Gathering Carpet - Spot Very soft rug. Easy to clean with a sponge and some soapy water. Non-slip underside. • 100% polyester velvet. • L/W: 130 x 190 cm. • Thickness: 8.1 mm; weight: 1.430 kg. 313 309 380 080 0

234


Communal Encastrements Areas

Rounded corners and edges coated in soft and durable PVC

POINT

• Beech-effect melamine. • L/W/H large bench: 122 x 32 x 34.5 cm. • L/W/H medium bench: 109 x 32 x 27.5 cm. • L/W/H small bench: 96 x 32 x 20.5 cm. 313 309 372 810 4

20.5 cm

A set of 3 truckle benches. Supplied with assembly instructions.

27.5 cm

TriBenches

34.5 cm

Takes up very little space.

34.5 cm

25 cm seat specially adapted for toddlers

Casters make this box easy to move about

Bench with Back Support A comfortable bench for 4 children with back support and armrests. Rounded edges. Underseat space for storage compartments, sold separately. Low maintenance, beech-effect melamine. Supplied with assembly instructions. • L/W/H: 125 x 37 x 53 cm. • H. back/D. seat: 25 x 31 cm. 313 309 372 900 2

2 rolling storage boxes sold separately

Low Storage Boxes on Casters • Supplied with assembly instructions. • In beech-imitation melamine. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 58 x 31 x 20.5 cm. • Set of 2. 313 309 372 899 9

Storage Box on Casters Indoor Bench The largest of the 3 Tri Benches is high enough to slide 3 storage boxes beneath. Supplied with assembly instructions. • Beech-effect melamine. • L/W/H: 122 x 32 x 34.5 cm. 313 309 372 754 1

For space-saving storage of all types of materials. Slides beneath the indoor bench. Supplied with assembly instructions. • Beech-effect melamine with rounded solid wood safety edging. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 34 x 34 x 25 cm. 313 309 372 789 3

EW

Mobile Bench The bench moves easily with its 4 pivoting casters. It can also hold small plastic trays (sold separately p. 233). • L/W/H: 100 x 35 x 43 cm. • H of seat: 25 cm. • 4 pivoting casters, 2 with brakes. • Structure in birch-effect melamine, thickness of 18 mm with rounded PVC edging. • Supplied flat with 1 set of assembly instructions. 313 309 371 169 4

SEE ALSO Small plastic trays

p. 233

235


OM

W IT

P LI E S RD

Cushions and Bolsters

C

Communal Areas

Seats, Mattress, Cushions H STAND

A

EN 71-2

• Thick and extremely soft, these bolsters and Flammability cushions are great for reclining, sitting or just relaxing. • The bolsters are soft enough to set at a right angle. • The colours match the foam seats.

100 cm

Technical information • Inner wadding not accessible, cotton velvet cover, removable for washing at 40°C.

37

150 cm

cm

Bolster - Small Model

Bolster - Large Model

Two-tone Square Cushion

Light green with orange ends.

Orange with light green ends.

Light green sides and base, orange top.

• L/Ø: 100 x 22 cm. 313 309 372 879 1

• L/Ø: 150 x 22 cm. 313 309 372 878 4

• L/W/H: 37 x 37 x 18 cm. 313 309 372 880 7

Floor Seats

m

120 c

Mattress For furnishing rest areas or reading corners, a foam mattress covered with a removable double-sided cover: 1 side in pattern fabric, 1 padded side.

Comfortable mattress (Thickness: 10 cm)

• L/W/H: 120 x 60 x 10 cm. 313 309 372 838 8

EW

Brick Round Pouffe For sitting on or playing at rolling over.

236

• Ø: 34 cm; H: 25 cm; foam density 38 kg/m³. 313 309 370 502 0

Platform Non-slip underside. • L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 505 1

For creating movement routes and varying activities. • L/W: 50 x 25 cm; H: 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 507 5


5 shapes, 4 colours:

B

Flammability of upholstered seats

C

• Directive 2005/84/EC No phthalates

D

Blue A

A

• NF EN 1021-1 and 2

• To make comfortable and colourful corners for reading and relaxing. These seats fit in well with our book boxes (pp. 244-245).

A

H STAND

Yellow

Communal Encastrements Areas

W IT

P LI E S RD

C

Foam Seats

OM

E

Orange

Green

Floor Cushions

2 comfortable, space-saving floor cushions.

313 309 372 905 7

313 309 372 904 0

• Ø: 34 cm; Thickness 5 cm. B

Cube

For sitting, creating corners, using as a table, etc.

313 309 372 864 7

313 309 372 814 2

313 309 372 885 2

313 309 372 882 1

313 309 372 862 3

313 309 372 854 8

313 309 372 883 8

313 309 372 884 5

313 309 372 863 0

313 309 372 855 5

• L/H/D: 40 x 40 x 25 cm. C

Sofa

Seat long enough to accommodate 4 children comfortably. • L/H/D: 110 x 40 x 45 cm. D

Low chair

Individual seat with slightly reclined back.

Technical information

• L/H/D: 35 x 40 x 45 cm. E

Quadrant

The quadrant can be used on its own, in a corner or assembled with two or four other elements.

313 309 372 865 4

313 309 372 856 2

• Seat height: 25 cm (Floor Cushion: 5 cm). • Soft and durable coated cloth cover. • Wash with moist sponge. • Foam density 28 kg/m3, not accessible to children.

• L/W/H: 60 x 60 x 25 cm.

237


Library Furniture

Exploring the world of books

Library Furniture suitable for any area. • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

GUARANTEE

Nathan Commitments The MobiNathan range is available in 2 colours Beech

238

Birch

• All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests. • Furniture delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.


Library Encastrements Furniture Solid, secure units

Practical, functional furniture

• Rounded edges • Height-adjustable inner storage

Pull-out book boxes: space-savers Raised base (8 cm) for easy cleaning

Various arrangements to save space - different combinations of boxes and chairs.

Several heights available

• Easy assembly • Easy to clean In melamine - thickness: 1.8 cm, compartment shelving thickness: 1 cm.

Double-sided units that can be transformed into 2 wall units.

239


Library Furniture

Double-sided Library Furniture • 1 display side and 1 shelving side, assembled back-to-back. • Enables space separation. • 3 sizes. • Available in beech and birch colours. • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

Beech

Birch

Double-sided Tilted Shelving Unit Display side: tilted shelves in white melamine, with red beading for book support. Shelving side: height of central shelving can be adjusted; top shelf can be tilted.

Removable shelf to display books

• Storage for approx. 200 books • Tilted side displays approx. 25 books or 12 magazines

240

120 cm

80 cm

Front/ Back

Front/ Back

90 cm

• Storage for approx. 400 books • Tilted side displays approx. 25 books or 40 magazines

Small Model

Maxi Model

• Three-level shelf or display unit. • L/W/H: 90 x 40 x 80 cm.

• Four-level shelf or display unit. • L/W/H: 120 x 48 x 120 cm.

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 451 9

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 450 2

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 546 2

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 543 1

m

120 c


Library Encastrements Furniture

4-Sided Library Furniture • 4 sides open for access in small groups. • Perfect for storing and displaying large albums.

4 sides

91 cm

91 cm

24 cm

Double-sided Unit with Shelves 6 fixed shelves each with a depth of 24 cm.

50

cm

• L/W/H: 91 x 50 x 91 cm.

119 cm

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 443 4 • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 552 3

57

cm

Plastic casters ABS

• Storage for 250 books • Presentation space for 12 books

POINTS 106 cm

• Casters for easy movement. • Wire display units on each side, for classification exercises: 12 books.

• Storage for 320 books • Presentation space for 20 books

Front/ Back

Book Display and Storage Unit Medium-sized Model

Book Tower

Comprising a shelf unit and the back of a bookcase, this intermediate-sized version differs from the other two with its red metal display unit. The two parts are very easily fixed together using the 4 screws provided.

• Metal display unit in epoxy lacquered red. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 57 x 57 x 119 cm.

• Beech-effect melamine and metal wire in epoxy lacquered red. • L/W/H: 100 x 65 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 399 4

12-shelf unit creating 12 half-moon display compartments.

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 465 6 • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 553 0

241


Library Furniture

Display and Shelving Units • In melamine wood or wire to display books of all sizes at different heights, according to the children’s age. • Large display and storage capacity. • The display units can be wall-mounted or attached to the back of a MobiNathan unit of the same size (screws provided). Birch Beech • Available in beech and birch colours.

Removable shelf to display books

120 cm

2

Storage for 200 books

Small Shelving Unit • L/W/H: 90 x 25 x 80 cm.

242

41 .5

cm

80 cm

106 cm

m 5c

Removable shelf to display books

33

cm

3 adjustable Shelves Storage for 320 books

Large Shelving Unit

Storage for 400 books

Maxi Shelving Unit

Affix to a wall or the rear of a wire wall rack.

Multi-compartment bookcase for storing up to 400 books. Rounded corners.

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm.

• L/W/H: 120 x 33 x 120 cm.

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 453 3

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 441 0

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 452 6

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 548 6

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 564 6

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 545 5


80 cm

120 cm

15

Mini-magazine box

cm

Presentation space for 12 books

Display Unit - Small Model

Library Encastrements Furniture

Raised edge to hold books

15

Presentation space for 25 books or 45 magazines

cm

Display Unit - Maxi Model

Unit comprises 3 inclined levels. Rounded corners. Raised edge along each shelf to hold books in place. Wall-mounted or attached to the back of a small model shelving unit (screws provided).

Unit comprises 4 inclined levels, including 1 magazine rack and 3 compartments. Rounded corners. Raised edge along each shelf to hold books in place. Wall-mounted or attached to the back of a large model shelving unit (screws provided).

• L/W/H: 90 x 15 x 80 cm.

• L/W/H: 120 x 15 x 120 cm.

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 455 7

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 454 0

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 547 9

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 544 8

Wire Wall Racks

106 cm

• Storage for 80 books • Presentation space for approx. 20 books

Wood and Wire Display Unit Red epoxy lacquered metal wire display unit, 4 levels, and a wooden shelving unit. • L/W/H: 100 x 24.5 x 106 cm • Structure in beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 445 8

Metal Wall Racks Space saving wire rack that fits to the wall. • Red epoxy metallic wire frame. 85 cm

Presentation space for 15 books

80 cm

Vertical Wall Rack

Horizontal Wall Rack

Wall-mounted rack that holds 12 to 15 books. 6 racks for album-sized books.

Wall-mounted rack that holds about 15 album-sized books in 3 rows.

• L/H: 43 x 85 cm.

• L/H: 80 x 43 cm.

313 309 372 807 4

313 309 372 776 3

243


Library Furniture

Book Boxes: Individual or Grouped Units • Pull-out boxes: ideal space-savers!

• Can be combined wonderfully with foam seating.

• Solid, stable book boxes easily accessible by all.

• Available in beech and birch colours.

Examples of possible configurations

4 Cubes + 2 Book Boxes

2 Sofas + 4 Book Boxes1 Quadrant + 1

3-Compartment Book Box + 2 Book Boxes

3 Low Chair + 2 Book Boxes

Storage for 170 books

3-Compartment Book Box The bottom shelf can be used for additional storage or removed to accommodate 3 single boxes. The inside compartments can be adjusted. • L/W/H: 100 x 42 x 70 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 460 1 • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 556 1

Set of 3 caster-mounted boxes sold separately

1-Compartment Book Box Caster-mounted box for use on its own or under high units: box with 3 compartments, box with 4 compartments, book box with stand, two-sided bookcase.

Removable Shelf

• L/W/H: 30 x 40 x 34 cm. • Plastic casters ABS. • Per unit.

• Per unit. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 456 4 • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 555 4

• Set of 3.

244

Storage for 30 books

• In beeh-effect melamine. 313 309 372 457 1 Plastic casters ABS


Plastic casters ABS

Storage for 120 books

Storage for 120 books

High 4-Compartment Book Box A large capacity storage box for books with space underneath for storing a low book box with 4 compartments or two single boxes. The vertical compartments can be adjusted. • L/W/H: 70 x 60 x 70 cm.

Library Encastrements Furniture

Adjustable compartment width for 3 and 4 compartment boxes

Low 4-Compartment Book Box A large square caster-mounted box, with rounded sides and 4 pigeonholes. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 60 x 60 x 34 cm.

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 459 5

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 458 8

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 557 8

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 558 5

Wire grille aids visibility of contents

Storage for 80 books

4-Compartment Metal Box Trolley Large-format box for big books

This very light, caster-mounted wire box is easy to move around the classroom. Big books can be stored on the bottom shelf. Plastic casters ABS

• Plastic casters ABS. • Red epoxy metal tube frame. • L/W/H: 55 x 55 x 55 cm. 313 309 372 462 5

SEE ALSO Seats

pp. 236-237

245


Storage Units

Storage Units - Clorofile • A range of units with doors and wall shelves for storage and keeping the materials for the day’s activities out of reach of the children. • Each element is offered in 3 shades to create colourful environments combined with Clorofile tables and activity units. • Structure in birch-effect melamine, 18 mm thick with rounded PVC edges. • Doors in 2 layer lacquered MDF with protective varnish.

Nathan Commitments • All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainablymanaged forests. • Furniture delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

GUARANTEE

POINT • Doors are opened and closed by the adult (without a key and with just one hand) • Large storage capacity with or without Nathan plastic trays • Plastic feet to facilitate cleaning

129 cm

76 cm

42 cm

Storage Unit with Doors 5 storage levels including 3 adjustable shelves. Only the adult can operate the keyless door locking system. Shelf format adaptable to use plastic trays sold separately p. 255. • L/W/H: 76 x 42 x 129 cm. • Structure in birch-effect melamine, 18 mm thick with PVC edge. • 4 plastic feet in colours to match the doors. • Unit is pre-drilled so that a Clorofile activity unit can be attached.

Storage Unit with Doors - Green 313 309 372 070 2

Storage Unit with Doors - Blue 313 309 372 071 9

Storage Unit with Doors - Orange 313 309 372 072 6

246

SEE ALSO The Storage Unit with Doors connects easily to Activity Units pp. 216-219


Encastrements Storage Units

EW

157 cm

100 cm

42 cm

Large Storage Unit with Doors 6 storage levels including 3 adjustable shelves. Only the adult can operate the keyless door locking system. Shelf format adapted to use the plastic trays sold separately p. 255. • L/W/H: 100 x 42 x 157 cm. • Structure in birch-effect melamine, 18 mm thick with PVC edge. • Doors in 2 layer lacquered MDF with protective varnish. • 6 plastic feet to match the colours of the doors.

Large Storage Unit with Doors - Green 313 309 372 073 3

Large Storage Unit with Doors - Blue 313 309 372 074 0

Large Storage Unit with Doors - Orange 313 309 372 075 7

Wall-mounted Shelf Wall-mounted shelf for mounting more than 1.10 m from the ground.

Wall-mounted Shelf - Green 313 309 372 076 4

SEE ALSO

31 cm

• L/W/H: 100 x 31 x 26.5 cm. • Structure in birch-effect melamine, 18 mm thick with PVC edge. • Metal fastening brackets; wall screws not included.

26

Plastic Trays .5

cm

p. 255

100 cm

Wall-mounted Shelf - Blue 313 309 372 077 1

Wall-mounted Shelf - Orange 313 309 372 078 8

247


Storage Units

Storage Units

Quality and Safety

Store and separate:

43 MobiNathan units to be mixed and matched for the most suitable storage solution.

C

Birch

OM

W IT

GUARANTEE 248

Strengthening baseboard Non-slip pads Easy to maintain, in double-sided melamine wood particle board, thickness: 18 mm

P LI E S RD

Beech

• 2 wood colours, 3 storage methods, 4 tray colours. • 8 different height options: from 44 to 194 cm. • 3 back units for attachment to the rear of the units (height: 106 cm).

H STAND

A

NF D 62050

• Classroom furniture • Tables and storage units

Easy assembly

Attachment provided for storing back units (on large units)


• All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests. • Furniture delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

Encastrements Storage Units

Nathan Commitments

Very hard wearing, 2 mm rounded PVC edging

Height-adjustable shelves, firmly held in place

Thick base for greater stability

MobiNathan Casters Improve mobility with the MobiNathan caster kit. Compatible with all the units in the MobiNathan range. Sturdy, quiet casters.

Raised base 8 cm for easy cleaning

• 4 swivel casters, including 2 with brakes. • Polyamide swivel casters (Ø: 75 mm); quiet polyurethane tyres. • Load capacity up to 80 kg. • Pre-drilled solid timber crosspieces (fastenings provided). 313 309 372 578 3

249


Storage Units

Units with Shelves and Doors Birch

Beech

• Traditional furniture that can be adapted to all types of environment. • Available in beech and birch colours. • Adjustable shelving (each 32 mm), set on screw-in pegs. • L/W: 100 x 41.5 cm.

100 cm

100 cm C

C

44 cm

44 cm

POINT All units with doors come with a lock and 2 keys. A

A

B

106 cm

77 cm

77 cm

106 cm

B

41

.5

.5

41

cm

cm

Storage for 320 books A

Large Shelving Unit

A

4 shelves (3 of which are adjustable).

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 441 0

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 442 7 • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 565 3

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 564 6 B

Medium Shelving Unit

B

Medium Unit with Doors

3 shelves (2 of which are adjustable).

3 shelves (2 of which are adjustable).

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 77 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 533 2

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 77 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 532 5

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 568 4 C

250

Large Unit with Doors

Affix to a wall or the rear of a wire wall rack.

Top Shelving Unit

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 569 1 C

Top Unit with Doors

Can be attached to any MobiNathan storage unit, screws provided. Can also rest on the floor. 1 adjustable shelf. Recommended maximum of 3 top units on top of one another.

Can be attached to any MobiNathan storage unit, screws provided. Can also rest on the floor. 1 adjustable shelf. Recommended maximum of 3 top units on top of one another.

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 44 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 444 1

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 44 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 476 2

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 574 5

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 575 2


Storage Units

Units with Pigeonholes • Ideal for the individual storage needs of each child. • Available in beech and birch colours. • Shelves held in place by pegs in grooves, easilyadjustable height each 32 mm, non-screw pegs.

Beech

Birch

• L/W: 100 x 41.5 cm. • L. box: 31 cm; average box height: 8.7 cm. • Suitable for cardboard trays (sold separately, p. 257).

44 cm

A

100 cm

C

77 cm

106 cm

100 cm

B

Large Unit with Pigeonholes

Medium Unit with Pigeonholes

27 shelves create 30 pigeonholes.

18 shelves create 21 pigeonholes.

This top unit attaches to the top of storage units. 9 shelves create 12 pigeonholes.

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm.

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 77 cm.

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 44 cm.

A

B

C

Top Unit with Pigeonholes

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 435 9

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 535 6

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 536 3

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 561 5

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 566 0

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 573 8

100 cm

77 cm

106 cm

35 cm

Large Unit with Pigeonholes and Shelves 9 shelves create 10 pigeonholes, and 3 shelves (2 of which are adjustable).

Column Shelving Unit

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • L. pigeonhole: 31 cm. • L. shelf: 63.5 cm.

• L/W/H: 35 x 41.5 x 77 cm.

On casters, for practicality, as occasional furniture or to extend an existing unit. 2 adjustable shelves.

• In beech-effect melamine.

• In beech-effect melamine.

313 309 372 440 3

313 309 372 538 7

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 563 9

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 571 4

251


Storage Units

Units with Trays Beech

Imitation Beech • Perfect for storing bulky equipment, construction games and supplies. • Tray units foster independence in children. Kids can easily pull trays in and out on their runners. • Each unit comes with a large number of runners for swapping flat and deep trays around. • L/W: 100 x 41.5 cm.

Nathan trays are transparent and are available either coloured (red, green or blue) or clear. See tray dimensions, also available in resupply, page 255. These can alsobe slotted into the units when they have their lids on (sold separately page 255).

100 cm

Large Unit with 30 Clear Trays

106 cm

Comes with 30 shallow trays. Contains 30 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 436 6

Large Unit with 30 Multicoloured Trays Comes with 30 shallow trays: 10 red, 10 green, 10 blue. Contains 30 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 472 4

Large Unit with 20 Clear Trays Comes with 10 shallow trays and 10 deep trays. Contains 30 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 438 0

Large Unit with 20 Multicoloured Trays Comes with 10 shallow trays and 10 deep trays: 6 red, 6 green, 8 blue. Contains 30 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 474 8

Large Unit with 15 Clear Trays Comes with 15 deep trays. Contains 30 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 437 3

Large Unit with 15 Multicoloured Trays Comes with 15 deep trays: 5 red, 5 green, 5 blue. Contains 30 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

252

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 473 1


Encastrements Storage Units 106 cm

35 cm

Large Column Unit with Clear Trays

Large Column Unit with Multicoloured Trays

On casters, for practicality, as occasional furniture or to extend an existing unit. Comes with 9 trays: 8 shallow and 1 deep. Contains 10 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

On casters, for practicality, as occasional furniture or to extend an existing unit. Comes with 9 trays: 3 shallow red, 3 shallow green, 2 shallow and 1 deep blue. Contains 10 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

• Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 35 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 439 7

• Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 35 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 479 3

77 cm

100 cm

Medium Unit with 12 Clear Trays

Medium Unit with 12 Multicoloured Trays

Comes with 9 deep trays and 3 shallow trays. Contains 21 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

Comes with 9 deep trays and 3 shallow trays: 4 red, 4 green, 4 blue. Contains 21 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 77 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 534 9

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 77 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 539 4

Top Units with Trays • Supplied with beech-coloured boxes, without birch-coloured boxes (sold separately p.255). • 12 pairs of white PVC runners are pre-assembled, capable of holding up to 12 flat trays. • Recommended maximum of 3 top units on top of one another.

44 cm

100 cm

Top Unit with Clear Trays

Top Unit with Multicoloured Trays

Comes with 9 trays, including 3 deep and 6 shallow.

Comes with 9 trays, including 3 deep and 6 shallow: 3 red, 3 green, 3 blue.

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 44 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 475 5

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 44 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 491 5

MobiNathan Casters Improve mobility with the MobiNathan caster kit (see p.249). 313 309 372 578 3

253


Storage Units

U n i t s

w i t h

T r a y s

Birch

Imitation Birch • Mix and match your tray units to suit your purposes. • 4 unit sizes, 4 colours and 2 tray depths, with or without lids. • Each unit comes with a large number of runners for swapping flat and deep trays around. • L/W: 100 x 41.5 cm. • Tray space length: 31 cm; distance between 2 runner positions: 9.5 cm. • Runner thickness: 1 cm.

Mix and match your tray units to suit your purposes! (Trays sold separately p. 255)

1 - Choose your unit size

Large Column Unit for Trays Contains 10 pairs of white PVC premounted runners. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 35 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 570 7

Top Storage Unit for Trays Large Storage Unit for Trays

Medium Storage Unit for Trays

Contains 30 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

Contains 21 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

Can be attached to any MobiNathan storage unit screws provided. Can also rest on the floor. Contains 12 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 562 2

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 77 cm. • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 567 7

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 44 cm. • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 572 1

2 - Choose trays page 255: Examples of possible configurations: Technical information • 1 deep tray = 2 shallow trays

• Order your Nathan trays on page 255.

Medium Unit with Trays Large Unit with Trays

254

4 sets of 3 shallow multicoloured trays + 3 sets of 3 deep multicoloured trays

1 set of 3 shallow clear trays + 1 set of 3 deep green trays + 2 sets of 3 deep blue trays

Large Column Unit with Trays 2 sets of 3 shallow clear trays + 1 set of 3 deep clear trays


• Robust, washable, transparent and stackable with or without lids, Nathan boxes fit inside Clorofile and MobiNathan storage and painting units or can be used on their own. • The lid fits both models.

Shallow Transparent Trays • L/W/H: 31 x 37.5 x 7.5 cm.

Fit both shallow and deep trays.

Shallow Clear Trays • L/W/H: 37.5 x 31 x 7.5 cm. • Set of 3. 313 309 363 067 4

Lids

Shallow Multicoloured Trays • Set of 3: 1 red, 1 green, 1 blue. 313 309 363 058 2

Encastrements Storage Units

Plastic Trays

Lids for Clear Trays • Set of 3. 313 309 363 069 8

Deep Transparent Trays • L/W/H: 31 x 37.5 x 15 cm.

Lids for Multicoloured Trays • Set of 3: 1 red, 1 green, 1 blue. 313 309 363 060 5

Deep Clear Trays • Set of 3. 313 309 363 068 1

Deep Multicoloured Trays • L/W/H: 37.5 x 31 x 15 cm. • Set of 3: 1 red, 1 green, 1 blue. 313 309 363 059 9

Deep Blue Trays

Lids for Red Trays

• Set of 3. 313 309 363 062 9

• Set of 3. 313 309 363 065 0

Deep Green Trays

Lids for Blue Trays

• Set of 3. 313 309 363 061 2

• Set of 3. 313 309 363 064 3

Deep Red Trays

Lids for Green Trays

• Set of 3. 313 309 363 066 7

• Set of 3. 313 309 363 063 6

Small Transparent Trays EW

Small Multicoloured Trays - Set of 5 5 stackable trays (1 blue, 1 orange, 1 green, 1 red and 1 transparent) that can be customised with photo holders to identify the contents (sold separately). Their format allows them to be used with Activity Units, MobiNathan Tray Units and the Mobile Bench. • Washable solid plastic. • L/depth/H: 31 x 17.5 x 12 cm. 313 309 363 075 9

Small Transparent Trays - Set of 5 5 stackable transparent trays that can be customised with photo holders to identify their contents (sold separately). Their format allows them to be used with Activity Units, MobiNathan Tray Units and the Mobile Bench. • Washable solid transparent plastic. • L/depth/H: 31 x 17.5 x 12 cm. 313 309 363 074 2

Plastic Photo Holders - Set of 5 Clip onto the small plastic trays or attach to the wall: 1 blue, 1 orange, 1 green, 1 red and 1 transparent. • Washable opaque plastic. • L/W/H: 10.5 x 17.5 x 12 cm. • Ø photo frame: 6 cm. 313 309 363 071 1

255


• A simple, practical concept to optimise space, utilising the back of units to create play areas. • They attach to the back of large-size MobiNathan units (H: 106 cm). • They can also be wall-mounted for use without other units. Screws provided.

106 cm

Storage Units

Back Units

Wood and Wire Display Unit Red epoxy lacquered metal wire display unit, 4 levels, and a wooden shelving unit. • L/W/H: 100 x 24.5 x 106 cm • Structure in beech-effect melamine. Attachment provided for storing back units (on large units p. 250 to 254).

313 309 372 445 8

33 cm Can also be used as a whiteboard for writing with dry-erase or water-based markers. New removable plastic tray, practical for storing painting accessories.

Easel Back Unit 1 sloped wooden panel, 1 shelving unit (profile 22 cm), 1 red removable plastic paint tray, 4 plastic paper clips (pp. 250-254). • L/D/H: 100 x 24.5 x 106 cm. • H. tray: 33 cm from the ground. • Beech-effect melamine.

256

313 309 372 447 2

Magnetic Panel Back Unit A white metal panel affixed to chipboard, ideal for organising assembly corners. Supplied with a baseboard and storage shelf. May be fixed to the wall (screws provided) or against a MobiNathan unit (p. 250-254). • L/W/H: 100 x 24.5 x 106 cm. • H. panel: 73 cm. • Beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 448 9

Affix to a wall


EW POINT

Transparent Trays

• With lid • Stackable

Small Model

Large model

In clear plastic.

Stackable, supplied with lids. 55 litre capacity.

• L/W/H: 35.5 x 22 x 16.5 cm. • Set of 3. 313 309 363 011 7

• Strong plastic. • L/W/H: 55 x 40 x 32 cm. 313 309 363 076 6

Encastrements Storage Units

Storage Boxes and Trays

POINT

Storage Boxes

• With lid • Stackable

Large model • L/W/H: 20 x 12 x 8 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 363 032 2

Medium model • L/W/H: 20 x 12 x 4 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 363 031 5

Small model • L/W/H: 12 x 6.5 x 4 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 363 030 8

EW

Cardboard Trays Designed for storage in modular and pigeonhole units. Assortment of 4 colours. • L/W/H: 35 x 25 x 7.8 cm. • Delivered flat, pre-scored. • Set of 12. 313 309 363 033 9

Maxi Storage Buckets Set of 3 Plastic Baskets Red plastic baskets may be used with Modular Range. • L/W/H: 35 x 24.5 x 13 cm. • Set of 5. 313 309 387 446 7

Large-volume transparent buckets (12 litres). Easy to transport using their rope handles. Soft, rounded edges. • Hard plastic; nylon rope handles. • H/Ø: 22 x 34 cm. 313 309 363 077 3

257


Activity Equipment

Artistic Activities Easels and Units for Painting • A choice of furniture and complementary accessories to facilitate daily setting up of artistic activities. • Furniture that is robust, functional and easy to clean. GUARANTEE • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

POINT • Large storage capacity • Drying racks

8 clips for paper

EASEL FOR 4

Mobile Easel Easel on casters for 4 children, with storage spaces and drying spaces to optimise use of space in class. 52 cm

• L/D/H: 129 x 60 x 112 cm. • Supplied with 4 red trays per easel, 8 clips for paper, 4 drying racks and 3 clear plastic trays (2 flat, 1 deep). • 5 swivel casters in ABS, including 2 with brakes. • Structure in 18 mm beech effect melamine with rounded PVC edges; drying racks in red epoxy lacquered metal. 313 309 372 576 9

16 clips for holding the paper in place

4 very strong 4 racks for drying paintings removable trays

Hooks for hanging 10 smocks

3 plastic trays

POINT • Boards adjustable to 2 different heights. • For 6 to 8 children.

187 cm

EASEL FOR 6

Group Easel An easel for 6 children. Boards can be set high or low according to the height of the children. A shelf between the legs at the same height as the boards can be used for storing paint and paper. Comes with 6 red plastic trays, 16 paper-holding clips and 4 hooks for hanging smocks.

258

• Total H.: 126 cm. • Distance between legs on floor: 79 cm. • L/W board: 187 x 75 cm. • H. from floor: 30 or 48 cm. • Red epoxy finish frame, beech-effect melamine boards. 313 309 372 417 5 6 new durable detachable trays

Adjustable in height


EASEL FOR 3

Wall-Mounted Easel

Minimum H: 25 cm

This sloping painting board on a metal frame is easily fixed to the wall with the screws provided. 3 plastic trays for brushes and paint pots run along the bottom with a wooden shelf underneath for storing large containers of paint. Room for 3 children to paint at the same time. Comes with 8 clips to hang the paper. • L/W: 187 x 75 cm. • Red epoxy frame, beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 418 2

Activity Encastrements Equipment

Fixes onto wall

Comes with 8 clips

187 cm Comes with 1 shelf

POINTS Clips for holding the paper in place

200 cm

• Stable structure, does not need to be wall-mounted. • Can be used as a partition to separate activities.

Comes with 3 new durable detachable trays Integrated

Transparent plastic containers sold separately p.260.

EASEL FOR 3 This dual function easel is made up of sloping panels designed for 3 children at a time to work on painting activities. Includes a storage space equipped with 3 shelves and 15 pairs of runners to house plastic containers (not provided). It can store a large quantity of material of widely differing heights. The unit comes with 3 red plastic detachable containers for pots and paintbrushes, plus 8 clips for holding the paper in place.

48 cm

Compact Easel

• L/D/H: 200 x 32 x 122 cm. • Beech-effect melamine. • Designed to house containers of L/W: 37.5 x 31 cm and of H.: 7.5 or 15 cm (or more). • Space between the runners: 10 cm. 313 309 372 431 1

POINTS

storage space to store a large amount of materials

Wall-mounted version for 2 children

• 3 different heights. • 2 types of attachment.

Comes with 2 new durable detachable trays

High Position

Back-to-back version for 4 children

EASEL FOR 2/4 • Against a wall

Lean-to Wall Easel

• Against another easel

A painting board for 2 children. Can be fixed to a wall or supported by a second board to create an easel for 4 children. 3 different adjustable heights. Beech-effect melamine boards. Supplied with fastenings. 40 cm

13 cm

313 309 372 515 8

25 cm

• L.: 125 cm; H. panel: 73 cm; total adjustable H: 86, 98 or 110 cm. • W. base: 28 cm (wall version) or 50 cm (with a second easel).

259


55 cm

Activity Equipment

The easel comes with 2 new durable detachable trays.

Activity Side Table Mobile trolley for storage in class, with plastic storage trays and shelves for storing paper up to format (50 x 65 cm) and rollers. Large work surface with a lip.

EASEL FOR 2

Double-sided Easel An easel for 2 children which conveniently folds away. The stand is solid beech and the boards are easy-to-clean hardboard. • L/H board: 65 x 60 cm; H. easel: 120 cm. 313 309 373 138 8

• L/W/H: 72 x 52 x 72 cm. • 4 swivel casters in ABS, including 2 with brakes. • Supplied with 3 clear plastic trays (2 flat, 1 deep). • Structure in 18 mm beech effect melamine with rounded PVC edges; lip in red lacquered MDF. 313 309 372 911 8

To be attached to a wall

New removable plastic tray, practical for storing painting accessories.

Painting Trolley

EASEL FOR 2

Easel Back Unit 1 sloped wooden panel, 1 shelving unit (profile 22 cm), 1 red removable plastic paint tray, 4 plastic paper clips (pp. 250-254). • L/D/H: 100 x 24.5 x 106 cm. • H. tray: 33 cm from the ground. • Beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 447 2

Specially designed for storing all painting materials, with 6 shallow or deep trays for brushes, paint pots and bottles, and 2 side-racks for hanging rags or smocks. Caster-mounted to move easily from place to place. • Red epoxy finish frame. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H unit: 68.5 x 40 x 70 cm. • L/W/H compartments: 37 x 31 x 7.5 / 15 cm. 313 309 372 902 6

Easel Extras Red Painting Trays • Set of 2 red trays and 4 paper clips. 313 309 372 007 8 Trays to attach to the bottom of Nathan easels using the screws supplied with the easels.

Green Painting Trays

260

• Set of 2 green trays and 4 paper clips. 313 309 372 008 5

Deep Clear Trays • Set of 3. 313 309 363 068 1

Shallow Clear Trays • L/W/H: 37.5 x 31 x 7.5 cm. • Set of 3. 313 309 363 067 4


A c t i v i t i e s

Paper and Picture Storage POINT • Space-saving: folds away after use. • Can be positioned at the required height.

112 cm

Large drying space

Activity Encastrements Equipment

A r t i s t i c

Picture Dryer

Movable Picture Dryer

Dries up to 30 pictures at the same time. This wooden and metal wire unit can be fixed on the wall at any height and folds away after use.Wire holders.

Picture dryer on casters with 8 drying racks: 8 formats (65 x 50 cm) or 16 A3 formats or 32 A4 formats. Large space for drying 3D creations. Rounded edges.

• With red epoxy finish frame. • L/W/H in use: 50 x 45 x 112 cm. • L/W/H folded away: 50 x 7 x 112 cm. For 65 x 50 cm pictures. • Wall-mounting screws provided. 313 309 372 737 4

• L/W/H: 60 x 56 x 72 cm. • 4 ABS swivel casters. • Structure in 18 mm beech effect melamine with rounded PVC edges; lip in red lacquered MDF. • Racks in red epoxy lacquered metal. 313 309 372 910 1

Picture Filing Trolley Sturdy, stable and convenient to use, this caster-mounted unit is the perfect height for children and wide enough for easy access to picture folders. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 60 x 51.5 x 70 cm. 313 309 372 716 9

Paper Storage Unit with Drawers This unit provides a large storage capacity with 12 drawers and 2 adjustable shelves. It can store paper up to format (65 x 50 cm) as well as rolls. • L/W/H: 100 x 55 x 106 cm. • Structure in 18 mm beech effect melamine with rounded PVC edges. • Drawers in 8 mm beech effect melamine with MDF reinforcement (L/W: 68 x 52 cm). 313 309 372 398 7 Increase your storage capacity by attaching a MobiNathan unit top extension (see pages 250 to 254).

106 cm

Base raised by 8 cm to allow for cleaning

MobiNathan Casters Improve mobility with the MobiNathan caster kit (see p. 249). 313 309 372 578 3

100 cm

55

cm

MobiNathan caster kit sold separately

261


Activity Equipment

Activity Table • • • •

For modelling, building and playing in general. Highly practical for organising any messy activity. Playing materials tidy away in the plastic boxes beneath the table. Also transforms into a normal table: removable wooden lids.

TABLE FOR 4/6

Multi-activity Table Wide surface and rounded corners. Activity surfaces on 3 sides and boxes for activity materials. The fourth side, the box side, offers other play possibilities. • Comes with 6 transparent plastic boxes: 4 shallow and 2 deep, with 2 wooden lids. • L/W/H: 120 x 76 x 58 cm. • L. play surface: 28 cm. • Beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 449 6

Set of 2 Multi-Activity Tables back-to-back

Create a smooth work surface using the lids.

POINTS • For 4 to 6 children. • Placed one against the other, two tables provide a work area for 8 children.

58 cm

Children can use the boxes and lids without guidance.

TABLE FOR 2/4

Little Ones’ Activity Table Complete with 4 transparent boxes and wooden lids to transform into a normal table. 2 of the casters are lockable. • Comes with 4 transparent plastic boxes: 2 shallow (1 red, 1 blue) and 2 deep (1 red, 1 blue), 2 plastic box lids and 2 wooden lids. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 107 x 57 x 48 cm. • Beech-effect melamine, red and blue lacquered wooden lids.

48 cm

313 309 372 477 9

POINTS • For 2 to 4 children. • Switch boxes in a flash to switch activity.

262


POINT Casters for easse of movement.

Adjustable in height

3 YEARS +

Computer Unit on Wheels This computer unit, caster-mounted and fitted with a safety brake, can be moved easily around the classroom or from one room to another. Designed so that children are seated at the recommended distance from the screen, it adjusts to 4 different heights for perfect comfort.

Activity Encastrements Equipment

Computer Corner

• Red MDF and beech-effect melamine. • Plastic casters ABS. • Overall height: 85 cm. • H. possible table top: 54/57/60/63 cm. • W/D table top: 75.5 x 72 cm. 313 309 371 401 5

POINT Ideal for 2 children.

5 YEARS +

Double Computer Unit This unit is specially designed for the computer area of the classroom or a separate multimedia centre. Two children can work at the same time at the recommended distance from the screen. The keyboard can be stowed away under the monitor shelf. • Beech-effect melamine. • Overall height: 82.5 cm. • H/W/D table top: 62 x 80 x 80 cm. 313 309 371 400 8

OUR SUGGESTION 1 Double Computer Unit + Central Processing Unit Stand

Central Processing Unit Stand Caster-mounted, big enough to allow the CPU to be installed vertically with no danger of overheating thanks to a gap at the back. Goes perfectly with the computer units. • Beech-effect melamine. • Plastic casters ABS. • 2 casters have brakes. • L/W/H: 54 x 27 x 38 cm. 313 309 371 402 2

OUR SUGGESTION 1 Computer Unit on Wheels + 1 Central Processing Unit Stand

263


264


To discover... Physical Activities Actibaby

P.267 NEW

P

hysical education prompts children to develop their motor capabilities and discover what their bodies can do by taking part in the activities assigned. All of our material is adaptable and modular, designed for individual or group activities that can be organised indoors or outdoors: structures for developing motor skills, balancing games, balls, tricycles, products for physical education, etc. Children are introduced to taking controlled risks, helping them to acquire selfawareness and an understanding of their own fears and emotions.

Adventure Course Units

Actimousse® for Little Ones

P.268

Mini Actibaby

p. 266

Actibaby

p. 267

Actimousse® for Little Ones

p. 268

Actimousse®

p. 270

Actigym®

p. 272

Balance

p. 275

Gymkit®

p. 276

Indoor Mats

p. 278

Balance, Coordination and Agility Sensory Routes

p. 280

Balls and Accessories

p. 281

Agility Games

p. 282

Indoor and Outdoor Equipment Essentials

p. 284

Cycles

p. 286

Concentration Games and Yoga

P.283 265


Adventure Course Units

Mini Actibaby • First motor-skill course for getting ready to walk in complete safety. • A variety of exploration activities from age 9 months: crawling, sliding, pulling themselves up, going through arches, etc. • The two modules can be attached together.

GUARANTEE

Nathan Commitments • All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainablymanaged forests. • Furniture delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

EN 71-1-2-3 NFS 54-300 Educational material for motor skills

Technical information

• In clear varnished and blue or orange lacquered plywood. • Wood thickness: 22 mm. • Accessible H course: 24 cm; accessible H activity podium: 16 cm.

SEE ALSO Mini Actibaby

pp. 214-215

Plethora of possible layouts W/l: 400 x 150 cm

108

266

108 cm

cm

Climbing Podium

Activity Podium

3 steps to reach the platform and a gentle slope to slide down... or climb back up! With several openings for playing at looking through and being under the supervision of an adult.

2 steps, a threshold to step over, a window to go through and a large tray for playing or resting in, with a bar for children to pull themselves up.

• L/W/H: 108 x 108 x 83 cm; highest point: 24 cm. • H/D of step: 8 x 29 cm. 313 309 373 216 3

• L/W/H: 108 x 108 x 79 cm; highest point: 16 cm. • Dimensions of tray: 100 x 50 cm; depth: 16 cm without mat (sold separately). • Ø of holes: 6 and 8 cm. 313 309 373 217 0


Technical information

• In natural varnished plywood and MDF board with a green, blue or pink finish. • Thick. wood: 22 mm. • L. stairs: 100 cm. • L. slide: 133 cm. • L. platform: 53 cm. • Accessible H.: 59 cm.

• A structure for motor activities adaptable to the smallest spaces. • Line, angle, or star-shaped, with or without ball pool, the Actibaby modular elements adapt to your project. • Both simple and entertaining, they allow children from 15 months to climb, slide, crawl and hide. • The activity panels enhance game and discovery possibilities (sold separately p. 230). • Supplied with assembly and care instructions.

Nathan Commitments • All items in this range are made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably managed forests. • Delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

GUARANTEE

Adventure Course Units

Actibaby

NFS 54-300 Educational material for motor skills

EN 71-1-2-3

Maxi Actibaby Stairs, a slide ramp, a safe ladder and two platforms. This set provides a large area where 5 children can play together. • L/W/H: 339 x 239 x 129 cm. 313 309 398 018 2

Maxi Actibaby + T Configuration L/W/H: 339 x 153 x 129 cm

SEE ALSO Actibaby

pp. 228-230

Straight configuration

Angled configuration

Large Actibaby A stair unit, slide and square platform for connecting in straight or angled configurations. A large area accessed via arches and windows allows children to play underneath. • L/W/H in straight configuration: 286 x 53 x 129 cm. • L/W/H in right angle configuration: 153 x 186 x 129 cm. 313 309 398 016 8

Small Actibaby A stair unit and slide with space formed of arches and windows underneath it. • L/W/H: 233 x 53 x 113 cm. 313 309 398 017 5

267


Adventure Course Units

Actimousse® for Little Ones • Foam modules for assembly to create sensory routes for early years fun. Encourage children’s motor-skills and sensory exploration. • Covered with thick, soft, easy-clean coated fabric.

NF EN 1021-1 and 1021-2 Ignitability of upholstered furniture

REACH Phthalate-free products Technical information

• Attached using a Velcro® strip. Makes it possible to keep the modules firmly attached together during play. Strong seams. • Firmness of foam: density of 24 kg/m³ or 38 kg/m³. • Safety: fire-resistant covers with no access to foam.

POINT Detachable, interchangeable discs

Various possible configurations

Sensory Routes Sensory Disc - Set of 2 1 velvet cotton disc and 1 plastic textured disc. For use on routes or on their own. • Ø: 34 cm; thickness: 4 cm. 313 309 370 511 2

Discs sold separately

Straight Route Supplement with 2 discs or round pouffes sold separately. Folds up easily into 3 parts. • L/W: 150 x 50 cm; thickness: 4 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 509 9

Mirror Disc - Set of 2 2 discs with mirrors in unbreakable plexiglas. For use on routes or on their own. • Ø: 34 cm; thickness: 4 cm. 313 309 370 515 0

Discs sold separately

Corner Route

268

Discovery Disc - Set of 2

Supplement with 2 discs or round pouffes sold separately. Folds up easily into 3 parts.

2 yellow discs with 2 different interior compositions and densities. For use on routes or on their own.

• L/W: 100 x 100 cm; thickness: 4 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 510 5

• Ø: 34 cm; thickness: 4 cm. 313 309 370 512 9


POINT Movement Routes can be combined with Sensory Routes

Adventure Course Units

EW

Movement Routes

Platform Non-slip underside.

Inclined Plane

Stair

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 505 1

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 4 to 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 503 7

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 7.5 to 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 506 8

Hill and Valley Non-slip underside for the vale. • L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 4 to 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 504 4

POINT Easy, quick storage and space saving

Round Pouffe

Wave Platform

For creating movement routes and varying activities.

For sitting on or playing at rolling over. Can also be used in sensory and movement routes to vary the activities.

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 13 to 18 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 513 6

• L/W: 50 x 25 cm; H: 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 507 5

• Ø: 34 cm; H: 25 cm; foam density 38 kg/m³. 313 309 370 502 0

Brick

SEE ALSO Actimousse® for Little Ones pp. 212-213

Arch 2 arches fit together to create a tunnel or a ball pool (balls sold separately p. 271). • L/W: 70 x 25 cm; H: 60 cm; foam density 38 kg/m³. 313 309 370 508 2

269


Adventure Course Units

®

Actimousse

Technical information

2 YEARS + • Foam modules for creating variable fun-filled activity courses.

EN 71-1-2-3 No phthalates

• Velcro attachment. • For safe and easy installation: courses may be modified during activities. • For longer-lasting play: zip fasteners allow air release saving strain on stitching. • Foam density: 24 kg/m3. • Total safety: anti-skid covers, M2 fireproofing, zip cover makes foam inaccessible. • High quality, easy to clean, hardwearing, soft and smooth thermoplastic cover.

Concealed zip fastener

Anti-skid underside

Multi-positional Modules

3-Piece Stair Module 3 rectangular sections of decreasing sizes joined together by strong Velcro®.

Large Wave

Small Wave

3 large waves on a steep ramp.

2 small waves on a shallow ramp.

• L/W/H: 95 x 50 x 37.5 cm. • Red and yellow.

• L/W/H: 76 x 50 x 50 cm. • Red and yellow.

• L/W/H: 75 x 50 x 28 cm. • Red and yellow.

313 309 387 465 8

313 309 387 464 1

313 309 387 463 4

Springboard position

28 cm

Adaptable Springboard 50 cm

2 steady ramps and 1 base for use as a double-trampoline, or at an angle or double height. • Total L/W: 174 x 50 cm. • L/W/H right angle: 116 x 108 x 28 cm. • L/W/H height position: 116 x 50 x 50 cm. • Blue and yellow.

270

313 309 387 461 0

Small Springboard 1 right triangle, gentle slope. • L/W/H: 58 x 50 x 28 cm. • Blue and yellow.

Double-height position

313 309 387 462 7


Adventure Course Units

Half-Wheel Used on its own, this helps for work with instability or moving from above to below. With two combined, they form a complete wheel to move through or to nestle inside, held together by strong Velcro® strips.

3-Piece Stair Module

A tunnel, one way up, a beam support, the other. Yellow and green.

Balancing element on one side, rounded part on the other - can fill in the space of a half wheel. Perfect for moving along a route. • L/W/H: 47 x 23 x 28 cm. • Green and yellow. 313 309 387 480 1

• L/W/H: 100 x 50 x 28 cm. • Red and yellow. 313 309 387 479 5

Tunnel Supports

Half-Circle Seesaw

1 Ball Pool + 2 sets of 500 Balls + 3-Piece Stair Module (sold separately)

Low Support • H. tunnel: 32 cm. • L/W/H: 58 x 28 x 39 cm. 313 309 387 466 5

High Support • H. tunnel: 32 cm. • L/W/H: 58 x 28 x 62 cm. 313 309 387 467 2

Ball Pool A large space made up of 4 foam sides and a floor carpet, held up by powerful Velcro straps. Straight high edges to avoid overturning. Can be dismantled for cleaning, carrying and storage. • L/W/H: 165 x 165 x 40 cm; edges in 4 colours. • L/W/D carpet: 135 x 135 x 3 cm, red; ideal number of balls: 1,000.

• Sturdy foam: density 24 kg/m3. • High safety: non-slip covers, M2 fireproofing, foam inaccessible, hidden zipper. • High quality, easy-to-clean, smooth, soft and strong thermoplastic fabric cover. • Balls and stairs sold separately. 313 309 387 469 6

Beam Curved one side and flat the other. Can be placed on the ground or on 2 tunnel supports.

Ball Pool Balls

• L/W/H: 116 x 28 x 32 cm. • Red and yellow.

• Ø: 7 cm soft, strong plastic. • 4 assorted colours.

313 309 387 468 9

Set of 500 balls.

313 309 387 471 9

271


OM

W IT

P LI E S RD

Actigym

C

Adventure Course Units

®

H STAND

A

• Structure and protective flooring complies with safety standard NFS 54-300 for Educational material for motor skills. • To be used for educational activities supervised by a qualified adult.

2 YEARS + • Actigym is a structure for advanced motor skills made up of modular elements. It makes it possible to make plenty of progressive courses to encourage children to take risks (climb, jump, balance...). • The solid beech elements are easy to set up and offer great stability and excellent serviceable life.

• Supplied with 1 teacher’s leaflet proposing different uses and assembly instructions.

GUARANTEE

Installation Units

Polybase Design: Claude Imhoff

2 sides with 4 rungs, one side with 3 rungs. • L/W/H: 117 x 84 x 102 cm. • Weight: 18 kg. • Made of solid wood. 313 309 373 190 6

POINT Frame easy to change, even during a session.

Tower 4 sides: 5 rungs, 6 rungs, climbing wall, inclined “parrot ladder”. The two sides with rungs are adjacent, enabling corner climbing. • L/W/H: 160 x 160 x 163 cm. • L/W at top: 80 x 80 cm; Weight: 50 kg. • Made of solid wood, climbing wall in plywood. 313 309 387 423 8

272


Adventure Course Units

POINT Frame easy to change, even during a session.

SEE ALSO Protective Flooring p. 279

Small Bridge Podium Spacious platform for clambering up and down or round the corner. • L/W/H: 74 x 74 x 59 cm. • L/W platform: 64 x 64 cm. • Ø bars: 34 mm. • Plain varnished solid wood and blue lacquered plywood. 313 309 373 204 0

Designed for the smallest infants (from the age of 2). The Small Bridge makes it possible to design low courses. • In thick, solid wood and plywood with a blue finish. • L/W/H: 120 x 67 x 59 cm. • H/W under the arch: 43 x 38 cm. • Rung Ø: 34 mm. 313 309 373 218 7

273


Adventure Course Units

A c t i g y m

Connecting Elements • Elements to be used with the Tower and/or Polybase and/or Podium. • They fit onto the rungs of the structural elements with specially adapted elastic straps supplied with each element. • Each element comes with a teacher’s leaflet. • Ready-assembled.

All connecting elements are easy to install using the elastic straps.

Dogon Ladder Suspended Bridge

Ladder

Rope ladder fitted onto 2 parallel bars.

Ladder with 17 rungs.

• L/W: 220 x 48 cm. • Comes with 4 elastic straps. • Made of solid wood and rope.

• L/W: 220 x 48 cm. • Rung spacing: 8.5 cm. • Made of solid wood and rope.

313 309 373 192 0

313 309 373 173 9

The ladder is reversible and can be used as a standard beam.

5 footholds hollowed into a beam, for climbing with hands and feet. The ladder affixes to a supporting structure, Tower, Podium, or Polybase, and rests on the ground. • L/W/D: 125 x 8 x 8 cm. • Solid wood, rounded edges and corners. 313 309 373 210 1

Balancing Beam

Two fixed bars.

Slide Ramp

A small beam for setting between 2 supporting bars to help children develop balance. Can be affixed between Tower or Polybase structures.

• L/W: 220 x 48 cm. • Made of solid wood.

• L/W: 220 x 48 cm. • Made of solid wood and plywood.

• L/W: 175 x 48 cm. • Solid wood and rope.

313 309 373 179 1

313 309 373 172 2

313 309 373 208 8

Parallel Bars

Double-sided

Actigym® Elastic Cords ®

Reversible Actigym Climbing Surface 10 wide wooden pieces with rounded edges. A small sliding area on the back.

274

• In solid wood and in beech plywood. • L/W/thickness: 140 x 46 x 6 cm. 313 309 373 219 4

®

Highly resistant elastic cords for attaching connecting elements to the Actigym® structure. With handles for an easy grip. • Thick.: 7 mm. • Set of 4. 313 309 373 211 8


Adventure Course Units

Balance Wooden Balances • 2 complementary seesaws to add diversity to adventure courses. • Reversible elements: 2 usable sides. • Low height for safety.

WI

TH S TAND

RD

C

P LI E S

OM

A

NFS 54-300 Educational Material for Motor Skills.

Front/ Back Front/ Back

2 YEARS + 2 YEARS +

Double-sided Balancer A rocking board on a short axis with two different heights depending on the side used, for learning to balance in two stages. • In plywood, D: 2 cm, colourless or blue varnished wood. • L/W/H: 115 x 40 x 35 cm. • Max. angles: 9 and 19°. 313 309 373 195 1

Double-sided Basculo Bridge A progressive balancing element on a long axis for balancing practice. A flat surface on one side and rungs on the other. • In solid wood and colourless or blue varnished plywood. • L/W/H: 115 x 36 x 20 cm. • Ø rungs: 3.8 cm. • Max. angle: 19°. 313 309 373 193 7

Tunnels 2 YEARS + • Indoor/outdoor tunnels. • A washable, fireproof tarpaulin provides a safe covering over the coil frame. • Blue and yellow with transparent centre section.

Short See-through Tunnel • L/Ø: 1.80 m x 60 cm. 313 309 373 080 0

Supplied in a round, nylon bag for easy carrying and storage.

Long See-through Tunnel • L/Ø: 3 m x 60 cm. 313 309 373 081 7

275


Adventure Course Units

® 2 YEARS + • Modular system for creating highly adaptable activity courses for a wide variety of workshops. • Adaptable, for all levels, from the ages of 2 to 6. • Easy to store.

Throw

Clamber over and crawl under

Follow a course, jump

Climb through

Basic Gymkit® 3 Beams + 8 Blocks + 12 Rods (70 and 100 cm) + 16 Clips. 313 309 389 251 5

276


Clips

Blocks

A wide, stable platform for creating intersections and obstacles as well as varying heights for movement and stabilising supports for jumping. Stacks on 3 Blocks. Possibilities for attaching: - 3 Beams, on top and underneath; - on each tip: 1 pole Ø 2.5 cm; - in the centre Gymkit: 1 Hoop clip.

Clips for fixing rods to rods and rods to flat-section hoops (4 clips of each type). These clips have two pre-set positions (parallel and perpendicular).

These plastic blocks are used for holding the 2- or 2.5-cm gym rods horizontally or vertically. They slot together to create a variety of different heights, act as struts for Gymkit Beams and are ballasted for stability.

• Strong plastic elements. • Set of 8.

• H/Ø: 12 x 16 cm; Total ballasted weight: 1 kg. • Set of 4.

• Green plastic, covered surface. • L/W/D: 55 x 55 x 5.8 cm. • Weight: 1.6 kg.

313 309 387 434 4

313 309 371 425 1

313 309 389 252 2

Adventure Course Units

Platform

The connecting rod is easily inserted to attach blocks and beams.

Connecting Rods Easy-to-assemble rods that insert in the central hole of a beam to reinforce the connection between Blocks and Beams similar to Gymkit Rods. The rods fit in the top and are removed underneath by lifting the beam. No assembly recommendations for blocks and platforms.

Beams These plastic beams with anti-skid surface snap onto Gymkit Blocks and slot together. They can be used as balancing beams, steps or a bench.

• Blue plastic; L/Ø: 9.8 x 2.5 cm. • Set of 6.

• L/W/D: 100 x 16 x 5.8 cm. • Weight: 1.6 kg. • Set of 3.

313 309 371 403 9

313 309 371 426 8

Rods

Hoops

Hard plastic rods with protective tips. Can be used with Gymkit Beams, Blocks and Clips. Assortment of 4 colours.

Flat, hard-wearing plastic hoops. Specially designed to fit Gymkit Blocks and Clips. Assortment of 4 colours.

• Set of 4.

• Set of 4.

• Ø: 2.5 cm; L.: 70 cm.

• Ø/D: 35 x 0.72 cm.

313 309 387 429 0

313 309 373 000 8

• Ø: 2.5 cm; L.: 1 m.

• Ø/D: 50 x 0.72 cm.

313 309 387 430 6

313 309 373 001 5

• Ø: 2.5 cm; L.: 1.50 m.

• Ø/D: 65 x 0.72 cm.

313 309 387 431 3

313 309 373 002 2

Quick to install

277


Adventure Course Units

Indoor Mats • Strong, comfortable mats for low and floor-level motor activities.

Exercise mats POINT Attachment eyelet

Mats are edgedd and have a film covering on both bo sides to prevent contact with the foam.

2 colours: blue and green

Folding Gym Mat Floor Mats Foam mats for floor activities made of fully-edged, closed-cell foam. Covered on both sides with a film preventing any contact with the foam. Washable, lightweight and easy-to-store. Reinforced eyelets. • L/W/D: 100 x 50 x 0.8 cm. • Set of 2. 313 309 387 453 5

Polyethylene foam mat folds into 4 and is covered on both sides and fully enclosed to prevent any contact with the foam. One side is non-skid. Easy to store, this mat is comfortable, hard-wearing and washable. For floor activities. Colour: blue. • L/W/D: 140 x 50 x 0.8 cm. 313 309 387 456 6

POINTS

4-Colour Mat One side composed of 4 brightly coloured squares (red, green, blue and yellow), the other side is only blue. Strong stitching.

• Density 28 kg/m /m3. • Smooth S th easy-to-clean thermoplastic polymer cover. • Zip cover fastener for air-release, saving strain on stitching. • Zip cover makes foam inaccessible. • Anti-skid, M2 fireproof cover.

• L/W/D: 125 x 125 x 2 cm. 313 309 387 470 2

Large Activity Mat Large, rectangular activity surface for movement and play. Blue on both surfaces. • L/W/D: 190 x 140 x 3 cm. 313 309 387 401 6

278


Adventure Course Units

100 cm

• L/W: 150 x 100 cm. 313 309 387 410 8

150 cm

Comfort Mat - Light Blue

Thick 4 cm 100 cm

A very comfortable, thick mat with double stitching on each edge to guarantee firmness. In 28 kg/m3 density foam with coated fabric - non-slip underside.

180 cm

Comfort Mat - Navy Blue

• L/W: 180 x 100 cm. 313 309 387 411 5 Thick 4 cm

C

60 cm

Small Landing Mat

W IT

P LI E S

H STAND

A

NFS 54-300

Educational Material for Motor Skills 185 cm

Lengthways, ideal for developing motor skills, extending apparatus and protecting against falls (max. fall height 60 cm). Also adds to Actimousse units - attaches with self-fastening strips adhering on 4 sides or for holding several rugs in place. Non-slip underside. In 24 kg/m3 density foam, covered with M2 fire-resistant thermoplastic non-slip fabric, sliding closure without stopping piece for movement of air.

OM

RD

Landing mats

• L/W/D: 185 x 60 x 6 cm. 313 309 387 400 9 Thick 6 cm

Landing Mat

OM

W IT Thick 10 cm

313 309 387 457 3

P LI E S RD

C

• L/W/D: 200 x 100 x 10 cm; weight: 7.5 kg. • Foam PE 20 mm. 30 kg/m3 (shock-absorbing) + foam PU 80 mm open-cell foam density 25 kg/m3 (comfortable covering).

100 cm

200 cm

Thick mat, sewn on 6 sides with dual-resilience foam for soft landings (soft foam) and guaranteed anti-jarring (firm foam). The edges lined with a Velcro® strip enable several mats to be attached together. One side is anti-skid. Decompression vents make the foam inaccessible and enable a soft, shock-absorbent landing. Colour: blue. Guarantees a maximum landing height of 1 m.

H STAND

A

NF EN 12503-1-4-5-6 Gym mats: cushioning, non-slip surface

Modular Floor Covering 16 tiles + 16 edge tiles, total play area: 3.6 x 3.6 m (13 m2 approx.). 313 309 387 454 2

NFS 54-300

Educational Material for Motor Skills

Square Protective Flooring Easy to assemble

Protective Flooring High-density, low thickness foam for effective protection against bumps. Floor sections that slot together to create a modular indoor floor covering. This set of sections and edges enables you to create a protective floor covering compliant with the NFS 54-300 standard: no contact with the foam and guaranteed protection for falls of up to 1.65 metre. For P.E. areas featuring jumps higher than 60 cm, you are advised to install an additional landing mat. • L/W section: 90 x 90 cm; D.: 16 mm. • PE (polyethylene) Foam - density 72 kg/m3 - HD textile-feel film on two sides. • Edges: 87.5 x 4.5 cm; D.: 16 mm; PE protective film.

4 slabs and 8 kerbs. Ideal for creating a safe play area measuring 1.80 x 1.80 m (3.2 m2 approx.). 313 309 373 014 5

Replacement Edge Tiles Each set of protective floor tiles must be enclosed by edge tiles (Standard NFS 54-300). • Set of 4 edge tiles. 313 309 387 458 0

279


Balance, Coordination and Agility

Sensory Routes Tactile Paths • Innovative and stimulating, two sets to create paths that help with balance and sensory discovery. The thick surfaces stimulate the arches of the feet. • In highly resistant, anti-slip plastic, 100% recyclable. Supplied with a storage bag to facilitate transport.

Tactile Path - Waves 8 hump-back elements, easy to clip together to vary the paths: in a circle, in a straight line, in an S-shape, etc. Striped and spotted surfaces. • L/W/H: 68 x 18 x 11 cm. 313 309 373 012 1

Tactile Path - Stepping Stones

Wave and Rock Connectors To interconnect one rock and one to three waves. Each rock requires 3 connectors to be properly balanced. Suitable for the 3 rock sizes.

6 blocks in 3 different sizes that can be stacked and slightly inclined to vary the slopes, even when stacked. Striped, spotted and circled surfaces.

• In hard grey plastic. • L/W/H: 18 x 7 x 4 cm. • Set of 6.

• Ø/Thick: 27 x 8 cm / 35 x 14 cm / 40 x 13 cm.

313 309 373 029 9

Feet and Hands 24 foot and handprints: 4 shapes in 6 different colours (right and left feet, right and left hands). For indicating the direction of motor activity exercises. Strong, flexible plastic.

313 309 373 013 8

Motor-Skills Sections Tiles in 3 shapes – circle, square and triangle – to create paths and games on the floor. 6 different colours for each shape: red, green, blue, yellow, orange and purple. Excellent grip on the floor and for children’s feet.

• L. hand: 19 cm. • L. foot: 22.5 cm. • Set of 24.

• In highly resistant and flexible plastic, 3 mm thick. • Side triangle: 28 cm; side square: 23 cm. • Ø circle: 23 cm. • Set of 18.

313 309 312 036 6

313 309 371 164 9

EW

Large Sensory Balls 4 plastic balls in 4 different colours, flexible and very pleasant to the touch, each offering a different tactile stimulation. Supplied inflated. • PVC. • Ø: 14 cm; weight: 120 g. • Set of 4. 313 309 380 072 5

280

Stepping Stones Set of 8 plastic pieces on which children can walk, jump, run... The four colours can be arranged for balancing games. Equipped with anti-skid rubber pads. Assortment of 4 colours. • L/W/H: 24.5 x 24.5 x 4 cm. • Set of 8. 313 309 312 029 8


15-cm Coated Sponge Ball Small Foam Balls 8 very light yellow balls. • Ø: 7 cm; weight: 15g. 313 309 380 443 3

Sensorial Ball 2 balls in flexible plastic with soft spikes. In translucent blue and red.

With an easy-grip plastic covering that avoids bursting the sponge. Resumes its shape after squashing. • Ø: 15 cm; weight: 90 g. • Set of 2: 1 red, 1 orange. 313 309 373 023 7

Plastic Balls Re-inflatable red balls. Come inflated.

• Ø: 17 cm; weight: 90 g. • Set of 2.

• Ø: 22 cm; weight: 140 g. • Comes inflated. Re-inflatable with bicycle pump and inflation valve (not included). • Set of 4.

313 309 373 020 6

313 309 380 442 6

Rhythmic Balls Re-inflatable balls with extra bounce. Assortment of 4 colours.

Football • Ø: 22 cm, weight: 200 g. • Comes deflated. Inflatable with bicycle pump and inflation valve (not included). 313 309 380 495 2

• Ø: 20 cm; weight: 280 g. • Comes inflated. Re-inflatable with bicycle pump and inflation valve (not included). • Set of 4.

Balance, Coordination and Agility

Balls and Accessories

313 309 380 453 2

Mini Balls Small, easy-to-grip plastic balls. Assortment of 4 colours.

Foam Balls

• Ø: 14 cm; weight: 55 g. • Comes inflated. • Set of 12.

Yellow-coloured.

313 309 380 463 1

313 309 380 437 2

• Ø: 21 cm; weight: 260 g. • Set of 4.

Soft Balls Malleable balls filled with soft foam for the development of gripping and contact with textures. The balls can be squashed and resume their shape readily afterwards. • Ø: 16 cm. • Set of 2. 313 309 380 025 1

Basketball • Ø: 22 cm, weight: 200 g. • Comes deflated. Inflatable with bicycle pump and inflation valve (not included). 313 309 380 482 2

Ball Trolley A lightweight trolley for storing and transporting balls and balloons. Solid metal frame, caster-mounted. Delivered flat. • L/W/H: 98 x 50 x 52.5 cm; weight: 8 kg. • Delivered flat with assembly instructions. 313 309 372 774 9

Ball Bag Light, flexible bag in highly resistant knitted fabric, with a zipper, 2 handles and an adjustable shoulder strap. Can hold 15 to 20 balls. Yellow. • L/W/H: 76 x 31 x 31 cm. 313 309 380 067 1

281


Balance, Coordination and Agility

Agility Games • 3 fun workshops for organising activities in small autonomous groups: body movements, dexterity games, motor skills. • Large-scale games for communicating and learning to respect rules.

Knowing and naming the parts of the body

Coordinating movement with other children

Expression through mime

18 character counters

1 canvas carrying bag

1 plastic game mat (140 x 210 cm)

1 foam dice, with a clear plastic pocket on each side for inserting a card

4 YEARS +

15 Body Discovery Games A fun and educational game for organising motor skills focused on body knowledge and control. 15 games of increasing difficulty and variations, based on: recognition of the different parts of the body; relaxation; dissociation; coordination; memorisation of short sequences; expression through gestures. The games encourage the children to communicate so that they all succeed in winning all the team’s points and the trophy! • L/W mat: 140 x 210 cm. • Comes in canvas bag.

1 weighted bag

54 illustrated cards

313 309 371 118 2

WI

TH S TAND

RD

C

P LI E S

OM

A

EN 13219 Trampolines

Round Trampoline

Play Mat -Targets In extra strong reinforced PVC. Good floor holding. Can be used both indoors and outdoors. Can be washed by rinsing thoroughly.10 colourful targets in different diameters, numbered 1 to 5; 1 reference point for orientation.

282

• L/W: 183 x 118 cm. • Weight: 872 g. 313 309 373 034 3

Designed to provide trampoline fun in complete safety. The frame cannot be bent out of shape, and is protected against wear by epoxy paint. 6 detachable chrome legs with anti-skid rubber tips ensure perfect stability. Thanks to a very carefully designed fastening system, the 34 heavy chrome springs distribute weight evenly across the nylon tarpaulin. The frame is padded with polyethylene foam, and covered with washable vinyl. • Ø: 102 cm; H: 22 cm; weight: 8.6 kg. 313 309 373 083 1

1 teacher’s leaflet


1 poster: 14 breathing exercises

4 YEARS +

Concentration Games and Yoga Gilles Diederichs

84 motor activities to master movement and concentration. Children practise slowly breaking down a movement, becoming conscious of their body and mastering their breath. A development plan and instruction photo cards allow for 70 varied, fun motor activities to be carried out throughout the school year. A poster shows 14 breathing exercises for relaxation.

Balance, Coordination and Agility

35 double-sided instruction cards

• L/W of poster : 58 x 42 cm. • L/W of instruction card: 29 x 21 cm. • The case contains: 1 development plan, 1 poster, 35 double-sided instruction cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 391 274 9 1 development plan: 70 motor activities

1 foam dice

25 instruction cards

25 instruction cards

3 YEARS +

Gymdice with Cards An enjoyable way of organising large movement games with instructions: each card describes a way of moving and the number of steps to take. The cards are grouped into families of 6: move in pairs, vary jumps, move like an animal, dice number cards and a joker. The dice can also be used to invent other games. • Dice size: 15 x 15 cm. • Includes a foam dice covered with coated fabric with transparent PVC pockets, 25 illustrated instruction cards, 1 set of instructions. 313 309 371 161 8

Move like an animal: - crab; - duck; - bear, etc.

Move in pairs: - back to back; - foot to foot; - by leapfrogging, etc.

Vary jumps: - hop; - feet together; - heel to bottom, etc.

283


Indoor and Outdoor Equipment

Essentials

Hoops Lightweight plastic hoops with internal joint, available in two sizes. Assortment of 4 colours.

EW

• Ø: 36 cm. 313 309 373 224 8

• Ø: 50 cm.

Coloured Ropes

313 309 373 220 0

Sturdy, weather-proof ropes. Assortment of 4 colours.

• Ø: 60 cm.

• L/Ø: 2 m x 8 mm. Set of 4.

313 309 373 221 7

313 309 387 187 9

Bowling Game Agility game with 10 plastic pins in 5 different colours, and 2 bowling balls. The pins can be weighted. • Supplied with a storage bag. • H/Ø pin: 28 x 5.5 cm; weight: 70 g. • Ø ball: 10.8 cm; weight: 75 g. 313 309 373 096 1

Gymnastics Ribbons Jump Ropes In polypropylene. Light plastic handles. 4 assorted colours. • L: 1.85 m. Set of 8. 313 309 312 044 1

4 ribbons, 4 different colours. Swivelmounted. Removable for hand washing. • Satin • Ribbon L/W: 180 x 5 cm. • Handle L: 58 cm. 313 309 373 222 4

Weighted Bags Scarves

4 soft strong scarves for juggling, dance, gymnastics and rhythmic exercises.

Triangular cotton scarves in 4 assorted colours.

• L/W: 65 x 65 cm. Set of 4.

• L/W: 63 x 43 cm. Set of 12.

• L/W bag: 18 x 10 cm. • Weight:110 g. Set of 8.

313 309 380 050 3

313 309 380 438 9

313 309 312 003 8

Stilts

Multi-use Cones 4 light plastic cones. They can be used with the Gymkit® poles and hoops (see p. 277) to create varied routes.

284

Balancing bags made of sturdy cloth. Assortment of 4 colours. New plastic microbead filling.

Coloured Scarves

• 4 different colours. • H: 30 cm. • Base L: 24 cm. 313 309 373 097 8

Sports-style Bibs 16 bibs in 4 colours: red, green, blue, yellow. In highly resistant plain weave nylon, with elastic side bands.

3 pairs of cylinder-shaped plastic stilts, lightweight and stable for practising balance. Assortment of 3 colours.

• Size: 3 - 6 years; W/H: 30 x 25 cm. Set of 16.

• H/Ø stilt: 12.5 x 10.5 cm. • L. string : 60 cm. • 3 pairs.

313 309 380 491 4

313 309 312 002 1


Target game 2 targets in printed, adhesive fabric. The child aims and throws weighted projectiles that adhere to the targets. The hang-up targets can be personalised using felt-tip pens or pencils. • Target Ø: 38 cm. • L. projectile: 15 cm. • Set of 2 targets and 6 projectiles. 313 309 373 017 6

Hop Ball A heavy-duty vinyl ball fitted with a flexible, easy-to-hold plastic handle. • Ø: 45 cm; weight: 730 g. • Comes deflated with inflation valve. 313 309 312 017 5

Indoor and Outdoor Equipment

3 YEARS +

Racing Steering Wheel

3 YEARS +

Big Blue Ball • Ø: 85 cm; weight: 2 kg. • Comes deflated with stopper. 313 309 380 451 8

Original, fun toy. It develops hand/eye coordination and balance, and stimulates the imagination. • In plastic; rubber wheel. • H: 63 cm; Ø steering wheel: 18 cm. • Weight: 0.55 kg. 313 309 372 644 5

Parachute Perfect for loads of activities - physical fun, coordination and cooperation. Comes with 12 reinforced, hard-wearing handles and 12 supports. Can be used inside and outside.

Three-Seat See-Saw Fitted with 2 handles for balancing 2 or 3 children. • Plastic, very hard wearing. • L/W/H: 1.20 x 40 cm x 56 cm. • Seat H.: 23 cm. 313 309 372 551 6

• Nylon fabric. • Comes in a nylon bag for ease of movement and storage. • Ø: 3.50 m. 313 309 380 070 1

Find out more about this product: www.nathan.fr/parachute/

285


Indoor and Outdoor Equipment

Cycles Angeles Cycles Very strong rubber handles

• Range designed for intensive shared use. • Only the handlebars and saddle of the carrier require assembly. • Supplied with assembly instructions.

Frame in reinforced steel with anti-rust treatment

Saddle length ensures seating adapted to each child

Handlebar locking system designed to prevent pinched fingers

Rubber reinforcement to protect the rear bar from wear

GUARANTEE for the frame Self-lubricating nylon bearings

Solid tyre in reinforced rubber Solid rim designed to prevent pinched fingers Strong pedals, protected fastening system

2 YEARS +

3 YEARS +

Small Tricycle

Medium Tricycle

• Metal. • L: 69 cm; W: 50 cm; H of handlebars: 53 cm; H of saddle: 30 cm. 313 309 372 663 6

• Metal. • L: 77 cm; W: 54 cm; H of handlebars: 63 cm; H of saddle: 36 cm. 313 309 372 664 3

Rear brake

3 YEARS +

Scooter

286

• Metal. • L: 94 cm; H of handlebars: 70 cm. • L of platform: 29 cm. • Ø wheel: 20 cm. 313 309 372 666 7

4 YEARS +

Large Tricycle • Metal. • L: 92 cm; W: 62 cm; H of handlebars: 69 cm; H of saddle: 41 cm. 313 309 372 665 0


Indoor and Outdoor Equipment

EW

3 YEARS +

Carrier • Metal. • L: 110 cm; W: 59 cm; H of handlebars: 63 cm; H of saddle: 36 cm. 313 309 372 668 1

EW Four-wheeled Toddler Ride-on Stable, lightweight ride-on toy suitable for small children. 4 wheels and handlebars for steering. • Hard plastic. • L/W: 52 x 29 cm. • Seat height: 23 cm; L of wheel: 7 cm. • Weight: 2 kg. 313 309 372 661 2

287


Index 1, 2, 3... Happy Families Games .......................29, 78 1, 2, 3... I Can Count .......................75 3-D Cut-outs ........................ 120-121 3D Magnetic Cut-outs ..................120 3D Quadrimemo - Vehicles ............66 3D Quadrimemo - Animals ............66 3-Piece Stair Module ...................270 15 Body Discovery Games............282 16 Little Frogs ................................81

A A Walk in the Woods ......................81 A, B, C (Puzzle) .............................122 Abacolor ................................. 94, 134 Abacus................................ 34-35, 44 Abacus Sets ............................. 34-35 Acromaths Activity Cards...............42 Acromaths Materials ...............42, 45 Acromaths Sets ....................... 41-43 Acrylic Paint .................................194 Actibaby.........................228-230, 267 Acticroco ......................................101 Actidolls .......................................100 Actigym ........................................274 Actimousse® for Little Ones .....212-213, 236, 268-269 Activity Mats .................................278 Activity Panels ..............................230 Activity Side Table ........................259 Activity Table ................................262 Activity Units - Clorofile ...... 216-219 Adaptable Springboard ................270 Adhesive Magnetic Rubber ..........231 Adjustable Partition .....................207 Agility Games ....................... 282-283 Alphabet Magnatab .......................21 Alphabet Simplis ............................22 Alumargent Sheets ......................188 Angeles Cycles .................... 286-287 Anilacing ........................................98 Animages - Pets ..............................6 Animages - Wild Animals ...............6 Animal Lacing ................................98 Animal Sounds Lotto .....................70 Apple Hammer Toy.........................90 Association Games ........................74 Atelier Abacolor ...........................134 Attendance Board ..........................55 Audio Flashcards - Animals ....11, 70 Audio Flashcards Everyday Sounds ......................11, 71

B

288

Babybeads......................................98 Babycolour ..................................115 Babyconnect.................................109 Babyshapes ..................................115 Babytactile ...................................115 Back Units MobiNathan ...............256 Balancing Beam...........................274 Ball Bag........................................281 Ball Pool ............................... 230, 271 Ball Trolley ...................................281 Balls and Accessories..................281 Bambouchi ...................................111 Bambouchicolour.........................111 Base 10...........................................44 Basic Gymkit® ..............................276 Baskets .......................... 86, 146, 156 Batibriques...................................107 Bead Frame House ........................93 Beads and Accessories ................202 Bear Musical Mobile .....................87 Bedding ........................................153 Bench with Back Support ............235 Big Blue Ball ................................285 Bingo ........................................29, 75 Birthday Tea Party .........................80 Board Games ........................... 80-83 Bob and Lisa Get Dressed ...........102 Body Discovery Puzzles ...............116 Bolsters ................................ 209, 236 Bolt Tree.........................................96 Bon Appétit! .............................56, 83 Book Boxes .......................... 244-245

New products are in bold Book Tower ..................................241 Bowling Game ..............................284 Broaden vocabulary .................... 4-7 Buckets ........................................171 Buffet............................................145 Bush Supports - Clorofile ............206

C Cabochons ...................................189 Capital Letter Stamps ....................22 Capital Letter Stickers .................177 Car (Pretend Play)........................161 Card for Cutting ...........................191 Card Games ............................. 76-79 Card Holders ..................................79 Cardboard Trays ...........................257 Castle ...........................................165 Central Processing Unit Stand ....263 Chain Links ....................................97 Chairs - Clorofile ................. 226-227 Chronological Sequences ..............14 Clics..............................................110 Clocks.............................................54 Clorofile ................ 216-227, 246-247 Clorofile Casters .........................219 Clorofile Storage Units ....... 246-247 Clothes Dryer ...............................151 Coffeemaker ................................148 Coline Glue...................................197 Colorine ........................................195 Colour Lengths ..............................36 Colouring-in Stickers...................177 Column Shelving Unit ..................251 Comfort Mats ....................... 208, 279 Comforter Cushion ........................86 Compact Dressing-up Unit ..........159 Compact Easel .............................259 Compact Kitchen ................. 142-143 Computer Unit on Wheels ...........263 Concentration Games and Yoga...283 Constructamagnet .......................105 Construction Games............ 104-113 Cooking Utensil Set .....................148 Coulisso .......................................110 Counting Animals ..........................45 Counting Box Sets.................... 24-25 Counting Games ................ 29, 75, 77 Counting Materials........................44 Counting Stickers ........................177 Country Animagnets ....................104 Cow-Shed .....................................163 Creacolour ........................... 194-197 Crocodile - Size Sequencing Length ..........................................119 Crowns .........................................180 Cut-outs .............................. 114-122 Cut-outs - My Wardrobe ..............116 Cut-up Magnetic Fruits ...............149 Cycles ................................... 286-287

D Decorating Kits ............................182 Deep Clear Trays..........................255 Dice ................................................44 Ding-Dong Ball ..............................86 Dining Set ....................................148 Discolud - Geometric Shapes .......74 Discolud - Numbers & Quantities .74 Discovering Lengths ......................37 Discovery Lift-out Puzzles ...........117 Disguises.............................. 158-159 Display and Shelving Units .. 242-243 Display Boards .............................231 Doctor’s Case ...............................155 Dogon Ladder ..............................274 Doll House....................................165 Dolls and Accessories.......... 156-157 Domino - Numbers ........................64 Double Computer Unit .................263 Double-sided Balancer ................275 Double-sided Basculo Bridge ......275 Double-sided Easel ......................259 Double-sided Library Furniture...240 Dress Set ......................................157 Dressing-up ......................... 158-159 Duo-art Painting and Modelling Tools ...........................201

E Easel Back Unit.................... 256, 259 Educards .................................. 78-79 Equiliwood ...................................105 Ethnic Baby Dolls .........................156 Ethnic Dolls ..................................156 Euro Coins ......................................44 Everyday Life Lotto ........................63 Everyday Safety ................................8 Express Train ...............................169 Extra Basic Magnetic Shapes ......103 Extra Larder .................................143 Extra Letters ..................................22 Extra Magnetic Shapes ................103 Extra Rails ....................................169

F Fabric Supports ...........................183 Face Games....................................68 Fairy Tales Lacing Shapes .... 99, 135 Fairy Tales Set ................................19 Farandole .....................................134 Farm .............................................162 Farm and Animals ............... 162-163 Farm Magnets ..............................103 Feet and Hands ............................280 Felt Sheets ...................................187 Fine Board Markers ............... 21, 192 Fingercards - Numbers .................77 Fingercards Spatial Awareness ............. 46-47, 76 Fingertip Letters ............................20 Fingertip Numbers ........................20 Fire Engine ...................................168 First Acromaths Set ......................41 First Numbers Set .........................23 Flexible Animal Bricks .................106 Flexible Train Bricks ....................106 Floor Mats ....................................278 Floor Seats ..................................236 Flower Puzzle...............................122 Foam Seats ..................................237 Foam Stamps ...............................199 Folding Gym Mat ..........................278 Food Games ....................... 56, 63, 69 Four-wheeled Toddler Ride-on ..287 From Pictures to Words .................18

G Garage Station .............................167 Garden Tools ................................171 Gathering Carpet - Spot ..............234 Gearwheels ..................................113 Géoblocks ....................................105 Geocolor ................................. 53, 133 Geometrix............................... 53, 133 Geometry ................................. 52-53 Geomosaic ...................................132 Geoplans ........................................52 Geo-Shapes..................................122 Geo-Wood .....................................122 Giant Bricks .................................107 Giant Tree to Decorate ................180 Giant Wall Pouch ..........................231 Giraffe - Size Sequencing Height...........................................119 Glue Brushes ...............................197 Good Day! .......................................83 Gouache .......................................194 Graphic Slates........................ 21, 192 Graphics Training Activity Cards....21 Group Easel..................................258 Gymdice with Cards .....................283 Gymkit® ................................ 276-277

H Half-Circle Seesaw ......................271 Half-Wheel ...................................271 Hand puppet - Crocodile .............160 Hand puppet - Monkey ................160 Hand puppet - Mouse ..................160 Helmets........................................158 Hen Run .........................................80

High Chair ....................................157 Hoops ................................... 277, 284 Hourglasses ...................................54 Housekeeping Set ........................151

I I Sort Out My Waste........................57 Illustrated Stickers ......................178 Image Sequences Sands of Time ..........................16, 54 Images for Building On ..................17 Indoor Bench................................235 Instruments ......................... 174-175 Iron ...............................................151 Ironing Table ................................151

J K Jigsaws and Puzzles ........... 114-122 Jobs ................................................79 Jump Ropes .................................284 Key Teething Rattle ........................86 Kitchen Table ...............................143

L Lace-up Shapes - Farm .................99 Lace-up Shapes - Village...............99 Lacing Set - Goldilocks and the 3 bears ............................135 Lacing Set Little Red Riding Hood ................135 Lacing Shapes Goldilocks and the 3 bears ...........99 Lacing Shapes - Little Red Riding Hood ...................................99 Ladder ..........................................274 Landing Mat .................................279 Language Game 2 ......................9, 68 Large Images - Living Together ....17 Large Manipuloo ............................94 Large Sensory Balls....................280 Large Storage Unit with Doors Clorofile .......................................247 Large Unit with Pigeonholes .......251 Large Wave...................................270 Laundry Unit ................................151 Lean-to Wall Easel.......................259 Lexico .......................................10, 79 Library Furniture ................. 240-245 Lids...............................................255 Lifelike Fairy Tales .......................118 Lion - Size Sequencing................119 Lisa and Bob Get Dressed ...........102 Listening Sets .......................... 11-13 Listening to Stories 1 .....................13 Little Ones’ Activity Table .............262 Little People .................................167 Logic Blocks ...................................52 Logic Games ..................................73 Logic Puzzle - Geometric shapes.................................... 40, 129 Logic Puzzle - Numbers........ 40, 129 Logic Puzzle - Size ................. 40, 129 Logic Puzzle Spatial Recognition ................ 40, 129 Logical Identification 1...................40 Logicoloredo ..................................32 Long See-through Tunnel ............275 Look and Find Level 1 ....................73 Lotto - Colours ...............................64 Lotto - From 1 to 10 .......................64 Lotto - Objects ...............................64 Lottos ....................................... 60-64

M Magic Plastic ................................152 Magnetic Activities .............. 102-103 Magnetic Animals........................104 Magnetic blocks ...........................105 Magnetic Board and Letters ..........22 Magnetic Board and Pieces .........103 Magnetic Characters ...................104 Magnetic Counters.......................231 Magnetic Cursive Letters .............22


Magnetic Erasable Whiteboards .................. 21, 103, 192 Magnetic floral frame ....................92 Magnetic Label Holders......... 27, 231 Magnetic Maze ...............................92 Magnetic Number Line ..................27 Magnetic Panel Back Unit ...........256 Magnetic Petipano .......................102 Magnetic Storage Pocket ..... 103, 231 Magnetico.....................................105 Magnetico Cards ..........................105 Magnifying Glasses ........................57 Magnifying Jars..............................57 Make-up sticks.............................158 Making up Fairy Tales ....................18 Manipano................................ 89, 209 Manipano Activity Panels ................ 91, 211, 222 Manipuloo.......................................94 Marionettes for Decorating ........180 Markers and Felt-tips ..................192 Market Stall .................................149 Masks ...........................................186 Matriochkas .................................119 Mats....................... 208-209, 236, 278 Mattress .......................................236 Maxi Actibaby ...............................267 Maxi Dice ........................................44 Maxi Fishes ....................................97 Maxi Stacking Cups........................90 Maxi Storage Buckets .................257 Maxibolts ........................................96 Maxibricks ....................................106 Maxi-Chains ...................................97 Maxicoloredo® ..............................130 Maxicolour....................................193 Maxigeocoloredo® ........................131 Maxilotto Animals ..........................62 Maxilotto Colours ...........................62 Maxilotto Food..........................56, 62 Maxi-magnifying Glass ..................57 Maximemo Foods ...........................65 Mazes .............................................92 Measuring Cups .............................44 Memo - Farm .................................65 Metal Board..................................231 Metal Wall Racks .........................243 Metallic Markers ..........................193 Mini Actibaby ....................... 215-216 Mini Bricks ...................................110 Mini-patterns and Maxi-beads Set ..............................33 Mirrors ................................. 155, 187 Mobile Bench ....................... 232, 235 Mobile Cloakroom .......................232 Mobile Easel.................................258 Mobilo® .........................................113 MobiNathan Casters ............ 248, 261 Modelling and Affixing .................200 Modular Kitchen .................. 140-141 Mosaic Chips ................................188 Mosaicolor....................................132 Mosaics and Tiling ............... 130-133 Motor-Skills Sections ..................280 Movable Picture Dryer .................261 Multi-activity Table.......................262 Multicoloured Brads ........... 180, 189 Multi-coloured Floor Cushions ..................... 234, 236 Multicubes ............................... 44-45 Multidice.........................................44 Multi-Level Garage ......................166 Multi-Sided Shape Sorter ............122 Muscle Car .....................................90 Museum - Puzzle .........................127 Music .................................... 174-175 Musical Bear ..................................86 Musical Instruments Audio Games.................... 12, 71, 175 Musikit..........................................175 My 1st Safari ..................................80 My First Sound Situations Lotto 13, 72 My First Tool Kit ...........................112 My First Workbench .......................96 My School Friends .......................116

N Nathan House ...............147, 224-225 Nature Activities ............................87 Nature Games ..........................57, 68 Nature Mat ...................................163 Nest Baby Cushion................. 87, 209

Noise-Making Fabric Rattles .........86 Number Box Set.............................26

O Opposites Lotto ..............................63 Organicolor ............................ 52, 133 Organicubes ...................................51 Overalls .......................................195

P Paddock........................................163 Painting and Accessories..... 194-197 Painting Trolley ............................260 Paper and Cardboard ...................191 Paper Flowers .............................189 Paper Storage Unit with Drawers ................................261 Parachute .....................................285 Parallel Bars ................................274 Partitionette Connector..................... 206, 221, 223 Partitionettes and Bush Supports ..................... 206-207 Patterns and Beads Set .................33 Peek-a-boo Structure ....................88 Pencils..........................................193 Pets - Puzzles ..............................123 Photo Boxes ........................... 4-7, 54 Photo Sequence Set 1 ....................16 Pick-up Truck ................................90 Picture Dryer................................261 Picture Filing Trolley ....................261 Pingrip..........................................107 Piolino ............................................73 Plastanat ......................................200 Plastic Baskets ............................257 Plastic Photo Holders ......... 233, 255 Plastic Shape Box .................. 90, 122 Plastic Shape Tracer Set...............52 Plastic Tangrams ...........................52 Plastic Tokens ................................45 Plastic Trays.................................255 Play basins ..................................148 Play Boat (Pretend Play) ..............161 Play Food and Grocer ..................149 Play Mat - Targets ........................282 Playing Table ................................164 Ploum Chronological Series ..........14 Podium .........................................273 Polybase .......................................272 Poly-M® ........................................109 Pompoms .....................................190 Pool and Slide Connectors ..........230 Portable Listening Unit ................175 Portrait Games...............................73 Pots & Pans .................................145 Potter’s Clay .................................200 Primo Maxicoloredo® ...................130 Protective Flooring ......................279 Pull Along Dog ...............................88 Pull Along Elephant .......................88 Pull Along Penguin ........................88 Puppet Theatre ............................160 Pushchair .....................................157 Puzzle - Museum ........................127 Puzzle Cubes - Little Creatures...129 Puzzle Storage Rack ....................118 Puzzle Tray ...................................122 Puzzles................................. 123-129 Pyjama Set ...................................157

Q Quadriludi Table - Numbers ..........39 Quadriludi Table - Shapes .............38 Quadriludi Table Spatial Awareness .........................39 Quadrimemo - Animals .................67 Quadrimemo - Everyday life ..........67 Quadrimemo Shapes and Colours .......................67 Quantissimo - Counting Games.....78 Questions-Answers Set ...................9

R Race Track ...................................167 Racing Steering Wheel ................285 Raffia ............................................189

Reception Area .................... 231-233 Red Bedroom ....................... 154-155 Red Wardrobe ..............................155 Reversible Actigym Climbing Surface .........................274 Rhodoid ........................................188 Ritmo ..............................................32 Rituals ............................................55 Road Mat ......................................166 Roller Animals ...............................90 Ropes ...........................................284 Russian Dolls ...............................100

S Scales and Cash Register ............148 Scenario Chronological Sequences ..............16 Screw-on Ladybird .........................96 Sea World Wall Panel ..................210 Self-adhesive Outlines.................177 Self-adhesive Ribbons ................190 Self-correction Games........76-77-78 Sensory Baby Beads .....................98 Sensory Balls ...................... 280-281 Sensory Book ................................86 Sensory Games ........................ 60-61 Service Station .............................166 Shapes Rollers .............................196 Shelving Unit ................................250 Shop Counter ...............................150 Shopping Corner ..........................150 Shopping Trolley ..........................150 Short See-through Tunnel ...........275 Simple Scales.................................44 Slide Cubes ....................................44 Slide Ramp ...................................274 Small Multicoloured Trays ... 233, 255 Small Springboard .......................270 Small Transparent Trays .... 233, 255 Small Wave...................................270 Soft Animals - Cow & Calf...........164 Soft Animals Elephant & Baby Elephant ..........164 Soft Animals - Ewe & Lamb ........164 Soft Animals - Giraffe & Lion......164 Soft Animals - Mare & Foal.........164 Sorting Abacus ...............................34 Sorting Animals .............................45 Sorting Beads ................................35 Sorting Boxes .................................45 Sorting for the Planet ..............57, 83 Sorting Material .............................45 Sorting Set - Animals ....................31 Sorting Sets ............................. 30-31 Sound Association Games....... 70-72 Sound Discovery Blocks ................65 Sound Lotto of Everyday Sounds ...70 Sound Situations Lotto ............12, 72 Spatial Awareness ................... 46-49 Spatial Awareness Sets .................50 Sponge Sheets .............................187 Stencils ........................................198 Stepping Stones ...........................280 Stereo Headphones .....................175 Stereo Multi-Headphone Adapter 175 Stickers ................................ 176-179 Stickers-Eyes ...............................177 Stools ...........................................143 Storage Box on Casters ...............235 Storage Boxes ..............................257 Storage Shelf ...............................170 Storage Unit with Doors - Clorofile .................. 246-247 Striped Pipe Cleaners .................190 Structuro ........................................51

T Table - Clorofile ...........................227 Table Top Cooker..........................143 Tactibeads ......................................97 Tactidominos ..................................60 Tactifingers ..................................197 Tactile Imps ..................................101 Tactile Path ..................................280 Tactilo® ...........................................60 Tactiloto ..........................................61 Tactiludi Animals ...........................60 Tactirollers ...................................196 Tales to Tell ....................................19

Tambourines ................................174 Technico Junior® ..........................112 The 5 Senses Games............ 8, 61, 69 The Animal Race ............................75 The Clown ......................................93 The Colour Game ...........................81 The Lake Monster ..........................82 The Right Order of Pictures ...........15 The Wolf Game ...............................82 The Word Family Game ..................10 The Zigomaths ...............................28 Thermometer .................................57 Things to Decorate .............. 180-186 Three-Seat See-Saw ....................285 Tidy-Pouches ...............................231 Time Awareness ............................54 Toddler Trolley .............................156 Top Shelving Unit .........................250 Top Unit with Doors......................250 Top Unit with Pigeonholes ...........251 Topology Set 1 ................................48 Topoprimo ......................................47 Toporama .......................................46 Tower............................................272 Tracing Stencils .......................20, 93 Traditional Bedroom ....................153 Traditional Kitchen............... 144-145 Traffico ...........................................82 Trampoline ...................................282 Transparent Trays ............... 233, 257 TriBenches ...................................235 Triolo ..............................................95 Triolo Set ........................................95 Trucks ..........................................168 Tubulo...........................................109 Tunnel Supports...........................271 Two-tone Square Cushion............236

U V Ulysses the Puppet ......................160 Units with Pigeonholes ................251 Units with Shelves and Doors ......250 Units with Trays ................... 252-254 Uppercase Letters .........................22 Vanity Table ..................................155 Varnish .........................................197 Vases to decorate ........................186 Vehicles ........................................168 Vitamin Bedroom ........................152 Vitamin Kitchen ................... 138-139 Vitamin Stools ..................... 139, 152 Vitamin Storage Unit for Sorting ........................... 139, 152 Vitamin Table ....................... 139, 152 Vitamin Stools ..................... 139, 152

W Z Wall Mirror ...................................211 Wall Panels ..................................210 Wall-mounted Bar .......................211 Wall-mounted Changing Unit .....233 Wall-Mounted Easel ....................259 Wall-mounted Maxicoloredo®......131 Wall-mounted Shelf - Clorofile ....247 Wall-Tac .......................................231 Water and Sand Equipment . 170-171 Water Basin..................................170 Wave and Rock Connectors .........280 Wave Mats ....................................210 Weather for Children ............. 55, 103 Whiteboard Markers .............. 21, 192 Wiggle Eyes ..................................189 Wire Wall Racks ...........................243 Wood and Wire Display Unit.........256 Wooden Babygym................... 87, 209 Wooden Cars ................................167 Wooden Construction Set ..... 96, 112 Wooden Cut-outs .........................114 Wooden Maze .................................92 Wooden Puzzles .................. 123-129 Wooden Train Set .........................169 Wooden Vehicles ..........................167 Words in Photos .........................7, 10 Workbench ...................................151 Writing Aid .....................................22 Zen House ....................................146 Zippered Pockets - Set of 10.........45 Zoom - The Animal Kingdom ..........6

289


for Little Ones Crawling, rolling, touching, playing, discovering… Foam modules for assembly to create sensory paths for early years fun and encourage motor-skills and sensory exploration by children aged 9 months or over.

NEW

« TO DISCOVER p. 212 Head Office Nathan - Learning Materials Department 25, Avenue Pierre de Coubertin - 75211 Paris Cedex 13 - France Phone: 00 33 (0) 1 45 87 52 11 - Fax: 00 33 (0) 1 45 87 51 97 E-mail: export@nathan.fr www.nathan.fr/learningmaterials


Turn static files into dynamic content formats.

Create a flipbook
Issuu converts static files into: digital portfolios, online yearbooks, online catalogs, digital photo albums and more. Sign up and create your flipbook.